Electical Technical Specifications

CHOUIFAT HOTELS AND MALL - EL TAGAMOA EL KHAMES, EGYPT
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Project Manual
CHOUIFAT HOTEL AND MALL

EL-TAGAMOA EL KHAMES -EGYPT
MAY 2014
1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 16
INDEX
SECTION NO. TITLE
16000 ------------ ELECTRICAL GENERAL AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

16010 ------------ BASIC ELECTICAL REQUIREMENTS.
16030 ------------ ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION.
16120 ------------ LV CABLES AND WIRES.
16140 ------------ ELECTICAL RACE WAYS.
16160 ------------ EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS.
16180 ------------ UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICES.
16210 ------------ WIRING DEVICES.
16220 ------------ DIMMING DEVICES.
16240 ------------ DISCONNECT SWITCHES.
16260 ------------ ENCLOSED STARTES AND CONTACTORS.
16410 ------------ LV POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.
16420 ------------ LV PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16430 ------------ POWER FACTOR CAPACTTORS.
16440 ------------ PANEL BOARDS.
16510 ------------ INTERIOR LIGHTING.
16520 ------------ EXTERIROR AND STREET LIGHTING.
16530 ------------ EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING.
16550 ------------ SPECIAL LIGHTING.
16610 ------------ LV EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION SYSTEM.
16630 ------------ UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM.
16640 ------------ EARTHING SYSTEM.
16650 ------------ LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM.
16710 ------------ TELEPHONE SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.
16715 ------------ VOICE AND DATA CABLING SYSTEM.
16720 ------------ FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM.
16740 ------------ PUBLIC ADDRESS SOUND SYSTEM.
16750 ------------ LAN NETWORK
16760 ------------ TELEVISION CABLING SYSTEM.
16770 ------------ CATV SYSTEM.
16780 ------------ ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM.
16790 ------------ COMMUNICATION GROUNDING SYSTEM.
16910 ------------ ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.
2
ELECTRICAL — GENERAL AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Furnish all materials, equipment, tools and labor and install electrical work as
indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. It is the intent and purpose of
these specifications that, upon completion of the project, the electrical installation
shall be complete in all respects. Completely connect all systems outlets
receptacles, lighting, fixtures, equipment etc. shown noted or required, from source
of power to final connections and leave ready for satisfactory operation. Furnish and
install any mirror items omitted from design, but obviously necessary to accomplish
the above intent. Area of work to be included is as follows:
Low voltage secondary service and distribution system.
Branch circuit wiring system.
Lighting systems.
Convenience and power outlet systems.
Telephone systems.
Closed circuit television camera monitoring system.
Fire alarm system.
Power wiring for mechanical equipment and systems.
Security and burglar alarm system.
Emergency lighting system.
LAN (local area network system).
1.02 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A. Certain labor, materials and/or equipment may be furnished under other sections
of these specifications, but utility companies or the owner, when such is the case,
the extent source and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings
or described in the specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all labor, materials, and
or equipment for the complete installation of the electrical work shall be provided
under this section of these specifications.
1.03 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIRMENTS:

A. Definitions: Instructions in specifications or on drawings such as “Provide” shall
mean that the contractor under this DIVISION of the specifications shall furnish and
install the item, equipment, wiring, etc., complete with all details NEC is national
electrical code. NESC is national electrical safety code.
Section M-E 16000,
3
B. Drawings and Specifications: Electrical drawings indicated general design and

arrangement and required systems; however, these drawings are diagrammatic and
shall not be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions and measurements from
architectural drawings and equipment to be furnished and verify in field. Contractor
is responsible for all measurements taken in field. Study all drawings and
specifications including architectural, mechanical and structural and adjust electrical
work to confirm to all conditions indicated thereon; report any errors, omissions, or
points of conflict with the work of other trades to the architect before bidding.
Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for
by one shall be called for by both.
C. Specification by brand name: where materials, equipment, apparatus or other

products are specified by manufacturer, brand name, type catalog number, such
designation is to establish standards of desired quality and style and shall be the
basis of the bid. Materials so specified will be furnished under the contract unless
changed by mutual agreement. Where two or more designations are listed choice
shall be optional with the contractor.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Materials Substitution: Is the intent of these specifications to establish a standard

of quality of materials and equipment installed. If the contractor desires, he may
submit a request to use any materials or products other than those specified. He
shall so state his proposal and provide a list of the proposed substitutions
[manufacturer, brand name, catalog number, etc,. and state what difference each
will make (additional, deduction, no change)] in the contract price. He shall also
submit data showing the proposed substitutions alter the design or space
requirements indicated on the plans, the contractor shall include all items of cost of
all items of allied trades involved. Acceptance or rejection of the proposed
substitution shall be subject to acceptance of the engineer or architect, the
contractor shall submit for inspection samples of both the specified and proposed
substitute items.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings, catalog cuts, dimensional and operation
data, wiring diagrams such other data as requested, for acceptance by architect
before installation. Review these submittals prior to submission for acceptance.
Submit samples, shop drawings as requirements before start of electrical works two
(2) weeks after the signing of “approved contract agreement”.
4
1.06 MINOR DEVIAITONS AND CHANGES:
A. Installation: shall be as designed and in accordance with contract drawings and

specifications. Changes shall be accomplished per general electrical requirements.
Minor deviations necessitated by field conditions may be made upon approval by
architect.
Section M-E 16000
1.07 EXAMINATION OF SITE:
A. Prior to bidding, examine project site and be aware of all existing conditions.
1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS:
A. Make own provisions for delivery and safe storage of own materials and make
arrangements with other contractors for entry into building of equipment too large to
pass through finished openings. Contractor shall be responsible for materials and
equipment furnished to him by others for his installation in this project. Store
materials and equipment where protected from the weather.
1.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. Furnish one set of marked-up prints showing as built installation in accordance

with general requirements. Submit final complete “As-built electrical drawings”
before 100% final payment is accepted.
1.10 GUARANTEE:
A. Workmanship and operation of electrical installation shall be guaranteed for one

year from date of acceptance of work.
B. The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The owner shall
accept full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
immediately upon final acceptance of the building.
1.11 CODES AND REGULATIONS:
A. Comply with latest requirements of local utility company, national electrical

codes, national fire protective association, local electrical inspection authority and
any codes of Egypt that may pertain. Report to architect immediately any
discrepancies between drawings and codes and regulations, provide installation
superior to code where so indicated on drawings and specified herein.
5
1.12 STANDARDS:
A. Materials and installation will confirm to standards and practices of international

electrical code IEC and British standard (BS) , institute of electrical and electronic
engineers (IEEE), and the national bureau of standards unless drawings and
specifications requires a higher grade of materials and workmanship.
1.13 PROGRESS OF WORK:

A. Schedule works with that of other trades and in relation to entire installation so
that the entire project can be completed per construction schedules.
Section M-E 16000
1.14 PERMITS, FEES, TAXES:
A. Arrange and pay for all necessary permits, fees, and taxes.
1.15 PROTECTION:
A. Provide bracing, scaffolding, guard rails and protective devices necessary to

protect workmen and personnel from personnel injury due to electrical installation
while on job site.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Furnish and install material, equipment, and devices which are new, first quality,
which bear their label of approval and which are accepted by the architect for
installation in this project. Replace in a manner accepted by the architect and pay
for all equipment or materials damaged in the course of installation or test. Basic bid
shall include manufacturers and catalog numbers as shown on these
specifications or on the drawings. It shall be the contractor's responsibility under
substitutions and to assume full responsibility for all costs caused as result of
trades of the accepted substitutions to notify all related trades of the accepted the
substitutions. Prior to start of work, submit to architect manufacturers of these items,
which are to be furnished for this work?
2.02 TEMPORARY SERVICES:
A. Construction power and lighting: Provide temporary electrical service up to point

of delivery and installation of meter in job site and make necessary arrangements
6
with utility company. Provide temporary wiring outlets, lights etc. from load side of
the meter and as required for construction power and lighting.
B. Temporary wiring: Provide temporary wiring necessary for operation and

installation of designed electrical system, provide wiring which is safe and in
accordance with standard acceptance practices. Electrical contractor shall be
responsible for injury to personnel, or damage to materials, or equipment caused by
temporary wiring not properly installed or protected. Remove temporary wiring at
completion of project.
2.03 LOW VOLTAGE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION:
A. With all lighting and equipment turned on (insofar as is practical), take load
measurements at the main service and for all feeders leaving the main distribution
switch board or panel board. Take readings phase by phase. Make an insulation
resistance test on all phase busing within the main.
Distribution switchboard or panel board with the service entrance conductors
disconnected with all main fuses in place and main switches or circuit breakers
closed, and with all outgoing feeder switches or circuit breakers closed, and with all
outgoing feeder switches or circuit breakers open.
Section M-E 16000
Open main disconnect, devices is main service conductors are energized. Make
insulation resistance test on all feeder leaving the main distribution switchboard or
panel board. Make tests on load side of the feeder switch or breaker with this switch
or breaker open and all other beyond this point open. Make insulation resistance
test with a megger of minimum 500 volt potential. All insulation values and readings
shall be within requirements listed in section 110-7 of the National Electrical Code.
Test service ground which shall not exceed 5 ohms.
Carefully inspect main distribution switchboard and all branch circuit panel boards
or panel board to ensure that bus structure cable connections (both factory and
field) are electrically and mechanically tight and secure and that all non-current
carrying metal parts such as housing, frames, conduit raceways, etc. are securely
grounded. Demonstrate that entire system is free from short circuits and ground and
that all branch circuits, outlets lighting fixtures, equipment, etc., installed and
connected on to the electrical system are in good order.
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
7
A. Workmanship: Layout work in advance and install in a neat workmanship

manner. Provide competent workmen skilled in their trade and foreman or
superintendent who will be on job at all times.
B. Cutting and repairing: Provide cutting, channeling, patching, etc., necessary for
work under this division of the specifications. Make repairs to buildings or equipment
damaged during course of installation. Actual repair work shall be accomplished by
skilled craftsmen trades involved, but paid for under this division of the
specifications.
C. Cleaning and painting: Other trades will accomplish finished painting of electrical
equipment where done in field. Protect materials and equipment furnished with
factory finish during work. Clean all dust, dirt and paint smears from equipment and
repair and paint scars, blemishes and rust spots. Leave equipment in clean
condition.
D. Operating instructions and manuals: Furnish in accordance with general

requirements including “wiring diagrams” and “spare parts lists” for all systems and
equipment installed.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Operating and acceptance tests: Conduct operating test on entire electrical

installation. All system must be complete and in good operating order. Take
phase electrical load readings on main service energized so far as possible.
Provide readings at time of final acceptance, make insulation test on main
service equipment, all feeders and panel boards. Test ground-resistance to ground
shall not exceed 5 ohms. Inspect distribution system and panel boards. Connections
must be tight and secure.
Section M-E 16000,
3.03 ACCEPTANCE:
A. Final acceptance tests: upon completion of work, present certificate of approval

of local inspection authority before final owner acceptance in made. Final
acceptance by the owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received
and operating personnel thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all electrical
equipment by the electrical contractor. See the General Electrical Requirements.
END OF SECTION 16000
8
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All general provisions contained herein or within any other section of the
Specifications shall be fully applicable to each and every other section.
B. Works on all the Installation shall be carried out in a neat, efficient and
workmanlike manner, assuring satisfactory/proper operation, maintenance
and repair. The work shall be in accordance with the requirements of these
Specifications, and shall fulfill their true intent and meaning. No deviations
from these Specifications and/or Drawings shall be made without written
approval of the Engineer.
C. These Specifications and associated drawings form a composite set of
documents, intended for the selection and installation of equipment having
the general and specific characteristics as detailed.
D. Unless otherwise specifically stated, the installation shall be left complete,
tested and ready for operation in all respects and fully integrated and
coordinated with all other construction.
E. The Contractor shall submit proof, if requested by the Engineer that the
materials, appliances, equipment or devices that he furnishes and installs
under this contract, meet the requirements of BS, NFPA, UL as regards to
fire and casualty hazards.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work under this division of the specifications shall include furnishing all
labor, materials, equipment and services to install the complete electrical
system, putting into operation, tested and commissioned as shown on the
accompanied drawings and specified herein. The work includes, but is not
limited to, the following principal systems and equipment:
1. Future Provision for Incoming power supply from Electricity Supply

Authority.
2. Medium Voltage Power Distribution System including Provisional space
for MV switchgear, RMU, MV Cables.
3. Power Transformers.
4. Low Voltage Power Distribution System including LV distribution boards,
LV cables, bus ways, panel boards, etc.
5. Emergency Power PRIME-Generation and Distribution System including
prime duty generator(s), synchronization panel , ATSs, switchgears and
all accessories.
6. Un-interruptible Power Supply System for data server and security
9
systems.
7. Electrical Installations serving all mechanical plants (HVAC & Plumbing)
including all LV cabling, cable trays, disconnect switches and
connections to equipment.
8. Electrical Installations serving all special systems and equipment
provided under other divisions of the specifications such as elevators,
kitchen/laundry equipment, trash compactors, arm barriers, water
features, swimming pool, sports equipment and other electric-operated
equipment.
9. All kinds of electrical raceways, boxes and fittings.
10. All kinds of wiring devices, dimmers, disconnect switches, starters,
electric meters, etc.
11. Interior, exterior, emergency, exit, street, flood, façade and other special
lighting.
12. Lightning protection system.
13. Earthing system.
14. All low current systems as detailed in the tender documents.
1.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

A. The project will be installed in the absence of MV supply by the Electricity
Supply Authority. However, the scope shall consider the provisions of MV-
switchgear for future connection with the authority MV supply.
B. The Low Voltage Electrical Power Supply and Distribution System shall be 3
phase, 4 wire, 50 Hertz earthed neutral system. The voltage rating shall be
380/220 volts.
1.04 Lighting REQUIREMENTS
A. Lighting levels will be in accordance with appropriate standards and agreed
upon with the Supervising Engineer. Energy efficient Lighting Sources will be
the preferred source in all areas. Based on standards set forth by the
Illumination Engineering Society (IES):
1.05 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS

A. The earthing system shall in all respects comply with the following :
1. The British standards BS 7430 .

2. Any special requirements of the Statutory Electricity Supply Authority.
3. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
4. Any special requirements of separate earthing for low current systems as
per relevant standards or manufacturer’s recommendations.
5. Any requirements stated within the Specifications .
10
6. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).
B. The earthing system shall take the form of (TN-S) throughout the buildings
The Contractor must ensure that the installation of earthing system complies
with the requirements as laid down in section – “Earthing System” contained
elsewhere in the Specifications.
1.06 LOW CURRENT & SPECIAL SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS

A. Assign a specialist supplier/designer for all low current and special systems.
B. Specialist suppliers shall verify the design and submit shop drawings and
materials based on the requirements of the construction documents and
related international standards.
C The shop drawings and as-built drawings shall be stamped by the suppliers.
D The suppliers shall support their submittals with catalogues and satisfactory
calculations.
E Bear the cost of any extra item found necessary to have a properly functional
system prior to work start.
1.07 CO-ORDINATION
A The contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper co-ordination of all
phases of the Work and timely delivery to the site of all equipment and
materials for proper execution of the Work.
B. Co-ordinate the Work with all or any other disciplines to ensure proper
phasing and continuity of the Works. If it becomes necessary to remake any
part of these Works or that of any other discipline or trade as a result of poor
or badly timed co-ordination, then all costs associated with remaking those
Works will be borne by the Contractor.
C. Co-ordinate with all supply Undertakings and Authorities and shall include for
attendance along with all costs involved in re-directing existing services if
any.
D. Take into consideration all statutory and local requirements issued by the
Electricity Supply Authority, Central Government, Broadcasting Authority,
Telephone and Telecommunications Authorities along with any other
requirements to be considered for the correct and legal operation of the
Electrical and Telecommunication Installation or equipment connected to the
Installation as part of this Contract. Pay all costs due to the requirements of
any authority except for connection fees.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination with all Electrical &
Mechanical systems’ suppliers and shall include in his cost all the electrical
requirements (even if they were not mentioned in the BOQ or drawings) to
11
have a fully functional system as specified and as recommended by the

manufacturer or the codes. This is also applicable to all ancillary systems &
equipment such as : Security, Elevators, Kitchen & Laundry Equipment,
Audio-Visual, BMS and all low current systems.
1.08 CLIMATE CONDITIONS
A. External to building and in non-air conditioned spaces, all apparatus shall be
rated for an ambient temperature maximum of 50 oC, minimum of 0 oC,
generally dusty desert conditions, a maximum humidity of 100% RH.
B. In air conditioned buildings, all apparatus shall be rated for ambient
of 65% rh.
C. When equipment is installed in direct sunlight, it shall either be shielded from
direct radiation or suitably rated for additional solar gains. Cables shall
always be shielded from direct sunlight.
D. All apparatus shall be rated for continuous service twenty four hours a day,
seven days a week throughout its normal rated life, except for necessary
routine maintenance.
E. All equipment shall be rated for very harsh and corrosive environmental
conditions persist at project site. All buried installations shall be suitable for
aggressive and salty soil conditions.
1.09 ACCESSIBILITY
A. All works within the project and particularly above suspended ceilings or
inside vertical shafts shall be so installed as to be accessible for operation,
maintenance and repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to
accomplish this, but no change shall be made without written approval from
the Engineer. Locations of access doors and panels shall be approved by the
Engineer before installation work is commenced.
1.10 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All material and equipment, fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against
corrosion, deterioration and ingress of foreign matter and moisture.
B. All material and equipment shall be kept clear of the floor or ground by means
of wooden bearers and shall be protected against the weather with durable
waterproof wrapping and other appropriate means.
C. The Contractor shall be liable for any loss due to delivery, storage or site
security problems.
1.11 PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Provision shall be made to minimize noise and vibration. However, different
manufacturer's equipment will have varying sound and vibration
characteristics. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that
equipment installed does not transmit unnecessary noise or vibration.
B All equipment installed in plantrooms and outside areas shall not be audible
in the occupied areas.
C. Any vibration isolators, isolating bases, flexible connections, silencers, other
acoustic treatment or anti-vibration precautions necessary shall be included
in the rates for the equipment installation.
12
D. In individual cases, the suspension shall ensure that the natural frequency of
the vibratory system in the vertical direction is not more than 1/3 of the exciter
frequency and never exceeds 25 Hz.
E. Submit proof of the selected noise proofing measures to the Engineer before
commencement of work.
F. All costs of noise sound level measurements and any repeat measurements,
necessary if acoustic requirements are not met, shall be allowed for by the
Contractor.
1.12 GUARDS
A. All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to
adequately protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment.
The guards shall be constructed in such a manner that the movement of drive
belts and rotation of shafts may be readily observed without removal of the
guard.
B. All 'live' parts of electrical equipment shall be protected in such a way to
adequately protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment
from injury.
C. Wherever possible, all protective guards shall be supplied by the Equipment
Manufacturer. All guards shall be strongly attached to equipment and shall be
designed to be easily removed for access, servicing, adjustment and
maintenance.
1.13 SIGNS AND NOTICES
A. All signs and notices shall be in Arabic and English with the Arabic version
being above or to the right of the English version.
B. A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic translations shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to manufacture.
1.14 GOVERNING CONDITIONS
A. The entire Electrical Installation shall in all respects comply with the
requirements of the latest editions of the following Standards with any current
additions and amendments:
1. Local Codes and regulations.
2. National Electrical Code (NEC) – NFPA 70.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
6. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
7. Illumination Engineering Society (IES).
8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
9. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

13
10. International Organization of Standardization (ISO).
11. European Committee for Electrical Standardization (CENELEC).
12. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultive committee (CCITT).
13. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
14. Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE Wiring Regulation (BS

7671).
15. British Standards (BS).
16. Requirements or Standards stated elsewhere within the Specifications.
1.15 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the following shall be mounting
heights of equipment above finished floor level subject to full coordination
with architectural details and other disciplines/equipment. Any discrepancy
found between these heights and other details/disciplines shall be brought to
the notice of the Engineer for clarification and final decision.
Panel board 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL)
Isolating switch 1350 mm
Light switch 1350 mm (100 mm from door frame, horizontally)
Dimmer switch 1350 mm
Push button station 1350 mm
Wall mounted telephone/intercom 1350 mm
Fire alarm manual call point 1350 mm
Fire alarm sounder 2100 mm
Fire alarm panel 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL)
Power outlet 300 mm
Data/Telephone outlet 300 mm
TV/Radio outlet 300 mm
Wall mounted speaker 2100 mm
B. Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g. light switch and
socket outlet) are shown in approximately the same location, their centre
lines shall be aligned vertically.
C. Where wall mounted accessories are shown adjacent to each other they shall
be mounted with their wall plates separated by 50 mm.
1.16 LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Each item of the Electrical Installation including electrical switchgear, control
gear, equipment, devices, etc. shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label
clearly indicating its function giving at least the following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name.
14
2. Country of origin.
3. Type / model number or code.
4. Rated voltage, current and frequency (as applicable).
5. Short circuit breaking capacity with time.
6. Compliance mark of the international standard(s).
B. Prior to final testing, confirm that all labeling is intact over the whole site and
that all cables have been fitted with circuit markers..
C. All conductors shall have their outer covering colored to suit the phase to
which they are connected.
D. An instruction notice giving details of first aid treatment for electric shock
shall be positioned in an approved position in each switch room.
Manufacturer's or Contractor's names or trademarks shall not be exhibited
anywhere through the installation without the prior approval and permission
of the Engineer with exception that the Contractor's name and address may
be fixed in an approved position on the main incoming switchgear.
E. All labels shall be in English and Arabic.
1.17 VERMIN PROOFING
A. All items of electrical equipment shall be adequately vermin proofed.
B. Where cables enter or leave the bottoms of switchboards, or pass through
pipe ducts, they shall be sealed by the use of hard wood plugs treated with
vermin repellent and surrounded by mastic sealant.
C. All spare pipe ducts shall be similarly sealed by the use of solid hard wood
plugs.
D. Alternative methods of vermin sealing will be accepted, but the written
comments of the Engineer must be obtained prior to installation.
1.18 FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to
minimize the risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak
of fire.
1.19 PENALTY FOR DAMAGE TO EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Study the location of all the existing utilities and any other facilities, and
perform the Work so as not to damage them. In the event that any of such
facilities are damaged by the Contractor, the same shall be immediately
repaired by the Contractor at his cost and responsibility.
1.21 SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTION STUDY

A. Obtain the services of the major Electrical Equipment manufacturer to provide
a complete computerized study of fault current and coordination of relays,
fuses, circuit breakers, and all other protective devices. The Contractor shall
coordinate with Electricity Supply Authority to include protection settings and
fault levels of Main feeders and circuit breakers in the study.
15
B. The study shall include all feeders at medium voltage and low voltage
system.
C. The Contractor shall obtain all data, characteristic curves and all necessary
information from all other trades in connection with his work to provide
complete study for the system.
D. The study shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Fault current available at each major equipment bus.

2. A tabulation of all protective relay and circuit breaker trip settings and
recommended fuse sizes and types.
3. Transformer damage curves in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
4. Motor starting profile for largest motor in each control center.
5. A complete set of time-current coordination curves on logarithmic
scales sheets.
E. The short circuit and protection study shall be bound in a standard A4 size
report. The final selection and settings of all protective devices shall be
based on this study. The complete study shall be approved by the Engineer.
Protective devices shall be adjusted, tested, and calibrated in the field prior to
energizing the equipment per the settings listed in the study.
1.22 SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

A. Provide a priced list of spares and consumables to manufacturer’s
recommendation for 1 year’s operation for every item of plant and system at
the time of tendering.
16
SECTION 16030
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical identification to identify all electrical items for easy operation and
maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Nameplates and labels.
2. Wire markers.
3. Colour coding of raceways.
4. Circuit identification charts.
5. Cable identification tags.
6. Cable warning tapes.
7. Cable markers.
8. Equipment warning/danger signs.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

All Relevant specification sections under the electrical and all other disciplines shall
be observed for special references.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. IEC 60391 Marking of Insulated Conductors
C. IEC 60445 Equipment Terminals (Identification of
Equipment Terminals and Terminations of Certain
Designated Conductors).
D. IEC 60446 Identification of Bare Conductors by Colors or Numerals.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with all contract conditions.
B. Provide catalogue data and samples for nameplates, labels, charts, tags,
signs and markers prior to commencing works.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product Testing Agency and include instructions for storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of the product.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
17
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of items the types,

sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years. Preference shall be given to local
manufacturers and agents/suppliers.
B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of
successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work
similar to that required for the project.
C. All items of Electrical Identification shall be UL and/or CE listed and comply

with the requirements of NEC, NEMA, ANSI, IEC and BS.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Contract Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates and labels shall be engraved on a three-layer 2 traffolyte plate
having minimum thickness of 2 mm, securely screwed to the housing and have black
letters on white background in Arabic and English.
B. The name plates and labels shall be required for each electrical distribution
board, control panels, equipment enclosures, substation equipment, disconnect
switches and equipment cabinets.
C. Lettering shall be block capitals standing :
1. 6 mm high for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. 10 mm high for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Labels using embossed adhesive tape with 6mm white letters on black
background or transparent adhesive tape with 6mm black letters, as selected by the
supervising Engineer, shall be used for identification of individual wall switches,
receptacles, low current outlets, speakers, control device stations, junction/pull
boxes, electrical boxes and fittings, etc.
2.02 WIRE MARKERS
A. Wire markers shall be split sleeve or tubing type.
B. The wire markers shall be required for each conductor at panelboard gutters,
pull boxes, outlets, junction boxes and each load connection.
C. All power and lighting circuits, branch or feeder circuits and control circuits
shall require wire markers.
2.03 COLOUR CODING OF RACEWAYS
A. Provide colour bands with printed description of each system, minimum 75
mm wide for all cable trays/ladders and trunking runs. These colour bands shall be
applied at each electrical distribution/panel board, low current system control panels
and junction box locations and at 15 m centres within an area.
B. Provide colour bands with printed description of each system, minimum 25
mm wide for conduits up to 25 mm in diameter and one-half the conduit diameter for
18
larger conduits, applied at panel and pull box locations, within each room, and at 6
m centres within an area.
C. Following colour banding shall be used for the raceways of various electrical
systems, however subject to final decision of the supervising Engineer. Colour
bands for the electrical systems not described here shall be as agreed on site:
1. Lighting: grey.
2. Normal Power: brown.
3. Essential Power : black
4. Earthing : green.
5. Fire alarm : red.
6. Telephone : blue.
7. Sound : yellow.
8. Data : purple.
9. Television : rust.
2.04 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS

A Individual circuit identification charts shall be provided for all panelboards,
distribution boards, control panels, etc. giving following information as a minimum.
1. Circuit numbers
2. Phase
3. Load names with location.
4. Connected load.
5. Outgoing terminal numbers.
6. Sizes and types of protective devices.
7. Sizes and types of incoming and outgoing cables.
8. Contacts location references of relays and other control devices (if
any).
B. Charts shall be typed on A4 size sheets. They shall be enclosed in a clear

plastic envelope and shall be securely fixed to the inside cover of the unit.
Additional copies of the charts shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
2.05 CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. All cables which exit from manholes, vaults, handholes, and transformer or
switch enclosures shall be properly tagged or labelled. Tags shall be permanent,
non-corrodible and clearly readable. Tags should include the information listed
below for the various circuit categories:
Feeder Name
Voltage
19
Phase (for single conductor cables)
B. Cable identification tags for wire and cable circuits shall be of an opaque
nylon material arranged to include a marker plate, non-releasing nylon ties,
and cable fastening tail. One side shall be roughened to hold black nylon
permanent ink. Identification shall be permanent and waterproof. The holding
device shall be designed to allow the fastening tail to pass around the cable
through the holding device, and prevent removal of the tail without cutting it
loose from the marker. Cable identification shall be inscribed in Arabic and
English.
2.06 CABLE WARNING TAPES

A. For buried cables use warning tapes according to the standard practice of
Electricity Supply Authority and applicable international standards.
B. Cable warning tapes shall be of polythene, not less than 150 mm wide and at
least 0.25 mm thick. They shall be yellow in colour for LV and MV cables and
bear the continuously repeated legend – “CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE
BELOW” or similar in English and Arabic, in black letters not less than 30 mm
high.
C. For buried low current/communication cables or duct banks, use warning

tapes as per the standard practice of the Local Telecommunication Authority
and applicable international standards.
2.07 CABLE MARKERS
A. Buried cables shall be permanently identified by concrete markers. The

markers shall be 600 mm square x 100 mm thick with impressed character;
they shall be made of grade 20 concrete, with 10 mm aggregate. The
impressed characters shall be in English and Arabic and worded "HV
CABLE" or "LV CABLE" as appropriate together with circuit details as
required for proper identification.
B. Except where cables are buried, located in switchrooms, in ducts and spaces
designated solely for electrical services; they shall be identified by adhesive
bands coloured orange, complying with standards and codes of practice
mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications. The bands shall be not less than
100 mm long, located at least once within each separate compartment
through which cables pass and at intervals not exceeding 12 m.
2.08 EQUIPMENT WARNING/DANGER SIGNS

A. For external use, pressure sensitive danger signs shall be used. Dimensions
shall be as approved by the supervising Engineer. The signs shall be heavy duty
vinyl with a self-adhesive backing which can be applied to curved or irregular
20
surfaces. Danger signs shall be weather-resistant and shall not discolour or

deteriorate with age.
B. Danger signs shall be inscribed with the equipment voltage level along with
an internationally recognised danger sign.
C. Warning/Danger signs made of red plastic (vinyl) with white letters at least 25
mm high reading "DANGER High Voltage" shall be fixed to the entrance doors of all
13.8 kV switchgear and transformer rooms.
D. Warning/Danger signs made of red plastic (vinyl) with white letters at least
15 mm high reading "DANGER 380V"or “DANGER 220V” as appropriate,
shall be fixed to the lids, covers or doors of any equipment which contains
terminals or conductors connected to more than one phase of a low voltage
supply.
E. All signs shall be in English and Arabic.

2.09 LANGUAGE
A. The Arabic and English languages shall be used for all labelling and charts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install warning and descriptive labels as follows :
1. Metallic surfaces using stainless steel or chromium plated bolts and/or
self tapping screws.
2. Concrete surfaces or masonry walls using brass wood screws.
3. Timber surfaces using minimum 6 mm countersunk brass screws.
4. All insulated enclosures using an approved plastic welding adhesive.
B. The danger sign and identification number shall be affixed to the front or
access doors of all transformers and switches. For equipment with two doors the
danger sign shall be mounted on the left door with the identification number
mounted on the right door. Both the danger sign and the identification number shall
be centred 300 mm below the top edge of the doors and on the vertical centreline of
each door.
C. On equipment with only one access door, the danger sign and the
identification number shall be centred on the vertical centreline of the door, with the
horizontal centreline of the danger sign 300 mm below the top edge of the door and
the horizontal centreline of the identification number 250 mm below the danger sign
centreline.
D. Locate cable markers at every point where cable(s) enter a building, sub-
station, distribution/feeder pillar; at each joint, change of direction,
road/pathway crossing, etc. Cable markers shall also be provided along the
straight runs (route) of the cable(s) at the interval not exceeding 30 m.
21
SECTION 16120
LV CABLES AND WIRES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Multicore and single core LV Cables and Wires including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Single core/building wires.
2. Multi-core flexible cables.
3. XLPE insulated cables.
4. Heat/fire resistant cables.
5. Splices and terminations.
6. Cable markers, supports and ties.
A. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. Section 16030 Electrical Identification.
C. Section 16160 Equipment Connections and Supports.
D. Section 16910 Electrical Testing & Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
B. IEC 60228 Conductors for Insulated Cables.
C. IEC 60502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Cables for Rated Voltages
from 1 kV up to 30 kV.
22
D. UL 83 Underwriter’s Laboratories Certification for Thermoplastic

Insulated Wires.
E. BS 6004 Specification for PVC Insulated Cables (non-armoured)

for Electric Power and Lighting.
F. BS 6121 Mechanical Cable Glands (Specifications for).
G. BS 6500 Specification for Insulated Flexible Cords and Cables.
H. BS 6746 Specification for PVC Insulation and Sheath of Electric

Cables.
I. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring

Regulations).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit samples of each type of cable proposed.

C. For all types and sizes of LV Cables and Wires, submit the following
Manufacturer’s details:
1. Dimensions.
2. Weight.
3. Construction.
4. Current rating.
5. Manner of installation.
6. Maximum conductor operating temperature.
7. Volt drop/amp/metre.
8. Impedance: Separate resistance and reactance values of single and
multicore cables.
9. Resistance of armouring in ohms/1000 m length of cable.
10. Characteristic curves for short circuit rating.
11. Minimum bending radius.
D. Submit factory/shop test results showing test voltages, duration of tests and
other details for each routine test, in accordance with the requirements
of IEC and BS standards. Manufacturer shall submit the results of type
tests, if required by the supervising Engineer.
23

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of LV cables and
wires of the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference shall
be given to local manufacturers and agents / suppliers.
C. Cables and wires shall generally be Manufacturer’s standard construction

and materials. Where this contradicts any part of the Specifications, the
Contractor shall state so, at the time of tender.
D. All LV cables, wires and accessories furnished under these Specifications
shall conform to the applicable standards of IEE, IEC, NEC, BS.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01600.
B. End of cables shall be sealed to prevent ingress of moisture.
C. Where cables are transported on drums, these shall have adequate
circumferences for the cables. Drums shall not be transported on their sides.
Each cable drum shall be provided with appropriate weatherproof metallic
label indicating project name, order no., type, size and length of the cable
delivered. The reels for small building wires shall be provided with
appropriate tags indicating at least the type, size and length of wire delivered.
D. After winding on drums, cables shall be protected by being completely
enclosed.
E. Care shall be taken during transit to avoid damage to cable and drums.
Before acceptance on site, cable drums and cables shall be inspected for:
1. Damage.
2. Compliance with Specifications.
3. Quantity.
F. Store all LV cables, wires and accessories in factory installed coverings in a

clean, dry indoor space which provides protection against the weather and
direct exposure to the sun light.
G. As far as possible, each distribution cable shall be supplied in one
continuous length without any joint. Where the required run length of any
individual cable exceeds the standard/maximum length of a cable drum, as
manufactured in the factory, the cables shall be jointed with prior approval of
the supervising Engineer using an approved cable joint.
H. Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to
the cable, to other services and to building fabric. Recommendations or
instructions available from the cable Manufacturers concerning the
installation of cables shall be taken into account. Any damage shall be
reported immediately to the Engineer.
24
I. Cable drums shall be unloaded carefully by means of either a crane or ramp

and impact with the ground shall be avoided. They shall be supported on
axles and axle stands while the cable is being pulled; twisting and abrasion of
the cable serving or oversheath shall be avoided.
1.07 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SINGLE CORE /BUILDING WIRES
A The conductors of all single core wires shall be of high conductivity, plain,
circular, stranded, annealed copper conductors as per IEC 60228.
B. The insulation of single core wires shall be heat resistive PVC type 5 to BS
6746, rated at 85 oC for continuous operation. Manufacturer shall guarantee
that insulation will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
C. The building wires shall comply with BS 6004 Table 5, rated 600/1000V
grade for power wiring and 450/750V grade for lighting applications.
D. Wires shall be coloured in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).
2.02 MULTI-CORE FLEXIBLE CABLES
A. Multi-core flexible cables shall be used for the connections of pendant
lighting fittings, final equipment connections, portable equipment or any other
purpose as shown on the drawings or approved by the supervising Engineer.
B. The flexible cables shall be of circular construction, rated 300/500V grade
and comply with BS 6500 Table 12.
C. The flexible cables shall be of high conductivity, circular, stranded, annealed

copper conductors, insulated with heat resistive PVC type 4 to BS 6746,
o
rated at 85 C for continuous operation.
D. The overall sheath of the multi-core flexible cables shall be of heat resistive
PVC type 4 to BS6746 or polyethylene as approved, rated at 85 oC for
continuous operation.
E. Manufacturer shall guarantee that the insulation and overall sheath of the
cable will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
F. The cores of multi-core flexible cables shall be coloured in accordance with
Section 514 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).
2.03 CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED CABLES
A. All low voltage distribution cables shall be copper conductors, 600/1000V
grade, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and PVC or polyethylene
sheathed cables complying with IEC 60502.
B. Provide LV distribution cables single-core or multi-core and unarmoured or
armoured.
C. Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity plain, circular or sector

shaped, stranded copper as per IEC 228 and insulated with cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) rated at 90 oC for continuous operation.
25
D. The assembly of multi-core armoured cables shall be filled with non-

hygroscopic material, compatible with the insulation and covered with a layer
of PVC bedding, which may be an integral part of the filling.
E. The armoured single-core LV cables, if shown on the drawings, shall have

non-magnetic armour wire. Single-core cables armoured with steel wire or
tape shall not be used for a.c. circuits to prevent eddy (induced) currents.
Such conductors shall neither run individually in a ferrous enclosure or pipe
nor shall be surrounded by any ferrous material.
F. The armoured multi-core cables shall consist of a single layer of galvanised

steel wires applied over the PVC bedding.
G. Both armoured and un-armoured multi-core LV cables shall be sheathed

overall with PVC type ST2 to IEC 60502 or polyethylene as approved.
H. Manufacturer shall warranty that the insulation and overall sheath of the
cable will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
I. Steel wire armouring of the multi-core armoured cables shall be securely

bonded to earth at each termination by means of an adequately sized metallic
bond which shall be as short and straight as it is practicable.
J. Cable cores shall be coloured in accordance with section 514 of the IEE
Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).
K. Joints shall not be allowed in any cable, unless a prior written approval of the
supervising Engineer is obtained.
2.04 HEAT/FIRE RESISTANT CABLES
A. For situations, where single or multi-core cables are expected to be in touch
with surfaces whose normal working temperature is more than 85 oC (such as
light fixtures’ ballast or reflector), or for any other application when specified,
special heat/fire resistant cables shall be used.
B. The special PVC insulation of heat/fire resistant cables shall be rated at

minimum 150 oC or 10 oC more than the expected surface temperature of the
body where cable can touch. Higher of the two values shall be considered for
cable insulation temperature rating.
C. Wiring of illuminated exit signs and other emergency lighting fixtures and
devices required to work continuously in the event of a fire shall be carried out
with special fire resistant cables rated for a temperature category matching to
the rating of other architectural items such as walls, suspended ceiling, etc. in
the area.
D. Manufacturer shall warranty that the special insulation of the heat/fire

resistant cables will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire.
2.05 LOW CURRENT CABLES
26
A. Provide cables for all low current systems according to the requirements given
in the relevant section of each system contained elsewhere in these
Specifications. All such cables shall comply with the applicable international
standards.
2.06 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Cable splicing or jointing shall not be allowed in any circumstances, except
where the required run length of any individual cable exceeds the
maximum/standard length as Manufactured in the factory. Obtain Engineer’s
written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable.
B. Splices and terminations for all LV cables rated 600/1000 V grade shall be
furnished in kit form and shall conform to the recommendations of the cable
manufacturer. All material shall be furnished in factory sealed packages and
shall not be opened until required for use.
C. Splices for all LV cables shall be pre-moulded or heat shrink type and rated
for continuous duty at the rating of the services to which they are connected.
They shall be suitable for direct buried underground installation or mounted
on cable trays as per the requirements on site.
D. Terminations shall be insulated using the materials specified and the

procedures recommended by the Manufacturer of the kit being used.
E. Splices for the earth shall be made exothermally or as per the

recommendations of the LV cable splice Manufacturer.
2.07 CABLE MARKERS, SUPPORTS AND TIES

A. Cable markers and identifications discs for all LV cables shall be provided in
accordance with the requirements given in Section 16030.
B. Cleats, saddles and clips used for fixing cables shall be black nylon for up to
20 mm dia. cables and glass reinforced nylon for cables above 20 mm dia. All
saddles and clips shall be secured using brass round screws for cables up to
20 mm dia. and 10 mm hexagon headed zinc plated bolts and studs above 20
mm dia.
C. All LV cables shall be tied on cable trays/ladders by non-releasing type nylon

ties or approved clamps.
D. Clamps for single core cables shall be of non-ferrous material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
27
B Examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to be installed
and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
3.02 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING INSTALLATION
A. The sub-circuit and final circuit wiring for lighting, small power and equipment
power installations shall take the following forms:
1. Single core PVC insulated wires in trunking or conduits for internal
wiring.
2. Multi-core XLPE/PVC insulated unarmoured cables in cable trays,
ladders or conduits for internal wiring.
3. Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC insulated armoured cables in conduits,
cable trays, ladders duct banks or direct buried for external wiring.
B. The types of lighting and small/equipment power installations and

accessories are detailed elsewhere in the Specifications and on the drawings.
C. No conductor smaller than 2.5 sq. mm shall be used for lighting installations
and 4 sq.mm for small/equipment power installations. Minimum size of direct
buried cables whether used for external lighting or any other purpose shall be
6 sq.mm subject to final end voltage drop calculations and fault loop
impedance.
D. Each lighting circuit shall be wired using the "loop-in" continuous wiring
system and as shown on the drawings.
E. Small power installations shall be wired using the radial system or as
described on the drawings.
F. Equipment power installations shall generally be wired on a single circuit
basis (1-phase or 3-phase), as described on the drawings and will serve fixed
items of equipment.
G. Each lighting and small/equipment power circuit shall have a separate circuit
protective conductor throughout to each light/switch point, power socket
outlet or fixed equipment.
H. Where a lighting or small/equipment power circuit is to be installed in trunking
or conduit together with any other circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the
circuit conductor shall be de-rated for grouping in accordance with table 4B1
of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. This will normally result in the
need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the panelboard schedules
or on the drawings.
I. Not more than 2 final sub-circuits shall be run in any conduit.
J. Normal and emergency circuit wiring/cables for lighting, small/equipment
power or any other purpose shall be run in separate conduits or in separate
compartments of trunking or on separate cable trays/ladders in accordance
with IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
3.03 FLEXIBLE CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Flexible cables shall not be concealed directly in any part of the installation
except in conduits or sleeves.
28
B. Where flexible cables are subject to heat they shall be constructed containing
a minimum of three cores.
C. All flexible cables are to be of circular construction containing a minimum of
three cores.
D. Where portable appliances exceed 200 watt rating, the flexible cable
conductor size shall not be smaller than 28 x 0.25 mm (equivalent to 1.5
sq.mm).
E. Flexible cables exceeding 1.5 m in length shall not be allowed, hard wiring
shall be taken to within 1.5 m of all equipment or apparatus to be supplied.
3.04 INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Where cables enclosed in conduits and run vertically in excess of 5 m, the

cables shall be clamped to relieve strain on the cables, using suitable
approved clamps.
B. Where multiple circuit wiring follows a common route then the wiring shall be
installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits with prior approval of the
supervising Engineer.
C. Where cables and wires run in trunking, each circuit or group of circuits shall
be clipped together using nylon straps or other suitable straps or clips.
Vertical runs of trunking exceeding 5 m shall be supplied with pin racks to
relieve the strain on cables.
D. Multicore power cables shall not be run inside cable trunking.
E. All cable runs shall be continuous, no joints will be permitted except where
the required run length of an individual cable exceeds the standard/maximum
length of a cable drum as manufactured in the factory. Obtain approval of the
supervising Engineer for each joint, prior to ordering the cables.
F. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent tension during bending of LV
cables. The permanent radius of cables bend at any location after installation
shall not be smaller than the cable Manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Where cables are supported on cable tray, they shall be fixed to the cable
tray using suitable approved straps or clips. Ties shall be spaced at not
greater than 600 mm intervals along each cable, and within 100 mm of each
bend or set.
H. Where cables are laid on cable trays or ladder in mechanical or electrical
rooms or prone to be damaged elsewhere on the project, they shall be
mechanically protected by a cover to a height not less than 2 m from the
finished floor level.
I. When installing cables, care shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic action
does not take place between dis-similar metals used for cable trays, ladders,
supports, clamps, etc.
J. Each cable gland shall be from the same Manufacturer as the cable on which
it is used and shall be stamped describing the size and number of
conductors. PVC shrouds shall be used to protect every gland.
K. Power and lighting cables can be installed on a single cable tray or cable
ladder. However normal and emergency power cables shall be installed
29
either on separate cable trays/ladders or separated by mechanical separators

if combined on a single cable tray/ladder.
L. TV, Communications and other low current cables shall be installed on
separate cable trays with fire alarm cables separated by mechanical
separators from other cables.
3.05 EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A.. No work shall commence until the Contractor has investigated the site
satisfactorily, and ascertained that the area is free from drains or other
underground services. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the routes for
external cable with appropriate installation details on shop drawings prior to
commencement of any excavation on site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600 mm of existing services
shall be by hand digging. All services uncovered, whether expected or not,
shall be reported immediately to the Engineer; they shall be supported by
slings or other suitable means and protected. Any damage to services,
however minor, shall be reported immediately to the Engineer; no repairs or
replacement shall be done unless the Engineer gives his approval.
C. When cable trenches are opened, all cables shall be laid as quickly as
possible. The Engineer’s approval shall be obtained before a trench is
backfill, generally backfilling shall be commenced within 24 hours of cable
laying and the work completed speedily.
D. Keep excavations shall free of water and protected against damage or
collapse. The safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings,
roads and services from damage shall be ensured.
E. Before cables are laid, grade bottom of the trench evenly, clean out loose
stones and cover for the full width of the trench with a 150 mm layer of sieved
sand. Where the level of the trench bottom varies the slope shall not be
greater than 1 in 12.
F. Pull cables over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable being
dragged over ground or other surfaces. For cables pulled into thrust boring
or cables ducts and for all cables exceeding 10 m length, use cable stockings
for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the
cable cores as well as the sheath and excessive strain shall be avoided.
G. After cables have been laid, a further layer of sieved sand shall be added
over the full width of the trench and tamped to provide finally not less than
150 mm cover over the cables.
H. Backfill trenches in layers and compact layer before the next layer. The first
two layers shall be 100 mm deep and compacted by hand; then mechanical
compacting may be used. Cable warning tapes only shall be provided over
the external lighting cables, but warning tapes and cable protective tiles shall
be used over LV power and MV cables.
I. Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150 mm wide and at least
0.25 mm thick. They shall be yellow in colour and bear the continuously
repeated legend "-CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW" - or similar in
English and Arabic, in black letters not less than 30 mm high.
30
J. Provide cable protective tiles in accordance with the applicable regulations

and standards. Cable protective tiles shall be placed directly on the
compacted sand cover over the cables.
K. Where cables laid in trenches and cross other cables; a minimum clearance
of 250 mm between the crossing cables shall be maintained. Cables shall not
be laid one above the other except where indicated on the drawings.
L. If more than one cable is to be drawn in a duct, all such cables shall be
bunched together and pulled in one operation, wherever possible.
M. Where cables run under roadways, install in PVC ducts encased in concrete.
The ducts shall extend for a minimum distance of 1 m on each side of
roadway and shall be sealed at each end.
N. Ducts shall be sized to allow installation of cable without excessive tension
loads. 20% spare ducts shall be provided with a minimum of one spare duct
at each location.
O. When installed in cable ducts, all multi-core cables shall be installed singly
and continuous between the manholes. Splicing of cables between the
manholes shall not be allowed in any case.
P. For cables pulled into thrust borings or cable ducts exceeding 10 m length,
use cable stockings for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that
strain is taken on the cable cores as well as on the sheath. The pulling
tension of the cable shall not exceed the maximum tension recommended by
the cable Manufacturer.
Q. Utilize both manual and power type pulling mechanisms on site as required
with the rated capacity (in Kg or pounds) clearly marked on the
mechanism. A dynamometer shall be used to show the tension on the
cable during all pulls and the indicator shall be constantly watched. If
any excessive strain develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped
at once and the difficulty determined and corrected. The dynamometer
shall have a maximum tension indicator to show the maximum tension
developed during a pull. The cable play-out reel shall be equipped with
a suitable brake and shall be constantly manned during all pulls.
R. Under no circumstances shall cable be pulled using equipment not monitored

by a dynamometer. The use of motor vehicles in pulling cable is
prohibited. Any cable so pulled shall be removed and replaced.
S. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in

raceway runs, the pulling tension in the cable in Kg as it leaves the bend
shall not exceed 500 times the radius of the bend in metres.
T. Support cables at all times without excessive sag. Cables shall be located in
such a way as to minimise interference with other cables to be installed.
U. Provide adequate length of cables in manholes to avoid distorting pressures
on the cables at conduit bushings. Cable protection such as a layer of light
rubber belting, friction tape or similar material shall be provided where
required before permanently fixing the cables in place.
31
V. Install and support cables in such a way that there shall be no undue
mechanical strain on the cable terminations. The requirements of the IEE
Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, chapter 52 shall be fulfilled for the erection
of LV cables, as applicable.
W. Terminate cables using only the correct size and type of gland with earth tag
and PVC shroud, as supplied or recommended by the cable Manufacturer. All
glands shall be dustproof and the glands for outdoor usage shall be fully
weather and waterproof.
X. Bend cable armouring to earth at each termination by means of a
green/yellow Cu/PVC earth conductor, sized in accordance with Section 543
of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, connecting the cable gland earth
tag to the local earth terminal. The apparatus gland plate shall be cleaned to
bare metal around the cable gland earth tag bolted connection to ensure a
sound electrical connection.
Y. Where cables pass through walls or floors, protect by PVC or mild steel
sealed sleeves cast into the building fabric. If the walls or floors are fire
divisions, then the sleeves shall be fire stopped after installation of the
cable(s) to the same rating as the walls or floors through which they pass.
Z. Before any tradesman is allowed to terminate an armoured cable in the
permanent works, he shall make a demonstration termination in the presence
of the Engineer and obtain the approval of the Engineer.
AA. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the
ends of the ducts or sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-
like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low
as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump upto a temperature of 149 oC or less. It shall
not be hardened materially when exposed to air.
BB. Install cable markers and identification discs in accordance with the
requirements given in Section 16030 and locate them so that they are readily
visible when cable is permanently fixed in position.
3.06 SPLICING AND TERMINATIONS
A. Cable splicing or jointing is not allowed, except where the required run length
of any individual cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as
manufactured in the factory. The Contractor shall obtain Engineer’s written
approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable.
B. The Engineer shall be informed whenever cables are to be spliced or
terminated.
C. The Engineer shall be given evidence that the joint or termination
Manufacturer has stated that materials to be employed are suitable for the
type of cable to be jointed or terminated.
D. Supply and install all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for the
proper jointing, terminating and connecting, ready for service, of all
cables included in the works.
E. Employ for this work, staff who are fully qualified and competent for the types
of joints and terminations to be made.
32
F. Take all necessary precautions to prevent damage and ingress of moisture

and impurities; cables ends shall be made free from moisture before jointing
commences. Where circumstances prevent completion of the jointing or
termination, the cable ends shall be sealed properly.
G. All jointing and terminations, once commenced, shall proceed continuously
until it is completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without
interruption. No terminations shall be made under wet or dirty conditions.
H. Terminate all cables in brass compression glands complying with BS 6121
and of a design appropriate to the type and size of cable(s) being terminated.
Glands for armoured cables shall be provided with a properly designed
clamping device for the armour or screen. All cable glands shall be provided
with a dust and waterproof outer sheath seal.
I. Provide compression glands with earthing tags and close-fitting PVC
shrouds.
J. Except where it is impracticable to do so, the cable cores shall be taken
through the terminating box directly to the terminals of the equipment, without
crosses, and shall be made off with an approved type of hydraulically crimped
socket.
K. The cores of all cables shall be correctly 'phased out' before the final jointing,
terminations or connections are made. Continuity of spare cores shall be
maintained at joints. At terminations, any spare cores shall be connected to
spare terminals.
L. At all cable terminations the armouring or metallic sheath of the cables, if
any, shall be solidly bonded to the equipment earth terminal or bar by means
of properly designed brass or copper clamps and a copper conductor of
section not less than that required by the IEE Wiring Regulations, subject to a
minimum section of 2.5 mm².
M. Core identification at terminations shall be done by coloured or numbered
plastic stretch or shrink ferrules.
N. Utilize appropriate crimping tools for splicing and termination of all cables
with guides to position the connectors or lugs in the tool correctly. The
connectors, lugs and associated dies for the compression tool shall be of
correct type and size. The crimping tool shall be designed with steps to
prevent over crimping and shall be of a type which have provision to prevent
the tool from opening until the crimp action is completed.
O. Tools for manipulation and termination of cables shall be of a design
approved by the cable Manufacturer. Corrugation of the metal sheath or
damage to outer coverings will not be accepted. A wood block or wooden
faced tool shall be used to finally dress the cable into position.
P. Repairs to a cable sheath, regardless of the extent of the damage, will not be
accepted; straight through joints only are permitted.
Q. Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable. When cables being
installed into a duct system with manholes, the splices shall only be provided
within manholes and no splice shall be allowed outside the manholes.
33
R. Jointing and terminations shall be made in accordance with the

Manufacturer's instructions.
S. The sleeves used for jointing and terminations shall be shrink type, applied
cold or by the use of heat. They shall provide a sufficient thickness of
insulation to suit the particular application.
T. The insulation tapes used for jointing and terminations shall have
temperature rating and insulating property not less than the cable insulation.
They shall be fully compatible with the type and size of cables and comply
with the applicable standards and regulations.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
B. All LV cables and wires shall be tested when splicing and terminations are
fully prepared and completed, except for final connections of cables/wires
tails onto equipment.
C. Test each conductor for phasing, continuity and insulation resistance

(meggar).
D. After completion of the installation of LV cables and wires, carry out insulation
resistance test for 1 minute at 500 V or 1000 V, according to the rated voltage
of the cables/wires under test. The test voltage shall be applied between the
conductors and between each conductor and earth/neutral and shall comply
with the requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th edition and other
applicable standards.
34
SECTION 16140
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 section includeS

A. Electrical Raceways and accessories including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. PVC Conduits.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubings (EMT).
3. Rigid Steel Conduits.
4. Flexible Conduits.
5. Surface/Floor Cable Trunking.
6. Cable Trays.
7. Cables Ladders
1.02 related sections
C. Section 16120 LV Cables and Wires.
D. Section 16160 Equipment Connections and Supports.
E. Section 16180 Underground Electrical Services.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 NEC Chapter 3; Wiring Methods and Materials.
B. ANSI C 80.1-83 Rigid Steel Conduits, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI C 80.3-83 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
D. IEE wiring regulations 16th edition (BS7671).
1.03 SUBMITTALs
A. Comply with Contracts Conditions.
B. Submit manufacturer's data on all types of electrical raceways, together with
samples of the proposed materials.
35
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceways of types

and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local

C. ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS SHALL GENERALLY BE MANUFACTURER’S

STANDARD CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS. WHERE THIS
CONTRADICTS ANY PART OF THE SPECIFICATIONS, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL STATE SO AT THE TIME OF TENDER.
B. Provide colour-coded thread protectors on the exposed threads of metal
conduit, handle raceways carefully to prevent end-damage and avoid scoring
the finishes.
C. Where possible the raceways shall be stored indoors. If necessary to store
outdoors, the raceways shall be elevated well above ground and enclosed
with durable waterproof wrapping.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PVC CONDUITS
A. All PVC conduits and fittings shall be uPVC heavy gauge, rigid, direct buried
or encased buried type as applicable, complying with NEC in all respects,
and may be used where ambient temperatures do not exceed 75 oC.
B. All PVC conduits and accessories shall be obtained from the same
manufacturer.
C. No conduit shall be less than 20 mm diameter.
D. Fittings and accessories for PVC conduits shall include, but not be limited to,
the adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, couplings, elbows, nipples, plugs,
seals, etc.
E. Conduit boxes shall be of the circular pattern with appropriate spout entries
and 50.8 mm accessory fixing centres.
F. All connections and terminations of the PVC conduits and fittings shall be by
means of the manufacturer's standard adaptor.
G. All boxes shall have brass thread inserts for the fixing of accessories or
covers.
H. All tees shall be made using conduit tee boxes. Tangential entry boxes shall
be used where appropriate. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of
large uPVC adaptable boxes for junctions.
36
I. All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and from the same manufacturer
as that of the conduit which they are being used to secure.
J. All wall mounted accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to
facilitate final leveling of accessories.
2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. All Electrical Metallic Tubings (EMT) and accessories shall conform to NEC
article 358 Part-B and ANSI C 80.3; not less than 20 mm (¾”) diameter.
B. All EMT and accessories shall be completely free from rust or other defects
and shall have same finish throughout the installation.
C. Fittings and accessories for EMT shall include, but not be limited to,
adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, connectors, couplings, elbows,
expansion joints, gaskets, hubs, locknuts, nipples, plugs, seals, etc.
D. The fittings and accessories for EMT shall be compression type. Pot metal or
die-cast type and "sock-on” or “drive-on” type fittings shall not be used.
E. Only standard manufactured fittings and accessories for EMT shall be used.
Adaptation between EMT and PVC or RSC shall be through metal boxes.
F. All saddles for surface mounted installation of EMT shall be of the space-bar
type and of the same finish as that of the EMT, which they are being used to
secure.
G. All necessary boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final
levelling of accessory.
2.03 RIGID STEEL CONDUITS (rsc)

A. All Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) and accessories shall be heavy gauge welded
steel complying with NEC article 344 Part B, not less than 20 mm diameter.
B. RSC and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized, complying with ANSI C 80.1,
providing heavy protection both inside and outside. The steel shall be
galvanized after cutting and threading.
C. All conduits and fittings shall be threaded, free from rust or other defects and
shall have same hot dipped galvanized finish throughout the installation.
D. Fittings and accessories for RSC shall include, but not be limited to,
adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, connectors, couplings, elbows,
expansion joints, gaskets, hubs, locknuts, nipples, plugs, seals, breathers,
etc.
E. Fittings and accessories for RSC shall be of malleable iron or a mixture of

grey iron and cast steel.
37
F. All bushes shall be hexagonal headed, heavy duty, long threaded brass
bushes complete with serrated tempered shakeproof washers. All bends shall
be cold set. All tees shall be made using circular tee conduit boxes.
G. All saddles for surface mounted installation of RSC shall be of the spacer bar
type and of the same finish as that of the conduit which they are being used
to secure.
H. A tapped earth connection facility shall be provided in every box.
I. All accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final
levelling of accessory.
J. PVC coated RSC and fittings shall be used for cables extending to outside of
building and where above grade extensions of PVC Conduits required a
transition from PVC to RSC.
K. PVC coated rigid steel conduits and fittings shall conform to ANSI C 80.1,
NEMA RN 1, and shall be UL-listed for 90 0C conductors. The thickness of
the PVC coating shall be a minimum of 40 mil. A PVC jacketed coupling shall
be provided with each length of conduit. A PVC sleeve equal to the outside
diameter of the conduit shall extend 37 mm inches from each end of coupling.
All fittings and accessories shall be provided with type 304 stainless steel
hardware.
2.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS

A. Flexible conduits shall be liquid-tight, constructed from galvanized steel core
and continuous liquid-tight PVC jacket in accordance with NEC article 350
Part-A, not less than 20 mm diameter.
B. Flexible conduit shall only to be used for final connection to items of fixed
equipment subject to vibration or movement.
C. All flexible conduits shall comply with UL1 and shall have a liquid-tight PVC
jacket capable of withstanding 90 oC cable operating temperatures.
D. All fittings and accessories for liquid-tight flexible steel conduits shall be
nylon jacketed.
E. Nylon jacketed brass adaptors shall be provided for connection at either end
of the flexible conduit and should be of the compression type.
2.05 SURFACE/FLOOR CABLE TRUNKING
A. Surface/floor cable trunking shall be used with prior approval of the Engineer,
wherever possible to replace multiple conduit runs.
B. Metal surface/floor cable trunking shall comply with NEC and shall be
manufactured from galvanised steel sheets.
C. Only purpose made bends, tees, risers, end stops, fittings, connectors,
covers and accessories by the same manufacturer as the trunking shall be
used and finished in hot dipped galvanized steel. Site fabrication shall not be
permitted.
D. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint of the metal
surface/floor trunking.
38
E. Covers for surface type cable trunking, suspended for fixed on surface of wall
or under raised floor, shall be of the overlapping type and secured to the
trunking by an approved type of fastening arrangement such as clips, etc.
F. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all trunking
shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating as
approved by the supervising Engineer.
G. Surface/Floor Cable trunking shall be single or multi-compartment as
required. Where multi-compartment is used, vertical dividers shall be
provided between the compartments which shall be welded to the trunking
prior to galvanising.
H. Heavy Duty uPVC trunking with clip on lid (all insulated) shall be used, if
shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, to
replace multiple conduit runs. All PVC cable trunking and accessories shall
be obtained from the same manufacturer. Only standard accessories
fabricated by the manufacturer shall be used and no site fabrication shall be
allowed.
I. Floor trunking and covers shall be standard products of an approved

manufacturer with modular sections to provide flexibility of installation to suit
any site situation. The floor trunking and cover shall be suitable for surface or
embedded installation as per actual site requirements. The construction and
dimensions of the floor trunking and cover for embedded installation shall
match with the floor finishing pattern having special provision of accepting
floor tiles, carpet, etc. within the recess of the cover provided in accordance
with the site requirements.
2.06 CABLE TRAYS

A. All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange.
B. All cable trays shall be manufactured from hot-dip zinc coated galvanized
steel, with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350g/m2 and Z2
bending grade.
C. All accessories and fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, cross units and
angles shall be of the same specification as that of the cable tray finish and
shall be standard products from the same manufacturer as the cable tray.
Site fabrication shall not be permitted.
D. Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than:
1. 1.5 mm up to 300 mm width.
2. 2.0 mm above 300 mm width.
E. All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanising.
F. Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint of the
cable tray.
G. Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed
suitably to provide expansion / contraction with the building expansion.
H. Where cable tray carries 13.8 kV cable, a tray lid shall be installed.
39
I. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all cable

trays shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as
2.07 CABLE LADDERS

A. All cable ladders shall be heavy duty gauge (>2 mm), manufactured from hot-
dip galvanized steel with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of
350g/m2 and Z2 bending grade.
B. All accessories and fittings such as couplers, bends, tees, elbows, etc. shall
be by the same manufacturer as the ladder.
C. Ladder system supports shall be determined in accordance with the
manufacturer's structural information to ensure that undue stress or bending
shall not occur.
D. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint of cable ladders.
E. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmosphere, the ladders
shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. All Electrical Raceways including conduits and fittings shall be free from
objectionable lines, striations, bubbles, welds, and other manufacturing
defects that would impair the service of the raceways. The bore of the
conduits shall be circular in cross-section with smooth interior surfaces free
from rough and flaky areas. The electrical raceways and fittings shall be free
from all substances that injuriously effect any wire or cable covering.
B. All the Electrical Raceways including conduit runs are shown

diagrammatically on the drawings to outline the general routing only. Any
interference with pipes, HVAC ducts, structural members or other equipment
shall be inspected and coordinated well before commencement of the
installation of raceways. Deviations shall be made in accordance with the
approval of the supervising Engineer, at no extra cost to the Contract.
3.02 PVC CONDUITs INSTALLATION

A. PVC conduits shall be used only where cast into slabs, built or chased into
walls etc. Where conduits are surface run in ceiling voids, shaft spaces, plant
rooms etc. galvanised RSC or EMT shall be used. Adaptation between PVC
and metal conduits shall be through metal boxes.
B. PVC conduits shall not be installed in locations exposed to direct sun light.
C. Where conduit boxes are not to be fitted with accessories, they shall be fitted
with cover plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used.
D. PVC conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilising the following
appropriate components as supplied by the conduit manufacturer:
1. Purpose made adaptors and accessories.
2. Permanent adhesive - Solvent cement to produce a rigid watertight
40
joint when used with standard couplers and accessories.

3. Flexible adhesive - A non-hardening adhesive to be used where
expansion facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction
with expansion coupler. Not to be used at building movement joints.
E. PVC conduits up to 25 mm diameter may be bent cold with the use of the
appropriate bending spring obtained from the conduit manufacturer. For
larger size conduits, it is necessary to use heat or appropriate manufacturer's
standard ready made bends.
F. Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of
the conduits under normal working temperature variations, as follows:
1. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of conduit
exceeding 6 m in length.
2. Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles.
3. Allowance for expansion in cast in-situ installation is normally only
required to effect structural movement at building expansion joints.
G. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in
accessible situations. Where working temperatures are high, this spacing
shall be reduced accordingly.
H. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for
junctions, which shall be readily accessible at all times.
I. Care shall be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where
excessive temperatures are likely to occur, special heat resistant boxes shall
be used, i.e. of a pattern specifically designed to improve weight loading
characteristics at high temperatures.
J. Spacing/fill factors shall be applied to all conduits in accordance with NEC
Chapter 9, Table-1.
K. Do not install PVC conduits closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services.
L. "Draw-in" boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length
at a maximum 12 m spacing and shall be readily accessible at all times.
M. Inspection elbows, bends or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation.
N. Use extension rings where boxes are found to be not flush with the finished
surface. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt, dust or debris from
entering the conduit system.
O. All bends shall be made so that the PVC conduits shall not be damaged, and
the internal diameter of the conduits shall not be effectively reduced.
P. Not more than four 90 degree bends nor a total of 360 degree bends shall be
made in one conduit run between outlets, fittings or outlet bodies including
any bends located immediately at the start or end.
Q. Install concealed conduits such that only two crossings at a given point are
allowed within the slab to prevent any damage or cracking of slab.
41
R. No conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets, kitchen,

bathroom or any other wet area.
S. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the
3.03 METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Metal conduits either Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) or Electrical Metallic
Tubings (EMT) shall be installed in exposed locations as required.
B. EMT shall be used inside buildings, generally above suspended ceiling, with
the exceptions of below grade within the building structure or external
underground or at exposed locations liable to be damaged mechanically.
RCS shall be installed exposed on surface at all such locations where
conduits are liable to be damaged mechanically.
C. Threads for RSCs shall be of sufficient length to allow conduits to butt
together within couplers. A minimum engagement of five (5) full threads shall
be made at all fittings and accessories.
D. Remove oil and grease from all threads of RSCs.
E. Support all metal conduits at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in
accessible situations.
F. Do not install metal conduit closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services.
G. All conduit boxes not to be fitted with accessories shall have metal cover
plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used.
H. 'Draw in' boxes shall be provided in conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length.
'Draw in' boxes shall be at a maximum 12 m spacing and readily accessible at
all times. Adaptable junction boxes shall also be accessible at all times for
inspection and maintenance.
I. Exercise care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering
the conduit system.
J. Use extension rings where boxes are found not to be flush with the finished
surface.
K. Protect conduits and conduit accessories from rust and mechanical damage.
Exposed conduit threads and damaged or rusty portion of metal conduits
shall be painted, using an oxide undercoat and aluminium paint, after being
cleaned to bare metal.
L. Conduits installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be painted
with chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete.
M. Under no circumstances, shall any metal conduit be used as a circuit
protective conductor (CPC). Every final sub-circuit shall incorporate its own
separate Cu/PVC CPC.
N. Apply spacing/fill factors to all metal conduits in accordance with NEC
Chapter 9, Table-1.
42
O. Field bends shall be made with a hand bender for 1-1/2” (38mm) and smaller
diameter metal conduits only. Larger size conduits shall be bent with a
machine bender or be factory supplied. Heating of metal conduits to
facilitate bending is not permitted.
P. All bends shall be made so that metal conduits shall not be damaged, and the
internal diameter of the conduit shall not be effectively reduced. The inner
edge radius of all field bends shall not be less than the minimum allowable
radius as per NEC.
Q. Not more than four 90 degree bends nor a total of 360 degree bends shall be
made in one conduit run between outlets, fittings or outlet bodies including
any bends located immediately at the start or end.
R. Conduits and elbow used for cables extending to outside of building shall be
PVC coated rigid steel extending one meter from building foundation. A
concrete encased PVC adapter shall be used in case cable extending will run
in PVC ducts. Bells shall be provided on PVC horizontal stub outs.
S. PVC conduits shall not be extended above grade. Where extensions of PVC
conduits above grade are required, a PVC coated rigid steel transition bend
having PVC/steel coupling on one end and threaded male or female adaptor
on the other end. The PVC coated rigid steel transition bend or conduit shall
extend minimum 150 mm above grade. A concrete envelope 100 mm high
shall be formed around such risers to minimize corrosion at point of
emergence. The top of the envelope shall be sloped for drainage.
T. Verify exact stub up location and termination requirement for items and
equipment being served, for all necessary power and control wiring.
U. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the
V. Where conduits turn out of, or penetrate, a slab, they shall be not less than
65 mm on centers.
W. Location and sizing of conduit sleeves passing through floors and walls that
are not shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel unless indicated otherwise,
extended 150 mm above floor and capped when not in use. Space between
conduits and sleeves shall be filled with ductseal to a minimum of 50 mm
deep at top and bottom of conduit sleeve.
43
X. All metal conduits entering any gasketed boxes or gasketed equipment

enclosure shall be provided and terminated with gasketed hubs with bonding
screws. Whereas the metal conduits entering non-gasketed sheet-metal
boxes or enclosures shall be provided and terminated with general purpose
hubs.
Y. Provide supports to alleviate stress on cables where they enter a conduit or
other enclosure from the tray.
3.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUITs INSTALLATION

A. All flexible conduits and fittings used shall be liquid-tight.
B. Flexible conduits shall only be used in short lengths, of less than 1000 mm,
in cases where a final connection is required to be made to a fixed item of
equipment which is subject to vibration or thermal expansion.
C. Flexible conduits shall be 1.25 x L in length, L being the direct distance
between connection unit and fixed appliance, up to maximum length of 1 m.
D. Purpose made glands shall be used on the ends of all lengths of flexible
conduits.
E. A separate Cu/PVC circuit protective conductor shall be included in all
lengths of flexible conduits.
F. Flexible conduits shall be installed so as not to incur undue mechanical
strain, damage or excessive temperatures.
3.05 SURFACE/FLOOR CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
A. Cable trunking shall be fixed securely to the building structure at intervals not
exceeding 1.5 m.
B. Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3 m in length, pin racks shall be fitted.
C. Spacing/fill factors shall be applied to all cable trunking in accordance with
NEC requirements.
D. For metal trunking installations, earth continuity shall be ensured by means of
tinned copper earth straps bolted across each joint. Flexible braided straps
shall be used for expansion joints.
E. Metal trunking cut during installation shall have the cut ends painted with an
oxide undercoat and an aluminium top coat.
F. Where metal trunking is installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres,
the complete trunking installation shall be painted with a chlorinated rubber
paint after the installation is complete.
G. Expansion joints with gaps shall be incorporated in all cable trunking runs in
excess of 6 m in length. External couplings shall have elongated slots and
fixing holes shall be drilled oversize to give freedom of linear movement.
Internal couplings shall be securely fixed at one end by use of thixotrophic
adhesive leaving the other end free for linear movement.
H. Bare copper or aluminium cables shall not be run in metal trunking.
3.06 CABLE TRAYS/LADDERS INSTALLATION
A. Where practical, cable trays/ladders shall be run horizontally and flat or
vertically and shall be supported at distances not exceeding 1.5 m to the
building structure using mild steel brackets. These brackets shall be secured
44
to the building structure using expanded bolts and washers or built into the
building structures during construction.
B. Where cable tray/ladder is suspended, 2 no. drop rods shall be used at each
suspension point to an angle iron or channel support to which the cable
ladder is bolted. The spacing of suspension points shall be determined in
accordance with the manufacturer's structural information such that undue
stress of defection does not occur.
C. Where cable tray/ladder is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide
undercoat and an aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC, a top coat of
liquid PVC solution shall be applied after the completion of the cable ladder
installation.
D. Cable trays/ladders run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than
75 mm to the wall.
E. Secure all cables to cable trays/ladders at distances in accordance with NEC
requirements
F. Do not run bare copper or aluminium cables run on cable tray/ladder.
G. Ensure earth continuity by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across
each cable tray/ladder joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for
expansion joints.
45
SECTION 16160
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Types of Electrical Equipment Connections including, but not limited to, the
following:
1 Connections for AHU’s, BMS control panels and associated equipment.
2 Connections for Motor control centres (MCC).
3 Connections for Socket outlets, isolators and other wiring devices.
4 Connections for Motors and motor starters (if not specified elsewhere).
5 Connections for Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC)
equipment.
6 Connections for Lighting fixtures and switches.
7 Connections for Converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, UPS and
similar equipment.
8 Connections for Master and secondary units of all low current systems
including communication, signal, etc.
9 Connections for All equipment mentioned in other divisions of this
Contract, which requires electrical power connections.
10 Connection for Earthing and bonding of all equipment.
B. Types of Supports for electrical and other installations including, but not
limited to, the following:-
1. Equipment supports.
2. Conduits and raceways supports.
3. Anchors and fasteners.
4. Steel Welding.
A. Section 15180 Building Management System and Automatic Controls.
B. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements.
C. Section 16030 Electrical Identification.
D. Section 16120 LV Cables and Wires.
E. Section 16140 Electrical Raceways.

46
F. Section 16210 Wiring Devices.
G. Section 16240 Disconnect Switches.
H. Section 16260 Enclosed Starters and Contactors.
I. Section 16640 Earthing System.
1.03 REFERENCES
B. ANSI C 80.1-83 Rigid steel conduits, Zinc coated.
C. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations, (IEE Wiring

Regulations).
D. ASTM A 6 Specifications for General Requirements for Rolled Steel

Plates, Shapes Sheet Filing and Bars for Structural Use.
E. ASTM A 36 Specifications for Structural Steel.
F. ASTM A 123 Specifications for Zinc (Hot galvanized) Coatings on Products

Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars and
Strips.
G. ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc Coated (Hot Dip) Iron and Steel
hardware.
H. ASTM A 307 Specifications for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally

Threaded Standard Fasteners.
I. ASTM A 325 Specifications for High Strength Bolts.
J. AWS Structural Welding Code (American Welding Society).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's catalogues and data for all the ancillary equipment
connections and detailed fabrication/erection drawings with material
specification for all types of supports and related accessories.
47
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the complete

range of all supporting devices and ancillary electrical connection materials
including connectors, terminals, electrical insulating tape, electrical flux, cable
ties, anchors, fasteners, equipment supports, etc., whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years. Preference
shall be given to local manufacturers and suppliers/agents.
C. All type of products used for installation of equipment connections and
supports shall comply with Local Standards and Regulations, BS, IEC, NEC,
NEMA, ASTM and AWS.
1.06 delivery, storage and handling
B. Store products indoors with adequate protection against corrosion and
damage.
1.07 warrantY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Each equipment connection shall be provided with complete assembly of

materials, including but not necessary limited to, pressure connectors,
terminals, lugs, electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering
flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and
other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations
of wires and cables.
B. Heavy gauge PVC and metal conduits, tubing and fittings of the required
types, grades, sizes and thickness, for each type of electrical equipment
connection shall be provided. Where types and grades are not indicated,
provide proper selection to comply with wiring and raceway requirements.
Provide products complying with section 16140 and in accordance with the
following listing of conduit, tubing and fittings.
1. Heavy gauge PVC conduit and fittings (for indoor except plant rooms).
2. PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings (for outdoor, wet areas and
plant rooms).
3. Rigid steel metal conduit and fittings.
4. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
5. PVC coated electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
6. Flexible metal conduit and fittings (for indoor except plant rooms and wet
areas).
7. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings (for outdoor, wet areas and
plant rooms).
48
C. Electrical connectors, lugs and terminals for the wires and cables shall be
provided as recommended by the connector and terminal manufacturer for
intended applications.
D. Equipment connection accessories such as electrical insulating tape, heat-
shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, solder, electrical soldering flux, wire
nuts, cable ties, etc. shall be provided as recommended by accessories
manufacturers for the intended applications and as approved by the
Engineer.
E. For remote monitoring/controls of the electrical connections to various
equipment, comply with the requirements of Section 15180.
2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. All equipment supports including conduit and equipment supports, anchors

and fasteners, etc. shall have adequate corrosion resistance against harsh
and corrosive atmosphere.
B. All types of anchors, fasteners and supports shall be able to carry the loads
of equipment and conduit. Weight of wires and cables in conduit shall be
considered when selecting products.
C. Anchors and fasteners for various applications shall be used as detailed
below:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use pre-cast insert system, expansion
anchors and preset inserts .
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, Use toggle bolts and hollow wall
and Gypsum Board fasteners.
Partitions:
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset
inserts.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wooden Elements: Use wood screws.
D. Any bolt utilized for equipment in the factory assembling or for site
installation shall conform to ASTM A 325 type 1, bolt, nuts and washers. All
bolt shall be galvanized where any connection component is aluminum or
galvanized steel. Galvanized nuts shall be tapped oversize and lubricated as
specified in ASTM A 325. Any unfinished bolts shall conform to ASTM A 307,
grade A with lock washers. Each anchor bolt without a sleeve shall be
furnished with two nuts and sufficient threads to permit a nut on each side of
the concrete formwork or template.
2.03 STEEL WELDING
49
A. Except as specified otherwise, all welds, welding and related material for
welding shall be in conformity with. Applicable provisions of AWS-D1.1,
structural welding code of the American Welding Society. Welding electrodes
for steel shall be in accordance with AWS specification and be of the low-
hydrogen type. ASTM A 36 steel and ASTM 441 steel shall have a tensile
range of 483 Mpa.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment connections in accordance with manufacturers’ written

instructions, recognised industry practices and the requirements of the
applicable articles of NEC to ensure that installations fulfil the intended
applications.
B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
diagrams. Wherever possible, mate and match conductors of electrical
connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and
installed equipment.
C. Co-ordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with
installation of other works.
D. Splices insulated by wound tape shall not be permitted. Protective earthing
conductors shall be free of splices.
E. Prepare cables and wires by proper cutting/stripping of the armour covering,
jacket and insulation to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables
and wires are terminated.
F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate
inspection testing and maintenance.
G. Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly.
H. Provide PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings for wet areas, highly-
corrosive atmosphere and outdoor installation. Provide liquid-tight flexible
conduit for all motor connections and other electrical equipment connections
when subject to one or more of the following:
1. Exterior location.
2. Wet areas with moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be
expected to accumulate (showers, baths, toilet, etc.).
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Water spray.
5. Dripping oil, grease or water.
I. Provide heat shrinkable terminations for all LV cables having the size of 50
mm2 and above.
J. Refer to the requirements of Section 16030, for electrical power supply
connections of equipment and conductor terminations. Use appropriate wire
50
markers and identification with respect to types, colours, letters and sizes, as
approved by the Engineer. Affix markers to each point of termination as close
as possible to the point of connection.
K. Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting, a bushing or grommet shall be
provided to protect the wire from abrasion unless the design of the box or
fitting is such as to afford equivalent protection.
3.02 connections to fixed appliances
A. Final connections to various types of fixed domestic and industrial appliances
shall be carried out by using either an armoured copper cable or a flexible
metallic conduit with heat resistant wires or sheathed cables.
B. Final connections made using flexible conduit shall comprise liquid tight
flexible metal conduit covered with continuous PVC jacket and shall comply
with the requirements given in Section 16140.
C. Sufficient length of the flexible conduit shall be allowed for any vibration and
movement of the fixed appliances. A separate circuit protective conductor
wire must be run inside the conduit.
D. A double pole or three pole isolator as required, adjacent to each fixed

appliance shall be provided suitable for the power rating and other
requirements of the appliance as per NEC.
E. If final connection to the fixed appliances requires use of MICC cables, these
shall comply with relevant standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.
MICC cable shall be formed into two loops before entering the fixed
appliance, to allow for any vibration or movement.
3.03 EQUIPMENT supportS INSTALLATION

A. All equipment supports including conduit and equipment supports, anchors
and fasteners, etc. shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, recognised industry practices and the requirements of the
applicable articles of NEC or IEE Regulations to ensure that the installation
fulfil the intended applications.
B. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduits.
C. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.

D. Do not use power actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut the structural members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld
members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with
adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
G. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four
anchors.
H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand the cabinets
and panelboards at least 25 mm off the wall.
I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and
panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
51
3.04 STEEL WELDING
A. All types of welding and related operations for steel shall be in conformity
with applicable provision of the AWS D 1.1, Structural Welding Code of the
American Welding Society. Welding shall be performed using only those joint
details which have a prequalified status when performed in accordance with
the referenced AWS code.
B. The welders and welding procedures shall be qualified by an independent

testing laboratory and subject to the Engineer’s approval. Accurate records of
the welders and procedure qualifications shall be submitted by the
Contractor.
C. All welded joints exposed in exterior locations or subject to submergence in

any location shall be provided with continuous welds along all the contact
edges. Components to be welded shall be accurately positioned and shall be
rigidly secured during welding.
D. All welds shall be properly identified on the detailed shop drawings and shall
be subject to review by the Owner.
52
SECTION 16180
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Underground Electrical Services, but not limited to, the following:
1. Trenching and backfilling.
2. Duct banks.
3. Stub-ups.
4. Manholes, handholes and earth rod pits.
5. Concrete pads.
6. Cable warning signs and tapes.
A. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirement.
D. Section 16140 Electrical Raceways.
E. Section 16160 Electrical Connections for Equipment.
F. Section 16520 Exterior and Street Lighting.
G. Section 16640 Earthing System.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C 80.1-83 Rigid Steel Conduits, Zinc Coated.
B. ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates.
C. ASTM D 1557 Compaction Density Test.
D. ASTM D 1785 PVC Plastic Pipes.
53
E. NEMA TC 8 Underground Ducts.
F. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
G. British Standards 4607.
1.04 SUBMITTAL
B. Submit catalogues, brochures and samples of various items proposed for

underground electrical services.
A. All items for underground electrical services shall be manufacturer's standard

construction and materials except civil works such as excavation, backfilling
and concreting. Where this contradicts any part of the Specifications, the
Contractor shall state so at the time of tender.
B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items of

the types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for a period not less than 5 years. Preference shall be
given to local manufacturers.
C. All work shall conform to applicable standards of the Local standards and
Regulations, BS, IEC, NEC, NEMA and ASTM.
D. All underground electrical services for power and communications shall

comply with the requirements and standards of Electricity Supply Authority
and the Local Telecommunication Authority.
A. Comply with Contracts conditions.
B. During unloading of PVC pipes and other items for underground electrical
services, rough handling shall be avoided. Chains or wire ropes may
be used, provided they are suitably covered, to protect the pipes and
other items from damage.
C. Unloading by mechanical means such as a crane or fork lift may be used

where PVC pipes and other items for underground electrical services are
delivered in bundles or in crates. However, consideration shall be given to the
54
total weight and the lifting capacity of the mechanical equipment, and the
observance of the statutory safety requirements.
D. PVC pipes and other items for underground electrical services shall not be
dropped or thrown to the ground, knocked against other conduits or against
sharp objects that any cause permanent damage.
E. In preparing for laying the pipes in trenches, the pipes and fittings may be
unloaded along the trench direct from the back of a truck. Ducts and fittings
should be unloaded on the side opposite to backfill. Fittings including end
bells, couplings and other accessories such as solvent cement and lubricant
shall be stored at the trench site under cover to prevent loss or damage.
F. When storing on site, PVC pipes and other similar items shall be placed a
level surface and shall be supported to minimize distortion, and protected
from direct sunlight. Horizontal supports of adequate width shall be spaced
not more than 1.5 m center to center beneath pipes to provide continuous and
even support.
G. Vertical side supports shall be provided at 3 m spacing on rectangular stacks.

The maximum free height of such stacks shall not exceed 1.5 m.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Underground Electrical Services for power, lighting, low current systems,

control cables and earthing shall comprise manholes and handholes
interconnected via concrete encased PVC pipes, direct buried PVC pipes or
cable trenching; all as shown on the drawings and mentioned in the
Specifications or required on site for proper installation and maintenance of
electrical systems.
B. Any trenching, backfilling, compaction and general grading required for

electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
the governing section under division 2 of the specifications.
C. Any metal frames, covers, louvers, etc. related to the works described under
this Section shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
governing section under division 2 of the specifications.
D. Any cast in place concrete related to underground electrical services
55
described under this Section shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of the governing section under division 3 of the specifications.
2.02 DUCT BANKS
A. Duct banks shall be either direct buried type or concrete encased type, as
applicable and required on site.
B. Schedule 40 PVC conduits shall be used for direct buried or concrete

encased underground duct systems. PVC conduits and fittings shall comply
with the requirements of Section 16140
C. PVC conduit shall be suitable for a temperature range of 4 C to 90 C.

Conduits within the duct bank shall be supported on plastic interlocking
spacers, at intervals of approximately 2.4 m. A 25 mm minimum separation,
edge to edge, shall be maintained, both horizontally and vertically, between
the ducts.
D. All duct banks shall have a 75 mm concrete cover on the top, sides, and
bottom of the PVC ducts. Anchorage shall be used to hold the ducts in place
while pouring the concrete encasement.
E. Where the duct bank enters a building below ground level, the conduit shall
terminate in an appropriate fitting. An end bell shall be used on conduits
entering manholes.
F. After completion of the installation of cables in the duct bank, seal the ends of
duct banks using special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It
shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall
not slump upto a temperature of 149 oC. It shall not be harden significantly
when exposed to air.
G. A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter
bends. Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter
of the conduit. The inside radius of the conduit bends shall not be less than
one metre.
H. Matching end bells and plugs, constructed of high impact plastic, shall be
provided through out the duct bank at the ends and in manholes.
I. Each length of conduit shall be provided with one standard coupling.

Couplings shall have a center step to ensure proper seating. Joints shall be
made with the solvent cement as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
56
J. Concrete encasement shall be class C20 concrete with 13 mm maximum size

aggregate for all duct banks. For warning purposes, a red dye shall be
trowelled into the top surface after pouring the concrete.
K. An expansion joint of 55 mm per 100 metres maximum shall be provided in

the duct banks. Additionally, a construction joint shall be installed if pouring
of concrete is commenced any time after initial set of adjacent concrete.
Neither expansion nor construction joints shall be installed under a roadway.
L. For duct banks in stable soils, the soil below the duct bank shall be
compacted to 90 % of maximum density to a minimum depth of 300 mm. A
dewatering system shall be used to lower the water table below the final
excavation depth to eliminate disturbance of in-situ soil densities.
2.03 STUB-UPS
A. Stubs-up for electrical equipment connections and other requirements shall

consist of either 100 mm or 150 mm diameter hot double-dipped galvanized
rigid steel conduit entirely encased in concrete.
B. Rigid steel conduits and bends for stub-ups shall comply with the
requirements of Section 16140.
C. The bends for stub-ups shall be 90 degrees with a minimum radius of 1200
mm.
D. Bends for stub-ups shall serve as transition between PVC conduits embedded
below grade and rigid steel conduit installed exposed on surface. Such bends
shall be provided with a PVC steel coupling on one end and a threaded male
or female adaptor on the other end.
2.04 MANHOLES
A. Appropriate type and size of manholes shall be provided as shown on the

drawings or required on site in compliance with the requirements of
Electricity supply authority or the Local Telecommunication Authority.
B. Manholes for communication and low current systems shall be constructed in

accordance with the standard practice and requirements of the Local
Telecommunication Authority regulations.
C. A sump pit shall be built into the base slab directly beneath the manhole
opening to collect and retain any water present in the manhole. Periodic
maintenance may be required since sump pumps will not be permanently
installed.
57
D. The duct bank manhole/interface shall include an expansion joint to take up

longitudinal movement due to expansion and construction of the duct bank.
This joint shall also act as water stop to prevent water from seeping inside the
manhole.
E. The exterior of the manhole shall be waterproofed, with a bituminous coating

in accordance.
F. Each manhole shall have two cable pulling irons opposite each duct bank
entrance.
G. Access to deep manholes shall be through a chimney. Permanent ladders or

rungs shall be installed, if required by the supervising Engineer on site or
shown on the drawings.
H. Manholes shall be provided with earth-rods and cable supports as per the
requirements of Electricity supply authority.
I. The frames and covers of all manholes shall be heavy duty, cast iron, round
with solid type gasket lids, and countersunk locking devices. Covers shall seal
tightly and not rock, when installed.
2.05 HANDHOLES
A. Handholes may be formed either monolithically or built up to designed sizes

by combining several concrete sections cast in various shapes and sizes.
B. Handholes shall be provided with cast iron covers, sumps, ground-rods, etc.
as shown on drawings or required as per the requirements of The Electricity
supply authority or the Local Telecommunication Authority or other applicable
standards. Section joints shall be grouted.
C. The frames and covers of all hand holes shall be heavy duty, cast iron, round
with solid type gasket lids, and countersunk locking devices. Covers shall seal
tightly and not rock, when installed.
2.06 EARTH ROD PITS
A. Earth rods pits shall be provided for all earth rods in accordance with the
requirements of Section 16640.
B. Earth rod pits shall be precast of either square or round section with cover.
C. The cover of earth rod pits shall have appropriate marking as approved by the
site Engineer.
58
2.07 CONCRETE PADS
A. Concrete pads shall be provided for all pad mounted equipment.
B. Concrete pads shall be 150 mm high, unless otherwise indicated, complete

with steel reinforcement and necessary bolts, anchors, etc. required for the
proper installation of pad mounted equipment.
C. Structural calculations for concrete pads supporting heavy equipment shall be

submitted for Engineer’s approval before commencement of work on site.
2.08 CABLE WARNING SIGNS AND TAPES
A. Where cables are directly buried, cable warning signs shall be installed to
minimize the likelihood of damage to the cables by excavation. These signs
shall be suitable for mounting on a riser pole, substation fence or separate
stakes to suit the installations.
B. Posts for cable warning signs shall be placed as close to the cable as
practical, but not closer than 900 mm horizontally from the cable.
C. Cable warning tapes shall be provided in accordance with the requirements

given in Section 16120. Tapes shall be placed at least 300 mm above the
buried cables, and shall cover full width of the cable trench.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Establish and propose exact routes and requirements of underground

electrical services for approval of the Engineer, after co-ordination with all
other existing or new underground services, before commencement of the
work on site.
C. Examine the areas and conditions under which the underground electrical
services are to be installed, and correct any unsatisfactory conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. The Contractor
shall not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
59
A. Before commencement of the excavation, check the presence of any existing

underground service by means of appropriate tools and equipment. The
Contractor shall be penalized for damaging of any existing services in
accordance with the rules and regulations set forth by the Owner and
described in Section 16010.
B. Carry out excavation and backfilling in accordance with the requirements of

Division 2 of the specifications.
3.04 DUCT BANKS INSTALLATION
A. The direct buried PVC ducts shall have a minimum dry sand cushion of 150
mm and a minimum dry sand cover of 300 mm, over which 50 mm thick
concrete tiles shall be placed.
B. Depth for direct buried PVC ducts and PVC coated rigid steel conduits shall
not be less than 600 mm from finished grade level to the top of conduits.
C. Top of concrete encased duct banks shall be installed 600 mm minimum

below finished grade and shall connect manholes and handholes as shown
and required on site. Where a duct bank connects to a building, adapt the
duct bank, at one meter beyond the building exterior wall, to the building
conduit with the required couplings.
D. The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be

rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of 75 mm
beyond any surface of the conduit. Interlocking spacers shall be used to secure
a uniform spacing between conduits of not less than 75 mm.
E. Trenches and duct banks shall be graded so that conduits will have a
fall of at least 75 mm per 30 m towards the lower manholes or from the high point
of the section towards the manholes or from the building towards a manhole.
F. Changes in direction of duct bank runs shall be accomplished by using

special couplings limited to 5 degrees and/or 45 degrees bends having a 1 m
radius sweep with straight sections of ducts between changes of direction and
`S' sweep sections having a minimum of 500 m offset.
G. Where duct bank enters manholes, conduits shall terminate in end bells.
Clean each conduit thoroughly before laying. During construction and after
completion of the duct banks, plug the ends of conduits to prevent water
washing mud into the conduits. Take particular care to keep the conduits
clean of concrete or any other substance during the course of construction.
60
H. Securely anchor duct and brace with intermediate and base plastic spacers to
prevent movement during the placement of concrete.
K. After the completion of portion of duct bank, a mandrel not less than 300 mm
long, with a diameter of approximately 6 mm less than the inside nominal
diameter of the conduits shall be pulled through each conduit, after which a
brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through to make certain that no
particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the line. This cleaning shall
be done one day after the concrete has been poured.
L. Install a nylon rope in each conduit after cleaning, after which the conduits
shall be capped/plugged immediately.
M. All duct banks shall enter manholes through rectangular openings of suitable
dimensions provided in walls. Such holes shall be sized to properly receive
the duct, but shall not be too large for proper caulking. The space between
duct banks and manhole walls shall be caulked tight with lead wool.
3.05 STUB-UPS INSTALLATION
A. Comply with relevant requirement of Section 16140.
B. Exact stub-ups locations and termination requirements for each equipment

shall be verified on site, before commencement of laying underground or
underfloor PVC conduits for required power and control wiring.
C. Where extensions of PVC conduits above grade are required as stub-ups, a

transition bend having PVC/Steel coupling on one end and threaded male or
female adaptor on the other end shall be used.
D. The PVC coated rigid steel transition bend or conduit shall extend minimum
150 mm above grade. A concrete envelope 100 mm high above the finished
floor shall be formed around such risers to minimise corrosion at point of
emergence. The top of the envelope shall be sloped for drainage.
3.06 CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A. Manholes and handholes shall be constructed of precast or cast-in situ

concrete to sizes shown on the drawings. Horizontal concrete surfaces of
floors shall have a smooth steel trowel finish.
B. Frames and covers shall be watertight and covers shall fit the frames without
undue play. These shall be free from warp and blow holes that may impair
their strength of appearance.
61
C. Steel and iron shall be formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angle
and shall have a smooth finish.
D. Provide all necessary lugs and brackets.
E. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before pouring concrete.
F. Provide a 3 m earth rod external to each manhole and handhole. Also provide
an earth bar in each manhole and handhole affixed to the wall above the duct
bank box-outs. Connect to earth rod using 70 mm² bare copper conductor and
bond earth conductors associated with each power cable inside the manhole
or handhole.
3.07 CABLE WARNING SIGNS AND TAPES INSTALLATION
A. Direct buried cables shall be installed in accordance with the requirements for
external cable installation given in Section 16120.
B. Cable warning signs shall mark all direct buried splices and shall be placed at
intervals not exceeding 30 m along the cable route.
C. Cable warning tapes shall be installed 300 mm directly above cable

throughout the entire cable route and shall cover the full width of cable trench.
62
SECTION 16210
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Wiring Devices used as accessories for the Electrical Installations including,
but not limited to, the following:-
1. Indoor lighting switches.
2. Outdoor lighting switches.
3. Door and ceiling switches.
4. 13A switch socket outlets.
5. UL – listed receptacles.
6. Shaver socket outlets.
7. Industrial socket outlets.
8. Isolators and switch fuse units.
9. Spur or fused connection units.
10. Outlets for low current systems.
11. Explosion - proof wiring devices.
C. Section 16150 Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
E. Section 16220 Dimming Devices.
F. Section 16420 LV Protective Devices.
1.03 REFERENCES

63
B. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
C. British Standards.
D. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating
to the wiring devices proposed, which shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Name of the manufacturer.
3. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts
sufficient for a 2 years period.
4. Technical performance of the equipment selected.
5. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance.
6. Delivery time from the date of orders.
7. Copies of test reports or certificates.
8. Control schematics and wiring diagrams.
C. Provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with the above
submittal for approval of the Engineer.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices of

types and ratings required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years. Preference shall be given to local
B. Wiring devices shall comply with the applicable standards of BS, IEC, NEMA,
NEC and ANSI.
C. Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of wiring
devices to the building or building fabric shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. All wiring devices shall be delivered in factory pack wrapping and boxes and
stored in a clean, dry space within the racks.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional wiring devices of each type and

rating installed on site, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but
64
not less than 2 units of each type and rating. These shall include all types of
wiring devices described herein.
1.08 warrantY
A. Comply with Contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of metal or

plastic material as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Decorative finishes of metal plates shall comply with appropriate standards,
as mentioned elsewhere. The finish and/or colour shall be standard
throughout the installation unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the
Engineer.
C. Switches shall comply with reference standards and be suitable for use on
inductive and resistive loads. Where switches are mounted adjacent one to
another, they shall be grouped in a single enclosure and share a common
switchplate.
D. Where indicated, switches with pilot lamps shall be provided. The lamp shall
be a neon lamp with resistor and red coloured lens unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Plugs from the same manufacturer as that of the socket outlets shall be
provided with all types of socket-outlets, and handed over to the Client.
2.02 Indoor LIGHTING SWITCHES

A. Lighting switches shall be rated for the current and voltages indicated and
shall comply with the British Standards.
B. Lighting switches for interior use, shall be heavy duty, AC, single or double
pole, minimum 10A with number of ways as shown on drawings and mounted
on adjustable grid enclosed in suitable mounting box. The switches shall be
of the quick make, slow break type and shall be capable of switching 100 %
rated load of the types shown on the drawings.
C. Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping
cover plates finished flush with the sides of the mounting box.
2.03 OUTDOOR LIGHTING SWITCHES

A. All outdoor lighting switches shall have the characteristics as described
above for indoor lighting switches, but be complete with a gasket forming
splash proof and dustproof enclosures.
65
2.04 DOOR AND CEILING SWITCHES

A. The door and ceiling switches shall be UL-listed, complying with NEC and
other applicable standards and suitable for the intended application on site.
B. The door switches shall be plunger operated, rated for a minimum of 3
amperes at 220 volts and suitable for mounting on all types of wooden
and metal doors of the project.
C. Each door switch shall have both normally close and normally open switch
contacts which shall give facilities to open or close the supply circuit
whenever door is opened. Appropriate switch contact shall be used
according to the site requirements and intended application.
D. The door switches shall be furnished complete with the back box and front
plate, suitable to be mounted on the required doors. The finish of the front
plate shall match with the finish of other door hardware or as directed by the
supervising Engineer.
E. The ceiling switches shall be single pole or double pole, one way or two way,
rated 6 amperes or more at 220 volts, as required for the intended
application and as directed by the supervising Engineer.
F. The ceiling switches shall operate on pull to make or pull to break principle,
in accordance with the site requirements. These shall be provided with
a minimum of 1500 mm long nylon switch/pull card to operate the
switch. The length of pull cord shall be made suitable for the
accessibility of users in all situations of operations.
G.. The ceiling or door switches in wet locations shall be weatherproof, NEMA
type-4 and listed for wet locations as per NEC.
2.05 16 ampere switch socket outlets

A. 16 amperes, 220 volts, switched and un-switched socket outlets shall be
provided as indicated on drawings and shall have two-pole and earthing pin.
B. All wall mounted socket outlets with the exception of those mounted in
services or plant rooms shall be of the rectangular 2-pin + Earth “shuttered
pattern”, flush mounting type with front plates as indicated elsewhere. Socket
outlets shall be mounted in flush box. Where surface mounted socket outlets
are required, they shall be similar to that of the flush pattern, mounted on
suitable adaptor boxes.
C. Socket outlets provided in services plant rooms shall be metal clad type,
surface or flush mounted as indicated elsewhere.
D. Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with push-on cap retaining ring
without switch.
66
2.06 UL-LISTED RECEPTACLES

A. All UL-listed 220/250 V receptacles shall meet NEMA WD1 requirements.
The body material and the plating of metal parts shall be in accordance with
UL requirements.
C. Isolated ground receptacles shall have a insulating barrier to isolates the
ground contacts from the mounting strap. The receptacles shall be clearly
marked.
D. All 220/250 V receptacles shall be single, 20/30 A, two-pole, 3-wire,
grounding type with NEMA configurations 6-20R and 6-30R for 20 A
and 30 A respectively.
E. Blades for all UL-listed receptacles shall be straight, unless otherwise

indicated.
F. Back wiring shall be suitable for feed-through wiring and side wiring shall be
by means of captive type terminal screws with extra-large slotted heads.
G. A grounding terminal shall be provided in addition to the safety grounding

clip.
H. Copper alloy U- ground contacts with double-wipe design and power

contacts shall meet NEMA WD1 plug retention requirements, and shall be ARC-
9, track and char resistant.
I. Wrap around mounting strap shall be locked to bakelite base.
J. Male plug caps 220/250 V receptacles shall be of the cord grip armoured type
with heavy phenolic housing. These shall be from the same
manufacturer as that of the receptacles.
K. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles shall be provided for all such
locations where required as per NEC or shown on the drawings. These
receptacles shall be NEMA 5-20 configured and shall be mounted in a
standard outlet box. Units shall trip at 30 or 300 milliamperes of ground
current as required and shall comply with NEMA WD-1-1.10 and UL 943. GFI
receptacles shall be capable of individual as well as “downstream” operation.
A push-to-test mechanism shall be provided to ensure proper operation.
L. All UL-listed receptacles in damp and/or wet locations or where indicated to

be weatherproof, shall incorporate a face plate and cover constructed from
die cast copper-free aluminium with a baked-on powder epoxy finish, cover
hinge with stainless steel spring and screws and an ethylene-propylene
gasket. These receptacles shall be listed for wet locations as per NEC.
2.07 SHAVER SOCKET OUTLETS
67
A. Shaver socket outlets shall be of the type employing a dual wound

transformer with an earth free outlet, dual voltage (115 V and 230 V) and safe to
use in a wet location such as bathroom, in accordance with NEC requirements.
The unit shall be integrated within the above mirror luminaries in bathrooms.
B. Shaver socket outlet shall be provided with a voltage selector and shuttered
outlet suitable for British, American or Continental two pin plug.
C. Each terminal shall be suitable to receive and make satisfactory connection

to a minimum of two numbers 4 sq. mm solid or standard conductors
minimum.
D. Shaver socket outlets shall have plate finish similar to the style and colour of
other indoor outlets or as directed by the supervising Engineer.
2.08 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multi-phase, of the types

and ratings as indicated on the drawings and schedules.
B. Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 or IP67, integrated with switch
or without it, as shown on the drawings and required on site.
C. Single phase socket outlets shall be with two poles and earthing pin
and three phase socket outlets shall be with three poles and earthing pin, with or
without neutral pin, as shown on the drawings and required on site.
D. The industrial socket outlets shall be designed so that the grounding pole is
permanently connected to the housing. The grounding pole shall make
contact before the line poles are engaged, when the plug is inserted into the
socket.
E. The plug sleeve shall also make contact with the housing of socket
outlet, before the line and load poles make contact.
F. The industrial socket outlets shall include cast back box, angle adapter,
gaskets and a screw type gasketted watertight cap with chain fastener.
G. Each industrial socket outlet shall be provided with plug from the same
manufacturer as that of the socket outlet.
2.09 ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSE UNITS
68
A. The isolators and switch fuse units for small power applications shall
be of the double pole or three pole, single throw type, complying with the
requirements of NEC and NEMA and other standards mentioned elsewhere in
the Specifications.
B. Finishes of all isolators and switch fuse units shall be either of white
plastic for flush mounted installations or rust proof metal for surface mounted
installations or as directed by the supervising Engineer on site.
C. These wiring devices shall be used for the isolation of single phase,
two phase and three phase items of fixed equipment fed by an individual circuit.
D. Types of equipment fed through these wiring devices are described

elsewhere in the Specification and on the drawings.
E. All fuses in the switch fuse units shall be of HRC type, as described in
Section 16420.
2.10 OUTLETS for low current systems

A. The outlets for all low current systems such as telephone, data, television,
etc. shall conform to the requirements given in respective sections of low
current systems contained elsewhere in these Specifications.
B. The cover or face plates of the outlets for all low current systems shall be of
similar style and finish to that specified for the associated lighting switches
and socket outlets and shall be suitable for mounting recessed or surface as
required on site.
C. Unless otherwise specified, telephone and data outlet plates shall be
complete with a terminal box suitable for termination of a 2 or 4 pair cable as
minimum and a cable clamp to secure the outgoing telephone handset
connecting cable.
D. Unless otherwise specified, TV outlet plates shall be complete with one co-
axial socket outlet. Where twin outlets are required to provide both FM/Radio
and TV signals, they shall be complete with duplexing network as necessary.
2.11 EXPLOSION PROOF WIRING DEVICES
A. Explosion proof wiring devices shall conform to NEC chapter 5, articles 500
to 517 and shall comply with the hazardous classifications of the area, as
applicable for special occupancies.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed
and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely
69
completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
C. Coordinate the exact location and mounting heights of all wiring devices with
architectural, interior design and plant / equipment layouts, location of
doors, loose and fixed furniture, equipment and accessories, other
services, piping, etc. Any discrepancy between electrical drawings and
other disciplines/details shall be brought to the attention of Engineer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE Regulations, NEC, and in
accordance with recognised industry practices to ensure that products serve
their intended function.
B. Programme installation of devices after wiring is completed and tested for
satisfactory insulation resistance.
C. Install devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from any
external building materials, debris, etc.
D. In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other non-combustible material, boxes
and fittings install boxes and fittings so that the front edge of the box or fitting
will not be set back from the finished surface more than 5 mm. In walls and
ceilings constructed of wood or other combustible material, outlet boxes and
fittings shall be flush with the finished surface or project therefrom.
E. Plaster surfaces around the back boxes of the wiring devices that are broken
or incomplete, shall be repaired so that there will be no gaps or open spaces
at the edge of the box or fittings.
F. In making an exposed surface extension from an existing outlet of concealed
wiring, a box or an extension ring shall be mounted over the original box and
electrically & mechanically secured to it.
G. All wiring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All
fixing screws or bolts shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus
has a protective coating of zinc or is mounted outside, an electro-galvanised
finish shall be used complying with relevant standards and codes of practice.
A. Check operation of all switches and wiring devices with power supply
connected.
B. Check polarity of all the outlets and receptacles with polarity tester.
70
SECTION 16220
DIMMING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. All types and ratings of Dimming Devices and associated equipment

including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Dimmer module/devices.
2. Main dimmer rack.
3. Dimmer controllers.
.
C. Section 16150 Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
D. Section 16210 Wiring Devices.
E. Section 16410 LV Power Distribution Boards.
F. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
C. IEC 669-2-1 Particular Requirements for Electronic Switches (Switches for

Household and Similar Fixed Electrical Installations).
D. BS 5518 Specification for Electronic Variable Control Switches (Dimmer

Switches) for Tungsten Filament Lighting.
E. U.L. Underwriter’s Laboratories.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
71
B. Submit manufacturer's catalogues and data including schematic drawings,

dimensioned layout of enclosures and accessories, technical specifications,
installation instruction and general recommendations for each type of
dimming devices required. Include data substantiating that the proposed units
comply with the project requirements.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the dimming

devices of types and ratings required, whose products have been in
be given to local manufacturers and agents/suppliers.
B. Installer: Firms engaged regularly and qualified with at least 5 years of

similar to that requirement for the project.
C. Dimming devices and associated equipment shall be UL listed and comply

with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA and ANSI.
B. Handle dimming devices and associated equipment carefully to prevent

breakage, denting or scoring the finish. Store at indoor location and protect
from weather.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials used in the manufacture and installation of Dimming Devices

shall be of high quality and of proven suitability for the functions they will
perform and the conditions they will meet in service. Dimming devices and
racks shall be the product, manufacturer and assembly of one manufacturer
only.
72
B. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in the

BMS schedules.
2.02 DIMMER MODULE/DEVICES
A. Dimmer module/devices used for dimming control of the lighting of areas and
zones as indicated on the drawings and schedules shall have the following
characteristics:
1. Plug-in type including 2 thyristors, suppression and control prints. It

shall be suitable for the type of lighting fixtures to be controlled.
2. Rated for normal operation at 40
ventilation requirement.
3. Heat dissipation of dimmer module/device shall not exceed more than
1.2 % of the maximum load capacity.
4. Control voltage shall be 12 V DC. Control signal output shall be strictly
isolated from the load circuit.
5. Voltage isolation between control and thyristor circuits of dimming device
shall not be less than 2500 V.
6. Output of the dimmer module/device shall be A/C with a wave completely
symmetrical with respect to zero voltage and current.
7. Each dimmer module/device shall generate its own power supply from the
printed circuit trigger.
8. The output voltage of dimmer with filter shall not be less than 99% of
the supply voltage.
9. Noise level shall not exceed 55 dB at a distance of 1 meter from a dimmer
module/device at 90 degree phase position measured when dimmer
module/device is without housing.
2.03 MAIN DIMMER RACK
A. Provide master programmable dimming control panel with racks. Rating,

number of channels, circuits and capacity shall be suitable for the intended
application.
B. The dimmer controller shall be suitable for 380/220 V, 50 Hz as shown on the

drawings.
C. Dimmers rack shall be of modular construction, with plug-in modules

expandable type and equipped with all necessary power and control devices.
73
D. Number of individual circuits shall be as shown on panel boards schedules

with 25% spare capacity. Circuits can be divided into groups as needed by
coder switches.
E. Cabinet or enclosure for dimmer rack shall be fabricated from sheet metal 1.5
mm minimum thick on reinforced frame, stove enamel, powder coated and
shall meet the requirements of enclosures given in Section 16410. Degree of
protection for indoor installation shall be minimum IP 42.
F. Each lighting circuit shall be protected by miniature circuit breaker unless

otherwise indicated or required on site for the intended application.
2.04 DIMMER CONTROLLERS
A. The dimmer controller inside dimmer rack shall have LCD display menu
driven for ease of programming and monitoring and shall have the following
facilities:
1. Raise / lower
2. Panic - full power
3. Off
4. 4 scene preset dimming system.
B. Remote control of dimmers shall be achieved by remote master control panels

located in places as shown on the drawings and required on site. Remote
master control panels shall be recessed, wall mounted type.
C. Number of circuits & groups shall be same as the main rack.
D. Provide slave panels for different lighting zones as required on site and as
shown on the drawings.
E. Dimming device controllers shall be made of anodized aluminium plates,

powder coated, color to the approval of the Engineer, equipped with push
buttons, completely sealed, protected against dust and humidity.
F. Transfer from one illumination level to another shall be automatically made by

the push buttons "preset of lighting levels". The transfer time shall be
presentable within two groups: 1 - 60 sec. and 1 - 60 minute in the dimmer
rack.
G. ON/OFF push buttons shall be incorporated in the enclosure for main dimmer
rack or at locations required by the Engineer to allow the switching of the
connected circuits. All push buttons shall be illuminated with LED pilot lamps.
74
2.05 OTHER FEATURES
A. Time switches shall be included in the dimming system.
B. Self - diagnostic system with LED indication for faulty circuits shall be
provided.
C. The dimming devices shall be heavy duty type with minimum maintenance
requirement or almost maintenance free.
D. All wires for external connections shall be connected to properly marked

terminal blocks mounted on DIN rails.
E. Each dimming device and panel shall have an affixed engraved nameplate.
The nameplate shall indicate a facsimile of the device arrangement, both in
English and Arabic. Each lighting zone shall be equipped with a nameplate
which indicates the name of the zone with area designation and other
information as required by the supervising Engineer on site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install dimming devices and control panels including electrical connections, in

accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC, NEMA and recognised industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended function.
B. Co-ordinate installation of dimming devices and control panels with cable and
raceway installation work.
C. Install only in permanently dry locations, completely away from all mechanical
and public health services.
D. Anchor the enclosure of dimming devices firmly to walls and structural

surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently mechanically secured.
E. Check compatibility of the ratings of all circuit protection devices with dimming
modules/devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Provide electrical connections within the enclosures of dimming devices.

G. Fill out dimming panel directory card upon completion of installation works.
75
B. Prior to energisation of dimming control panels, check with earth resistance

tester phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth insulation resistance levels to
ensure requirements are fulfilled.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise dimmer control panels and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with the performance requirements.
3.03 TRAINING
B. Provide instruction and training to the Owner’s staff for the operation and
maintenance of the equipment. Provide a minimum of 12 hours training to be
divided between classroom and hands-on training as required by the Owner.
76
SECTION 16240
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 section includes
A. Disconnect Switches including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Equipment disconnects.
2. Appliance disconnects.
3. Motor-circuit disconnects.
4. Push buttons stations.

C. Section 16160 Equipment Connections and Supports.
D. Section 16210 Wiring Devices.
E. Section 16420 LV Protective Devices.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 NEC Chapter 2, Wiring and Protection.
C. BS British Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit for approval of the Engineer, complete and detailed manufacturer’s
catalogues and data relating to the disconnect switches offered, which shall
include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Name of the manufacturer.
3. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts
sufficient for a 2 years period.
4. Technical performance of the equipment selected.
77
5. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance.

6. Delivery time from the date of orders.
7. Copies of test reports or certificates.
C. Provide samples of proposed disconnect switches together with the above

submittal.

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the disconnect
switches of types and ratings required, whose products have been in
C. All disconnect switches shall be UL-listed and comply with NEC and NEMA
requirements as applicable to the construction and installation of disconnect
switches.
B. Pack accessories for protection during transportation and storage.
C. Store in a dry, clean location.
1.07 warrantY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 general
A. All the materials used in the manufacture and installation of disconnect
switches, push button stations, isolators and mains power isolation
shall be of high quality and of proven suitability for the functions they
will perform and the conditions they will meet in service. Each of these
items shall be the product, manufacture and assembly of one
manufacturer only.
B. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in The

BMS Requirements.
2.02 disconnect SWITCHES

A. Disconnect Switches shall be UL listed, surface mounted, general or heavy
duty type, sheet steel enclosed of the types, sizes and electrical
characteristics suitable for the intended applications of motor, circuit or
equipment disconnections as showing on the drawings, schedules and
elsewhere in the Specifications.
78
B. The general duty type disconnect switches shall be rated for 400 volts, 50
Hertz with 3 -blades, 3 poles, incorporating spring assisted, quick-make,
quick-break type switches which are so constructed that switch blades are
visible in OFF position with door open.
C. The heavy duty type disconnect or safety switches shall be rated 600 volts,
50 Hertz, 3-blades, 4-poles, solid neutral, incorporating spring assisted quick-
make, quick break type switches which are so constructed that switch blades
are visible in OFF position. These shall have positive pressure type
reinforced fuse clips.
D. Equip with operating handle which shall be an integral part of enclosure base
and whose position is easily recognisable, and is capable of being padlocked
in OFF position.
E. Current carrying parts of all types of disconnect switches shall be constructed
using high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts and
stamped enclosure knockouts.
D. All outdoor disconnect switches shall be weatherproof, NEMA type-4R
stainless steel enclosures suitable for wet and damp locations, and
rust and dust-proof. These shall have appropriate heat resistant
gasket to provide protection against dust and water.
2.03 ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSE UNITS

A. The isolators and switch fuse units for small power applications shall be
either of white plastic or rust proof metal, in accordance with the
requirements given in Section 16210.
2.04 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS

A. All push button stations used for circuit and motor disconnections shall be
UL-listed and provided as shown on the drawings or as per NEC
requirements.
B. All push buttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling
and fitted to avoid any possibility of sticking. Non-retaining type shall
generally be used except for emergency stop push buttons which shall stay
down when operated and be fitted with mushroom type heads.
C. Contacts of all push buttons shall be strong and have a positive wiping action
when operated.
D. All push button stations shall be provided with labels.
E. All push button stations in plant rooms, outdoor or wet locations shall be
within weatherproof enclosure with appropriate heat and weather resistant
gasket and shall be listed for wet locations as per NEC.
2.05 MAINS POWER ISOLATION
A. For all residential houses and small building structures having mains power
supply rated at 400 amperes or less, provide an outdoor type disconnect
switch at a suiatble location on an outside wall of the house or building, for
mains power isolation in the event of a fire.
79
B. The disconnect switch shall be suitable for outdoor use in wet and damp
locations, and shall be rust and dust proof with stainless steel enclosure to
NEMA type – 4R. It shall be painted red as delivered from the factory.
C. For all building structures having mains power supply rated at more than 400
amperes, provide an outdoor type push button station at a suitable location
on an outside wall of the building, duly connected to the shunt trip of the main
circuit breaker for mains power isolation in the event of a fire.
D. The push button station shall be suitable for outdoor use in wet and damp
locations and shall be provided with a rust and dust-proof enclosure. The
Control wiring from push button to the main circuit breaker shunt trip shall be
secure properly in all respects. The push button and enclosure shall be
painted red as delivered from the factory.
E. Both the disconnect switch and push button station shall be vandalproof as
approved by the Engineer and appropriately labelled to avoid unwanted
operation by children or un-authorized personnel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Coordinate the exact location and mounting heights of all the disconnect
switches with approved layouts of motors, pumps, electric water heaters,
HVAC equipment and other equipment on site.
C. Disconnect switches shall be located near the equipment as far as possible

with easy accessibility to facilitate emergency shut down of the equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with
recognised industry practices to ensure that products fulfil requirements.
B. Co-ordinate disconnect switch installation work with the sections for electrical
raceways, LV cables and wires, electrical connections for equipment and
other sections of these Specifications, as necessary for proper interface.
C. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, motors and
controllers within sight of controller position and easy accessible location,
unless otherwise indicated.
80
A. Check operation of the switch mechanism of all disconnect switches and

push button with power supply connected.
81
SECTION 16260
ENCLOSED STARTERS AND CONTACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 section includes
A. Enclosed Starters and Contactors including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manual starters
2. Direct-on-Line starters
3. Star Delta starters
4. Auto Transformer starters
5. VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
6. GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
7. LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Section 15171 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
B. Section 15180 Building Management System and Automatic Controls.
C. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements.
D. Section 16030 Electrical Identification.
E. Section 16150 Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
G. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. BS British Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's data and catalogues for Enclosed Starters and

Contactors of all types and ratings.
82
C. Submit manufacturer’s dimensioned drawings of enclosed starters and

contactors showing accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial
relationship to associated motors, electrical power/control panels and feeds.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of enclosed starters
and contactors of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
Preference shall be given to local manufacturers and agents/suppliers.
C. Comply with BS, NEC, NEMA and IEC requirements as applicable to the
construction and installation of Enclosed Starters and Contactors.
B. Handle Enclosed Starter and Contactors carefully, when delivered in

separate enclosures, to prevent breakage, denting or scoring the finish. Store
equipment at indoor location and protect from weather.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional enclosed starters and contactors of

each type and rating installed on site, amounting to one unit for every 10
installed units, but not less than 2 units of each type and rating.
1.08 warrantY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide motor starters, contactors and ancillary components in separate
enclosures for individual motors or grouped in motor control centres (MCCs)
or panels, as referred to on the drawings, schedules and required on site.
B. The motor starters and contactors shall comply with manufacturer's standard
materials, design and construction in accordance with published product
information, and as required for complete installation and satisfactory
operation of the equipment on site.
C. Provide motor starters and contactors as a part of Motor Control Centres
(MCCs) as shown on the drawings with all the components required for the
satisfactory operation of the equipment according to the sequence of
operation and functions specified elsewhere in the Specifications or on the
drawings or equipment schedules.
D. Hands-Off Auto selector switches shall be provided for all starters.
E. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements given in
Section 15180.
83
2.02 MANUAL STARTERS

A. Manual starters shall be provided for single-phase, AC fractional HP motors
up to and including 0.5 HP (0.34 kW).
B. Provide manual single-phase fractional HP motor starters of types, ratings
and electrical characteristics indicated; equipped with thermal overload relay
with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10% variation of nominal
overload rating of the motors.
C. Provide starters with quick-make quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms,
green pilot lights, selector switches for local-remote and hand-off-auto
selection, start-stop push buttons, a manual reset push button; and with
toggle operated handle with handle lock-off.
2.03 DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS
A. Direct-on-line starters for single or three phase motors up to and including 10
HP, shall be provided as referred to on the drawings, schedules and in
accordance with NEC and NEMA requirements.
B. Direct-on-line starters shall comprise, but not limited to, the following listed
items. Any other items not listed, but mentioned elsewhere in the
Specifications or drawings and necessary for the satisfactory operation of the
starter shall also be provided.
1. Triple pole mechanically interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities
in the “off” position.
2. MCCB in the power circuit.
3. Contactor rated at 15 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation,

with magnetic blow outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn
copper main contacts of the removable type, and continuously rated
operating coils.
4. Start-stop push buttons.
5. Overload relays of the adjustable thermal type.
6. Control circuit fuses of the cartridge type.
7. Selector switches for local-remote and hand-off-auto selection.
8. Motor protection relay (unbalance and single phasing).
9. Ammeter of the moving iron type.
10. Pilot lamps to indicate “running”, “tripped”, “stopped” and other

required indications.
11. Removable neutral link of heavy section copper.
2.04 STAR DELTA STARTERS

84
A. Provide Star Delta starters of all required types, sizes, ratings and electrical
characteristics for motors above 10 HP as referred to on the drawings,
schedules and in accordance with NEC and NEMA requirements.
B. Construct starters with resistor-type closed-circuit transition wiring, including
3-pole contactors, adjustable electronic timer, and 3-pole overload protection
relay. Equip with start-stop push buttons, selector switches for local-remote
and hand-off-auto selection, etc. for control.
C. Star delta starters shall comprise, but not limited to, all those items mentioned
above for direct-on-line starters. Any other items not listed here, but
mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications or drawings and necessary
for the satisfactory operation of the starter shall also be provided.
2.05 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTERS
A. Auto transformer type motor starters incorporating reduced voltage starting

method shall be provided for motors 50 KW and larger, if proposed or
recommended by the manufacturer and with prior approval of the Engineer,
all in accordance with the requirements of NEC and NEMA.
B. For auto transformer starters incorporating reduced voltage starting the

change over shall be automatic. A lock-off switch shall be provided and
located locally to each motor and connected into the starter control circuit so
that the starter cannot be operated from MCC when the switch is in the “off”
position.
C. Auto transformer starters shall comprise, but not limited to, all those items
mentioned above for direct-on line starters. Any other items not listed here,
but mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications or drawings and necessary for
the satisfactory operation of the starter shall also be provided.
2.06 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS

A. Variable speed controllers of all types and sizes shall be provided for fans,
pumps and other equipment as referred to on the drawings, schedules
and in accordance with NEC and NEMA requirements.
B. Motor speed variation control of specified fans and pumps shall be achieved
using digital Pulse Width Modulation Inverters by changing frequency of the
supply.
C. Totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage motors shall be used rated for
ambient conditions and the Contractor shall ensure that the Fan Manufacturer
sizes motors to allow for frequency inverter control and confirms that their
equipment is fully suitable for this method of control and the inverters
provided. Motors and inverters shall be capable of continuous operation at
levels of 10% in excess of specified duties.
85
D. All inverters shall be supplied from the same manufacturer and installed fully
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Inverters shall control over the frequency range of 0.5 to 120 Hz, starting
current 1 x full load current (FLC), near unity power factor over the speed
range and not require any additional means for motor starting.
F. Acceleration and deceleration ramps shall be independently adjustable and

the inverter capable of riding a 500 millisecond mains interruption without
causing tripping.
G. Inverters shall be mounted in separate enclosures or Motor Control Centres,

dust and damp protected to IP54, allowing all parameters to be set with the
door closed, and provided with adequate ventilation for cooling. Ambient air
shall be taken as 40 ºC. Inverters shall be installed by the manufacturer of
MCCs and shall be totally compatible with all control and drive equipment
supplied by others.
H. Inverters shall provide the following minimum protections:
1. Motor phase to phase fault.
2. Motor phase to earth fault – continuous during operation.
3. Overvoltave.
4. Undervoltage.
5. Inverter overheat.
6. Motor overheat.
7. Stall protection.
8. Loss of control signal.
9. Loss of auxiliary control voltage.
10. Current limit.
Occurrence of any of these faults/protections shall cause electronic shut

down of the variable speed (frequency) drive controller without blowing of any
fuses or tripping of circuit breaker.
I. Selectable information regarding output frequency (Hz), Reference 1 (hand),

Reference 2 (auto), Difference of references, Motor current (amps), Motor
torque (% x Pn), DC link voltage (%), Temperature (ºC), Fault memory and
other standard features shall be available as an output digital display on
variable frequency drive controllers.
86
J. Inverters shall have the ability to provide either a linear or square law voltage
to frequency ratio on the output, and the facility to adjust the field weakening
point.
K. Inverters must be capable of electronic maintenance without the motor being

connected.
L. The inverters shall be speed controlled by direct digital input from the DDC
fan or pump controllers out-station, and all necessary interface cards shall be
provided.
M. The inverters shall provide means of running at a fixed (selectable) speed on

the closure of a remote volt free contact. This should override the normal
speed control reference signal.
N. A common fault alarm condition shall be available from volt free contact,
together with an output signal to indicate output frequency (speed).
O. Inverters shall be screened for ratio and computer interference.
P. In addition to above, all items mentioned above for direct-on-line starters

shall be provided for variable frequency (speed) drive controllers as
applicable and required by the Engineer.
2.07 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A. General purpose contactors shall be provided in power panelboards, Motor

Control Centres (MCC), other control panels or elsewhere as indicated on the
drawings or as required for the satisfactory operation of all systems on the
project.
B. General purpose contactors shall be magnetic type complying with

IEC60974-4 The rating and number of main poles/contacts of the contactors
shall be suitable for the intended application. The coil operating voltage shall
match with the control voltage of the system.
C. All accessories of the contactors such as push buttons, selector switches,

pilot lights, auxiliary contacts, etc. shall comply with the actual requirements
for the satisfactory operation of the system, where these will be utilised.
2.08 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Lighting contactors shall be provided in interior and exterior lighting panel

boards or elsewhere as referred to on the drawings, schedules or required for
the satisfactory operation of the lighting system.
B. The lighting contactors shall be magnetic type complying with IEC60974-4.

The rating and number of main poles/contacts of the lighting contactors shall
87
be suitable for the intended application. The contactor shall be electrically

and mechanically held type with coil operating voltage matching with the
control voltage.
C. All accessories of the lighting contactors such as push buttons, selector

switches, pilot lights, auxiliary contacts, etc. shall comply with NEMS ICS2
and the actual requirements for the satisfactory operation of the lighting
system where these will be utilised.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install Enclosed Motor Starters and Contactors as indicated in compliance
with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of IEC,
NEC, NEMA and in accordance with recognised industry practices to fulfill
project requirements.
B. Coordinate with all other related works such as pumps, motors, lighting and
electrical wiring/cabling, as necessary to interface installation of enclosed
starters and contactors with other work.
C. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any.
D. Adjust the thermal overload relays and other adjustable components in motor
controllers to match installed motor characteristics.
E. Comply with Section 16030.
F. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor
served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor,
and voltage/phase rating.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
B. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and where necessary,

adjust units for free mechanical movement.
C. Touch-up scratched or marred surface to match original finish.
B. Prior to energisation of enclosed starters and contactors, check insulation

resistance to ensure that all wiring and equipment are installed satisfactorily
without any leakage to ground.
C. Prior to energisation of starters, check tripping of all protective devices
including thermal overload relays by current injection and perform complete
operation and functional test of the equipment by simulation only.
D. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energise enclosed starters and contactors
and demonstrate complete functioning and operation of equipment in
accordance with the requirements and up to the satisfaction of the
supervising Engineer. Where necessary correct malfunctioning units.
88
SECTION 16410
LV POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Factory assembled main or sub-main LV Power Distribution Boards and
accessories.
A. Section 15180 Building Management Systems and Automatic Controls.
D Section 16240 Disconnect Switches.
E. Section 16260 Enclosed Starters and Contactors.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), 384—Switchboards and

Panelboards.
B. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.
C. UL 60489 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
D. IEC 60439 LV Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies.
E. IEC 60947 LV Switchgear and Controlgear.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's catalogs and data including schematic drawings,
dimensioned layout of equipment and accessories, technical specifications,
installation instruction and general recommendations. Include data
substantiating that the proposed units comply with the project requirements.
89
C. Submit with the Tender, a dimensioned outline drawing of each distribution

board/switchboard showing all leading dimensions and the estimated weight
of the equipment.
D. Submit manufacturer's fabrication, builders work and installation drawings
showing all significant details of each main and sub-main LV Power
Distribution Boards/switchboard including the following:
1. All components.
2. Fuse, circuit-breaker and switch ratings.
3. Current and voltage transformer ratios, class, terminal markings and

output.
4. Instruments, including scale details.
5. Relay types and characteristics.
6. Indicating lamps, including color.
7. Position of switches, and details of function.
8. All internal connections, with terminal markings.
9. Arrangement of terminal blocks.
10. Wire numbers.
11. Size, type and color of secondary wiring.
12. Principal physical dimensions, including clearances required for

removing covers, opening doors, operating handles, withdrawing
equipment, etc.
13. Position of all panel face equipment.
14. Identification of all equipment, and appropriate label inscriptions.
15. Foundation details, including weights and fixing points.
16. Cable entry details including gland and gland plate provisions.
E. Submit list of tools, test equipment, spare parts and ancillary equipment.
F. Submit the factory test reports verifying that the LV Power Distribution Boards
have successfully passed all routine tests. Type tests results shall be
submitted, when required by the Engineer.
90
A. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the main or sub-main distribution

boards of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in
C. Except where detailed in the Specifications, all components and equipment in
LV power distribution boards shall be UL listed and preferably be from the
same manufacturer. The distribution boards shall comply with the
requirements of NEC, NEMA, IEC.
B. Handle packaged cubicles of LV power distribution boards carefully to
prevent breakage, denting or scoring the finish. Store equipment at indoor
location and protect from weather. When outdoor storage is necessary,
elevate well above ground and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
1.07 warranty
1.08 SPARE PARTS
A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional circuit breakers, fuses, lamps and

other components of LV power distribution boards, amounting to one unit for
every 10 units, but not less than 2 units of each type and rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials used in the manufacture and installation of the LV power
distribution boards shall be of high quality and of proven suitability for the
functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service.
B. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in
Section 15180.
C. Allow for witness tests to be carried out in factory and give at least 14 days
notice before the tests are to be carried out.
2.02 LV POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A. LV power distribution boards/switchboards shall be designed and constructed

to withstand for one second without damage, thermal and mechanical
stresses which might arise under short circuit conditions up to the prospective
busbar short circuit current. Power distribution boards shall be type tested in
compliance with IEC 439-1.
B. Switchboards shall conform to the requirements of NEMA ICS 1 and 2.
91
C. Switchboards shall provide a degree of protection against contact with live or

moving parts, and against the entry of solid foreign bodies and liquid, to IP 32
standard in accordance with the definitions contained in relevant standards.
D. Switchboards shall be self-contained, free-standing, floor mounting, flush-
fronted, multi-cubicle Class 3 or multi-box type as called for on the Drawings
and shall be constructed in sections where necessary to facilitate transport
and erection.
E. The overall height of each switchboard shall not exceed two metres unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. Each switchboard shall be designed for front access and top or bottom entry
as shown on the Drawings. Cable terminations and space for terminations
shall be suitable for the sizes of cable. All switchboards shall be capable of
extension at both ends and busbar chambers shall be fitted with removable
end covers.
G. Individual cubicles from which cubicle type switchboards are built shall be
rigidly constructed from folded steel panels and sections firmly welded
together, and the required number of cubicles shall be bolted or welded
together. Switchboards constructed from flat steel plates on a framework of
rolled steel angle shall not be accepted. All switchboards shall be provided
with adequate lifting eyes, which shall be removed after the boards are in
place, and replaced by screw-in plugs. When a switchboard is sectionalised
for assembly on site, the sections shall be provided with adequate means of
locating adjacent sections to ensure accurate alignment.
H. Each switchboard shall be supplied with removable undrilled steel plates for
cable glands and conduit entry. Where single core cables are used the gland
plates shall be brass or non-conducting. All conduits, trunking and cables as
detailed on the Drawings, shall be accurately located and drilled, cut and
threaded on site.
I. LV switchboards shall be enclosed with lockable doors. All "live" metal shall
be insulated and the operator shall not be able to accidentally come into
contact with "live" connections or busbars when energized. All cable
terminations shall be fully shrouded and shall permit connections to be made
with adjacent circuits live.
J. All equipment mounted in switchboards shall be fully accessible for
maintenance. Switchboard compartments shall be fitted with hinged doors,
neoprene or foam rubber gasketed, and doors shall be provided with lever
type locking handles having integral cylinder locks. All locks shall be
operable with a common key, the number of keys supplied being two per lock
up to a maximum of 10 per switchboard.
K. Moulded case circuit breakers in switchboards shall comply with UL 489 and
IEC 947-2. Switches, fuse-switches, switch disconnectors and disconnectors
shall comply with Section 16240 and NEMA and NEC requirements. Air
circuit breakers shall be used for sizes 1000 A and above or as indicated on
the Drawings.
L. Motor starters installed within the Power Distribution Boards shall comply with
the requirements given in Section 16260.
92
M. All disconnectors, switch disconnectors, switches and circuit-breakers shall

be provided with the means to enable them to be locked in the `off' position.
When used as earthing switches they shall be capable of being locked `on'
when closed to the earth connection.
N. Busbars shall be four-pole, air insulated of uniform cross-section throughout
their length, with a continuous current rating not less than that indicated in
the Drawings and shall be arranged horizontally and vertically through each
switchboard. Current ratings shall take account of reduction in section caused
by drilling for connections and supports.
O. Busbars and the connections from them to the various items of switchgear
shall be manufactured from hard drawn high conductivity copper.
P. Busbars shall be supported on non-hygroscopic, non-tracking insulators of
sufficient strength to withstand, without damage, the forces set up, either by
thermal effects during normal operation or by electromagnetic effects under
short circuit fault conditions.
Q. Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments, which shall not contain
any wiring or apparatus other than that for connecting to the busbars.
R. Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be possible only after the
removal of covers secured by bolts or studs. Such covers shall be identified
externally by “Formica' engraving laminate labels bearing the inscription
`BUSBARS' in black lettering not less than 10 mm high, on a white
background.
S. The cross-sectional area of the neutral busbar shall equal that of a phase
bar.
T. Each cubicle or box section shall be provided with sufficient busbar links to
enable cubicle sections to be easily joined. Facilities shall also be provided
for extending the busbars to extra cubicle sections, if required, at some later
date.
U. Metering current transformers shall be installed on the incoming side.
V. The equipment for each outgoing circuit shall be housed in a separate
compartment so that it can be maintained without risk of contact with live
connections on another circuit.
W. Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the
related item of switchgear, and a fuse unit fitted with a separate protective
device shall be fixed within the compartment to protect the control circuit.
Where control circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the protective device
shall also be the means of isolation for the terminals of these contacts.
X. Where auxiliary contacts are used for interlocking purposes and supplies are
derived from other sources, isolating facilities shall be provided to ensure that
the auxiliary contacts can be made safe. The isolating facility shall be in the
form of an auxiliary switch on the respective compartment isolating device or
a separate isolator mounted within the respective compartment. Where a
separate isolator is provided a clear warning notice made from “Formica”
engraving laminate shall be fixed by screws in a prominent position in the
compartment stating `WARNING - ISOLATOR AUXILIARY CONTACTS'.
93
Y. When the external cables to or from the switchboard are designated on the
Drawings as being PVC or XLPE insulated twin and multi-core cables,
armoured or unarmoured, the appropriate units of the switchboard shall be
supplied with suitable brass compression glands of the correct sizes.
Z. Compression glands for PVC insulated and sheathed twin and multi-core
cables shall comply with the requirements given elsewhere in these
specifications. All component parts of a cable gland shall be of the same
manufacture.
AA. All internal connections and small wiring shall be carried out using PVC
insulated cables complying with NEC requirements and all terminals shall be
marked in accordance with NEMA/ANSI standards.
BB. All small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, using
purpose-made plastic cable ties, or shall be enclosed in purpose-made
plastic small wiring trunking. Wiring cleated to metal surfaces shall be
spaced off the metal or otherwise insulated from it. Metallic “buckle clips'
shall not be used for internal wiring. Wiring to swing doors or other moveable
items shall be flexible cables neatly bunched and constrained by a flexible
harness.
CC. Small wiring to which external connections have to be made shall be
terminated on approved type terminal boards which shall be easily accessible
and conveniently arranged to facilitate the connection of incoming and
outgoing multi-core cables. Each terminal unit shall have separate incoming
and outgoing terminals and no more than one wire shall be connected to any
one terminal unless the terminal is specifically designed to take more than
one. Each terminal board for external wiring shall have at least 10% spare
capacity with a minimum of two spare terminals. All terminal boards shall be
numbered in sequence to match the numbering on the wiring or connection
diagrams.
DD. All spare contacts on relays, contactors, and the like shall be wired to easily
accessible terminal blocks, as above, suitably positioned for future external
wiring.
EE. Main earthing terminal shall consist of a copper earth bar sized in accordance
with NEC for the prospective short-circuit current. The earth bar shall be
unjointed except between cubicle sections and shall extend through the
length of the switchboard. The earth bar shall be connected to the earthing
conductor via an external test link. Minimum earth bar size shall be 25 x 3
mm. Each cubicle and all protective conductors shall be bonded to the earth
bar.
FF. A bonding conductor shall connect the earth bar to each gland and/or armour
clamp where cables terminate at the switchgear. All equipment which is not
specifically earthed separately shall be bonded to the main earth bar.
GG. Each switchboard shall be equipped with the instruments, meters, Polyphase
meters and associated apparatus as detailed on the Drawings. All
instruments, meters and associated apparatus shall comply with the detailed
requirements set out elsewhere in this specification under the heading
Instruments and Metering.
94
HH. Each incoming and outgoing circuit on the switchboard shall be clearly
identified on the front panel by means of an engraved label bearing, in black
letters on a white background. The labels shall be of plastic engraving
laminate with lettering not less than 5 mm high and shall be secured to the
panel front with instrument headed machine screws. Where rear access is
available labels shall also be fixed to the rear panels.
II. Warning labels shall be fitted in all places where the removal of covers or
access panels may expose live equipment operating at a pressure exceeding
250 V between phases or to earth. Warning labels shall be of plastic
engraving laminate with red lettering on a white background, and shall bear
the inscription `DANGER - LIVE PARTS OVER 250 V' in letters not less than
10 mm high.
JJ. All equipment and apparatus, both inside and outside the switchboard,
including instruments, meters, and relays, which is not clearly identified by
integral labelling, shall be adequately labelled in the manner described above
for front-of-panel circuit labels.
KK. All fuse-switches, switch-fuses, miniature and moulded case circuit-breakers,
disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and distribution boards forming part of
low voltage switchboards shall comply with the requirements set out in
Sections 16240 and 16420.
LL. No switch, breaker or fuse gear in switchboards will be accepted unless it has
type test certification to the requirements of the relevant standard from an
independent testing authority.
MM. A high voltage pressure test shall be carried out with all isolators closed and
power fuses fitted but having all control circuits disconnected. The panels
shall withstand for one minute a voltage of 2 kV across the following points:
1. Phase to phase.
2. Phase to neutral.
3. Phase to earth.
4. Neutral to earth.
NN. Works tests on busbars in accordance with the requirements for routine tests
shall be included.
OO. Approval of tests and test certificates that may be given shall not relieve the
Sub-contractor of the obligation to supply the complete equipment in
accordance with the requirements of the specification, schedules and
Drawings.
PP. Where designated, the emergency power supply connection shall be an
automatic source changeover with the mechanical and electrical interlocking.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. The room for main LV power distribution board/switchboard shall be complete
with all accessories necessary to form a complete installation including, but
not limited to, the following operating and safety accessories:
1. 1 No. pair of insulating gloves.
2. 1 No. rubber mat 10 mm thick x 1000 mm wide and extending the full
95
length of the equipment.

3. 1 No. notice and safety instruction chart including first aid chart for
electric shock.
4. 1 No. set of spare control circuit fuses.
5. Any other equipment necessary to comply with the standards and
maintenance/safety requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 inspection
B. The Contractor shall examine the rooms, areas and conditions under which
the main or sub-main LV power distribution boards/switchboards are to be
installed, and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
C. Agree with the manufacturer of the switchboards, the suitability of the Civil
Works for foundations which must be compatible with equipment and all sizes
and details must be checked and confirmed before concrete is poured, or
revised with the approval of the Engineer where necessary. It is the
Contractor's sole responsibility to supply all materials and to construct in the
correct location, level and true grade, the concrete base, and to connect all
incoming and outgoing cables.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of LV power distribution boards/switchboards shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and shall comply fully
with the requirements of NEC, IEC and recognized industry practices.
B. Install the switchboards on to bases using appropriate lifting equipment to
ensure that no damage occurs. When correctly located, the unit shall be
anchored in position and tested before and after connecting the incoming and
outgoing cables.
C. Supply all material for construction of base in correct location, level and time
grade and for connection of all incoming and outgoing cables.
D. Check ratings of all circuit protection devices and fill out the circuit directory
card upon completion of installation work.

B. Prior to energisation of main and sub-main LV power distribution
boards/switchboards, following tests shall be carried out:
1. Testing of all accessible bolted connections to manufacturer’s torque
specifications.
96
2. Testing of insulation resistance.

3. Testing of electrical continuity / short circuits of the circuits.
4. Current injection testing of all circuit breakers and protective devices.
5. Ratio tests of all current transformers.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise the LV power distribution

boards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with the requirements.
Check whether all outgoings are connected as per load schedules. Record
changes in the schedule for final as-built, if acceptable to the Engineer.
3.04 ADJUSTMENTS
B. Adjust circuit breakers, protective relays and other control devices to provide
adequate over current protection and selective tripping with downstream
devices in accordance with short circuit and protection coordination study and
after proper coordination with protection settings of Electricity Supply
Authority.
97
SECTION 16420
LV PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. LV Protective Devices installed in LV switchgears, power distribution boards,

panelboards, motor control centres, control panels including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Air circuit breakers.
2. Moulded case circuit breakers.
3. Miniature circuit breakers.
4. Residual current circuit breakers.
5. HRC/cartridge fuses.
D. Section 16270 Electric Meters.
F. Section 16440 Panelboards.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 2 Wiring and

Protection.
B. UL 489 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
C. NEMA AB1 Applicable Requirements.
D. IEC 269 Low Voltage Fuses.

98
E. IEC 947 LV Circuit Breakers.
F. IEC 1008 Residential Current Operated Circuit Breakers without Integral

Overcurrent Protection.
G. IEC 1009 Residual current Operated Circuit Breakers with Integral

Current Protection.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's data for LV protective devices including catalogue

cuts, time current trip characteristic curves and mounting requirements with
dimensions.
C. Submit factory test reports verifying that all the LV protective devices have
successfully passed all routine and type tests.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of protective devices

of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

C. All LV protective devices to be UL listed and conform to the requirements of

NEC, NEMA, IEC and LOCAL STANDARDS.
1.06 SPARE PARTS
A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional LV protective devices of all types

and ratings, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less
than two units of each type and rating.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Contract Conditions 0.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
99
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials specified herein shall be of high quality and of proven suitability
for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in
services.

Section 15180.
2.02 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. The air circuit breakers shall comply with NEMA and IEC, rated 1000 A and
above or as shown on the drawings.
B. The air circuit breakers shall be front removable or withdrawable type with
current monitor and solid state sensor for phase and earth sensing
protection. The static sensor shall have adjustable settings for each of the
following tripping characteristics:-
1. Long - delay pick up point.

2. Long - delay tripping time.
3. Short - delay pick up point (Instantaneous protection).
4. Earth point pick up.
5. Earth tripping time.
C. Extra facilities may be required such as shunt trips, undervoltage release,

auxiliary switches, self and remote indications monitor, motorized for remote
control, load monitoring, measurement of phase currents, maximum current
and fault currents.
2.03 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) shall comply with NEMA and IEC.
They shall be of the quick-make, quick-break, trip-free, thermal magnetic
adjustable releases or with solid state trip units complete with De-ion arc
grids, alloys contacts and inter-pole contacts. All units shall incorporate a
visual indication of open or closed contacts.
B. Extra facilities may be required, such as shunt trips, under-voltage release,

auxiliary switches, remote indications or tripping, residual current protection
or special calibrations. Such extra facilities shall be specified elsewhere in
this specification or on the Drawings.
100
C. The short circuit interrupting capacity of all MCCBs and MCBs in any
panelboards, MCC, power distribution board/switchboard, control panel, etc.
shall not be less than the short circuit rating of the main busbars, as indicated
on the drawings/schedules or required in accordance with short circuit
calculations and protection coordination study.
2.04 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)
A. Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be plastic moulded units incorporating

thermal magnetic protection against overloads and short circuits, and shall be
UL listed and comply with NEMA. The tripping mechanism shall be designed
to provide delays operation on overload and instantaneous operation under
fault condition. Breakers shall have positive ON/OFF indication, be "trip free"
and shall trip to the full off position under overload and/or short circuits. Triple
pole units shall be used for three phase circuits. All multiple breakers shall
have an integral common trip bar as standard.
B. Circuit breakers shall be grouped and mounted on removable cradles. Each

group shall be connected to a common bus bar of the appropriate phase.
C. Where the fault level of the system is such that the use of MCBs is not
acceptable, then moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) as specified
elsewhere shall be utilised.
2.05 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Residual current circuit breakers (RCCBs) shall be UL listed and comply with
NEMA. The RCCBs shall generally comprise a solid state sensing device, trip
coil/mechanism, contact system/switching mechanism.
B. The sensitivity of the RCCBs shall be 300, 30, 10 or 5 mA as indicated on the

Drawings and schedules with a maximum tripping time of 30 millisecond.
C. Each breaker shall incorporate a test circuit with a test button to simulate fault
conditions.
D. The combined units shall be compatible with other MCBs installed within
distribution boards.
2.06 HRC/CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. HRC/cartridge fuse links shall be of the high rupturing capacity (HRC) type
and shall comply with IEC 269 – 2 and NEMA requirements.
101
B. Each HRC fuse link shall be ASTA certified for its claimed breaking capacity
and shall be so mounted that the current rating on each fuse link is clearly
visible.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and with recognised industry practices to ensure
compliance with NEC, NEMA, IEC and Local standards.
B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work as necessary to

interface installation of protective devices with other work.
C. Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment

being exerted by clamps, supports or cable.
D. Set field-adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent

to installation of devices.
E. Install fuses, if any, in fused circuit breakers.
F. Inspect circuit-breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where

necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.
B. Prior to energisation of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for

continuity of circuitry and current injection for trip tests. Correct
malfunctioning units and then demonstrate compliance with the requirements.
102
SECTION 16430
POWER FACTOR CAPACITORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Power Factor Capacitors including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Power Factor Capacitor Units.
2. Power Factor Controller Units.
A. Section 15171 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
E. Section 16260 Enclosed Starters and Contactors.
F. Section 16410 LV Power distribution Boards.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
B. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter-4 Equipment for

General Use.
C. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
103
B. Submit manufacturer's data and catalogs including schematic drawings,

dimensioned layout of equipment and accessories, technical specification,
installation instructions and general recommendations for each type, size and
ratings of power factor capacitors. Include data substantiating that the
proposed units comply with the project requirements.
C. Submit the factory test reports verifying that all power factor capacitors have
passed successfully all routine tests. Type tests results shall be
submitted, if required by the supervising Engineer.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power factor

capacitors and associated components of types, sizes and ratings required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturers and agents /
suppliers.

C. The power factor capacitors and controllers shall be UL listed and comply
with the requirements of LOCAL STANDARDS, NEMA, IEC and NEC.
B. Handle units carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the finish. Store
distribution boards inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store
outdoors, elevate well above ground, enclose with durable, waterproof
wrapping and protect from direct sun.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER FACTOR CAPACITOR UNITS
A. Capacity: kVAR as indicated on the Drawings, at rated voltage and

frequency.
B. Voltage: 380 V as indicated on the Drawings, three phase , 60 Hz.

104
C. Operating Limits: 110 % at rated voltage in ambient air temperature between

-40 oC and 45 oC.
D. Construction: Internally fused, replaceable capacitor cells factory assembled

and bussed together in protective enclosure, with internal discharge resistor.
E. Dielectric Impregnant: NFPA 30 Class III B combustible liquid.
F. Short Circuit Rating : Minimum 42 kA RMS or as per short circuit and

Protection Coordination Study.
2.02 POWER FACTOR CONTROLLER UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and pre-wired equipment consisting of unit

capacitors, power factor sensing and control equipment, integral disconnect
switch, and switching contactors to provide variable correction within discrete
steps to maintain preset value of power factor.
B. Step Capacity: Maximum 50 kVAR at rated voltage and frequency (step

capacity lesser than 50 kVAR will also be acceptable).
C. Number of Steps: Minimum 6.
D. Voltage: 380 V, three phase, 60 Hz.
E. Power Factor Range: 0.85 lagging to 0.95 leading.
F. Indicators: Light for each step of capacity.
G. Basic Impulse Level: 30 kV.
H. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: 42 kA RMS.
I. Operating Limits: 110 % at rated voltage in ambient air temperature between

0 oC and 45 oC.
J. Capacitor Construction: Capacitor unit with internal discharge resistor, in

NEMA 250, Type 5 enclosure.
K. Capacitor Dielectric Impregnant: NFPA 30, Class III B combustible liquid.
L. Power Factor Sensing and Control: Reactive current sensing and solid-state
electronic controller connects appropriate correction capacitors to line
105
through contactors, with time delay to accommodate capacitor resistor

discharge and to prevent hunting.
M. Contactors: Electrically-held general purpose magnetic contactors, sized in

accordance with NEMA ICS 2, Part 210.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install power factor capacitors and associated equipment in accordance with

the manufacturer’s written instructions, NEC requirements and recognised
industry practices.
B. Provide connections and supports for the capacitors in accordance with the
B. Perform field inspection, testing and adjusting of the power factor capacitors
and controllers as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Check and measure kVAR of each power factor capacitor.
D. Perform operational checks to prove the manual and auto operation of the
power factor controller unit and protective devices and alarms.
106
SECTION 16440
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Lighting and Power Panelboards including cabinet cut out boxes and
enclosures.
C. Section 16420 LV Protective Devices.
D. Section 16640 Earthing Systems.
E. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Controlgear.
B. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), 384-Switchboards and

Panelboards.
C. NEMA PB 1 Panelboards.
D. UL 50 Panelboard Finishing.
E. UL 67 Panelboards.
F. UL 489 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
G. UL 886 Standard for Cabinets and Boxes.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's catalogues and data including schematic drawings,

dimensioned layout of the enclosures and all accessories inside
107
panelboards, technical specifications, installation instructions and general

recommendations for each type of panelboard required. Include data
substantiating that the proposed units comply with the project requirements.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of panelboards

and enclosures of the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
Preference shall be given to local manufacturers and agents/suppliers.

C. All panelboards shall be UL listed and comply with the requirements of

NEMA, ANSI, NEC and LOCAL STANDARDS.
B. Handle Panelboards and enclosures carefully to prevent breakage, denting or

scoring the finish. Store panelboards and enclosures at indoor location and
protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above
ground and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping and protect from direct
sun.
1.07 WARRANTY
1.08 SPARE PARTS
A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional circuit breakers, relays and fuses of

the panelboards, amounting to one unit for every 10 units, but not less than 5
units of each type and rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service.
108

Section 15180.
2.02 PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION
A. Lighting, power, branch circuit and distribution panelboards shall be UL listed

and conform to NEMA and ANSI requirements. The technical requirements
showing bus size, size and number of branch circuit breakers, branch circuit
loads and wiring as provided for each panel board in the Contract Documents
shall be followed for guidance and panelboards shall be upgraded for actual
site requirements before fabrication.
.
B. Panelboards, cabinet boxes and enclosures shall be suitable for recessed or
surface mounting as required on site.
C. Interior components shall be mounted on back plate of reinforced steel for

rigid support and accurate alignment.
D. One flat key tumbler cylinder type door lock with two keys per lock shall be
provided.
E. Provide enclosure earthing in accordance with NEC 250 and requirements

given in Section 16640.
F. Bus bars shall be hard drawn high conductivity copper, with silver plated
contact surface.
G. Finish shall be baked grey enamel with rust inhibitor, as per UL 50.
.
H. Provide circuit breakers in accordance with Section 16420. Provide two
adjacent single pole breakers to opposing polarities in such a manner that
two pole breakers can be installed in any location. The same shall be
provided for three adjacent single pole breakers to opposing polarities.
I. Neutral and ground buses shall be of the same rating as the phase bus.
J. A separate earthing bus, marked with a yellow green strip along its front and
bonded to the steel cabinet, shall be provided for connecting all earth
conductors. Bus bars shall be copper, shall be securely fastened to bases,
and shall not depend upon breakers for support. All main buses and back
pans shall be so designed that branch breakers may be changed without
additional machining, drilling or tapping.
K. Panelboard assemblies shall be so designed that any individual breaker can

be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or
109
removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining

clearances and other requirements of NEC.
L. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily

limited to, cartridge and plug time-delay type fuses, circuit breaker, earth fault
protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for
ratings and applications indicated.
M. One 25 mm wide laminated plastic name plate shall be attached by means of

stainless steel rivets or permanent adhesive, showing panelboard number in
13 mm white cut-in letters on black background. All labeling and
identification shall be in accordance with section 16030.
N. A directory holder with clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be
mounted on the inside of each door.
O. Protection degree shall be a minimum of IP 31 for indoor and IP 54 for

outdoor installations.
P. Construction shall allow maintenance of incoming line terminations, main

device connections and all main bus bolted connections to be performed
without rear access.
2.03 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
A. The lighting and power panelboards shall be of the dead front type with bolt-
on circuit breakers in the mains, if indicated, and branches. The panelboards
shall be designed for 380/220 V as indicated on the Drawings, 3-phase, 4-
wire, 50 Hz application.
B. The lighting and power panelboards shall be equipped with bolt-on type
circuit breakers. Circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown in the panelboard
schedules.
C. Continuous current rating of busbars shall be as shown on panelboard

schedules.
D. Where a main protective device is not shown, provide disconnect switches.

Bus bar and branch devices shall be of the sequence-phase type
connections.
E. Neutral and grounding bars shall be mounted at the opposite end of the
structure from the mains and with numbered terminals for connection of
neutral and grounding wires.
2.04 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
110
A. Distribution panelboards shall be of the dead front type and shall be designed
for 380/220 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz applications. Each distribution panel
shall be enclosed in a sheet metal cabinet with front doors, catches, locks,
etc. Locks shall be fitted for the same key as locks on other lighting and
power branch circuit panelboards. All distribution panelboards shall meet
pertinent standards.
B. The distribution panelboards shall be equipped with bolt-on moulded case

circuit breakers. Circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown on the distribution
board schedules.
C. Current-carrying connections to bus shall be of the bolted type, factory

assembled. Bus bars shall be of the sequence-phase type connections and
arranged for 3-phase, 4-wire mains or lugs.
D. Mount the neutral bar at the opposite end of the structure from the mains and
with have numbered terminals for connection of neutral wires.
2.05 NAME PLATES
B. Each panelboard shall have an affixed engraved nameplate. The nameplate

shall be both in English and Arabic.
C. Each distribution panelboard circuit breaker shall be equipped with a

nameplate which indicates the name of the equipment (motor, panelboard,
etc.) to which the feeder conductors are connected. Where more than one
piece of equipment or panelboard is connected to the circuit this fact shall be
indicated on the nameplate. Apply the feeder numbers used on the Drawings
on the switch nameplates also.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards, cabinet boxes and enclosures including electrical

connections, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of LOCAL STANDARDS, NEC and NEMA and in
accordance with recognised industry practices to ensure that products serve
the intended function.
B. Co-ordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and

raceway installation work.
111
C. Install only in permanently dry locations, away from all mechanical and public
health services.
D. Anchor enclosure firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they
are permanently mechanically secured.
E. Check ratings of all circuit protection devices and other components

according to approved material.
F. Provide electrical connections within enclosures.
G. Fill out panelboard's directory card upon completion of installation works.
B. Prior to energisation of circuiting, check all accessible connections to

manufacturer's torque specifications.
C. Prior to energisation of panelboard, check with earth resistance tester phase-

to-phase and phase-to earth insulation resistance levels to ensure
requirements are fulfilled.
D. Prior to energisation, check panelboard for electrical continuity of circuits and

for short circuits.
3.03 ADJUSTING
B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups and testing, energize panelboards

and demonstrate functioning in accordance with the requirements. Check
whether all outgoings are connected as per panelboard schedules. Record
changes in the schedules for final as-built, if acceptable to the Engineer.
112
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Section includes
A. Interior Lighting including but not limited to, the following:
1. Incandescent and spot lights.
2. Fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
3. Discharge lamp luminaires.
4. Lighting fixtures accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTSIONS

D. Section 16520 Exterior and Street Lighting.
E. Section 16530 Emergency and Exit Lighting.
F. Section 16550 Special Lighting.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C 81.10 Electrical Lamp Boxes and Holders, Screw Shell Types.
B. ANSI C 81.20 Electric Lamp Boxes and Holders, Fluorescent Types.
C. ANSI C 82.1, 1a Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
D. ANSI C 82.4 Mercury Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type).
E. ANSI C82.5 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Reference Ballasts.
F. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 4- Equipment for

General Use.
G. IES handbook Handbook of Illumination Engineering Society.
113
H. UL 496 Lamp Holders for Incandescent and Mercury Vapour

Lamps.
I UL 542 Lamps Holders, Starters and Starter Holders for Fluorescent

Lamps.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, catalogs and technical/photometric
data for interior lighting fixtures to show that the proposed light fixtures are of
the required type, construction and quality.
C. Submit dimensioned shop drawings of lighting fixture installations, including
but not necessary limited to, layout and connections to panelboards. Submit
fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each proposed
fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures of
types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference to be given to local
manufacturer’s and suppliers/agents.
successful installation and experience on projects with interior lighting
fixtures similar to that required for this project.
C. All interior lighting fixtures shall be UL listed and comply with the
requirements of ANSI, NEC and LOCAL STANDARDS.
A. Comply with Section Contract Conditions.
B. Luminaires, lamps, and accessories shall be delivered to the job site wrapped
in protective covering and stored in a dry location free from dust or water, and
in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling.
Luminaires, lamps, and accessories shall be handled carefully to prevent
damage. Damaged items shall be replaced at no additional cost.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL

section 15180.
2.02 INCANDESCENT AND SPOT LIGHTS
114
A. Furnish all light fittings complete with internal wiring, lamps and lamp holders,
leads, trim, rings, frames, hangers and reflectors.
B. Lighting fittings shall be of sizes, types and ratings as indicated on drawings
and schedules.
C. All wiring within the lighting fittings shall be suitable for the voltage, current
and temperature to which insulation will be subjected.
2.03 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A. All luminaire control gear components and wiring shall be enclosed in a steel
canopy, protected from corrosion.
B. Recessed, surface and suspended mounted luminaires shall be designed for
use with control gear having maximum case temperatures, suitable for use in
ambient temperatures and conditions where they are to be installed.
C. All luminaires shall be labeled where visible with the voltage, frequency,
current rating to include control gear and lamp(s), manufacturer's name and
fixture type.
D. All ballasts shall be of the quickstart dry type, epoxy resin insulated.
E. Where reflector and white louver assembly is specified construct, the
reflector shall be constructed from highly polished aluminum.
F. All wiring within the luminaires shall be suitable for the voltage, current and
temperature to which insulations will be subjected.
G. All luminaires to be fitted with dry type high power factor correction capacitors
correcting to 0.9 lagging, rapid start for high ceilings and switch start for low
ceilings and low noise features; type 1 class P; sound rated A, and with
internal thermal protection.
H. The metal canopy shall be finished with a white high gloss stove enameled
paint.
I. All luminaires shall be fitted with radio interference suppression.
2.04 DISCHARGE LAMP LUMINAIRES
A. Discharge lamp luminaires shall to be of a type as specified on the Drawings
and schedule.
B. Luminaires generally, shall be of a type suitable for use with mercury vapour,
sodium vapour or metal halide type lamps and shall have integral control
gear unless otherwise specified.
C. Where control gear is to be separately mounted, it shall be completely
enclosed in a metal clad type enclosure complete with conduit entry facilities
and fixing accessories.
D. Power factor correction capacitors shall be supplied of adequate rating to
provide an overall circuit power factor not less than 0.85 lagging.
E. Luminaire enclosures for internal use shall be fabricated from sheet steel,
finished in a corrosion and abrasion resistant paint finish or shall be of cast
alloy resistant to corrosion or abrasion. All enclosures shall be complete with
conduit or glanded cable entry and all necessary support and fixing
accessories.
F. Luminaires to be flush mounted in suspended ceilings shall be suitable for
the ceiling module dimensions (600 x 600 mm or as indicated on drawings)
115
and types of suspended ceiling such as concealed spline or exposed T,

gypsum board or tiles or strip, etc.
2.05 PROTECTION CLASSIFICATION
A. All interior lighting fixtures’ enclosures shall be classified in accordance with
the IP classification system and two digit number code.
B. All interior lighting fixtures for outdoor use or in damp or wet locations,
specially in bath rooms, shall be dust and damp proof and weatherproof as
classification IP 54 minimum.
C. All interior lighting fixtures for use in hazardous areas shall conform to the
requirements of NEC chapter 5 and be appropriate to the classification of the
hazard.
2.06 LAMPS
A. Every incandescent lighting point shall be complete with the number and size
of lamps required and each lamp shall be suitable for the mains voltage of
220 V as indicated on the drawings or elsewhere.
B. Unless otherwise indicated lamps shall be coiled coil, pearl finish. Up to and
including 150 watts, lamps shall have bayonet caps, larger sizes be fitted with
the appropriate ES cap, for general service with an average life expectancy of
750 hours and light output of 13-15 lumens/watt.
C. Special purpose high output lamps shall consist of a tungsten filament
housed in a halogen filled quartz tube giving a light output of 17-22
lumens/watt and a life expectancy of 2000 hours.
D. Tubular fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NEMA
or approved equipment and shall be of the bi-pin type.
E. The electrical characteristics of fluorescent lamps shall conform to the
following:-
Type Of Tube Length Light Output Tube Power

Consumption
Mm Lumens Watts
T8-Tri- 600 1350 18

Phosphor
T8-Tri- 1200 3200 36
Phosphor
T8-Tri- 1500 5200 58
Phosphor
Rapid start lamp wattages ( 40 and 65 W) shall be used where required.
F. Average life expectancy to not be less than 5000 hours.

o
G. The standard colour of fluorescent lamps shall be 3000 K colour, unless
otherwise specified. Cool white or Warm white as selected by the Engineer.
116
H. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be of the type as indicated on the drawing in

a range of 7 to 42 watts. Lamps to be suitable for operation in the cap
position as denoted in the luminaire in which they are intended to be used.
I. High pressure mercury vapour discharge lamps shall generally conform to
ANSI requirements and shall be MBF style for ratings 50 W to 125 W and
MBFI style for ratings 250 W to 1000 W. Lamps to be suitable for operation in
cap position as denoted in the luminaire in which they are intended to be
used. The lamps shall be capable of maintaining an average life of 5000
hours with an average light output of 40-45 lumens/watt, in the 50-125 W
sizes and 65-85 lumens/watt in the 250-1000 W sizes.
J. High pressure sodium vapour discharge lamps shall be of high pressure type
(SON). Lamps shall be suitable for operation in the cap position required in
the luminaire in which they are intended to be used. The lamps shall be
capable of maintaining an average life of 8000 hours with an average light
output of approximately 100 lumens/watt.
K. Metal halide discharge lamps shall be suitable for operation in cap position
as denoted in the luminaire in which they are intended to be used. The lamps
to be capable of maintaining an average life of 5000 hours with an average
light output of 66-85 lumens/watt.
2.07 light fixtures accessories
a. LAMPHOLDERS AND STARTERS:
1. Lampholders for incandescent and mercury vapour lamps shall
conform to UL 496.
2. Lampholders, starters and starter holders for fluorescent lamps shall
conform to UL 542.
3. Provide mechanical self retaining neoprene gasket which is dust and
moisture proof to act as a seal between bulb and lampholder.
B. BALLASTS:
1. Provide ballasts for mercury vapour, sodium vapour and other high
intensity discharge lamps in accordance with ANSI C 82.4 and ANSI C
82.5. Maximum allowable temperature rise at rated input above an
average ambient temperature of 50 0C shall be 115 0C.
2. Provide ballasts for fluorescent lamps in accordance with ANSI C 82.1

and ANSI C 82.1a. These shall be thermally protected, high power
factor, low loss and of the energy saving type. Provide Electronic
ballasts, if indicated on the Drawings and schedules.
C. DIFFUSERS:
1. Diffusers shall be manufactured from one piece virgin acrylic, clear
acrylic, or polycarbonate plastic having the following requirements:
a. Interior diffusing type with smooth exterior surface.
b. Self-extinguishing type as determined by ASTM D 635.
o
c. No material colour change when used with 4000 K fluorescent
117
lamp.
d. No apparent yellowing after 500 hours exposure to fluorescent
lamp. source under conditions similar to those existing in the
lighting fixture.
e. No altering of the optical properties of the fixture when finished
diffuser treated with anti-static wax.
2. Diffusers shall be formed by a carefully controlled process so that the

finished piece retains its design contours and dimensions without any
change at the normal operating temperature.
3.
Diffusers shall be resistant to shrinking, warping, crazing, cracking, or
discoloring, either in service or when stored in normal conditions in the
manufacturer's standard shipping containers.
D. Provide wiring and cabling for interior lighting fixtures in accordance with
Section 16120.
E. Junction boxes shall be of code gauge galvanized steel and shall comply with
the requirements of NEC and NEMA for shapes and sizes to suite their
respective locations and installations shall be provided with covers to suit
their function and installation. Install an appropriate expansion fitting
wherever the conduit run crosses an expansion joint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires are to be installed
and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
C. Coordinate light fixtures with the type of ceiling finish given in the ceiling
finishes schedule.
D. Examine the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to become
familiar acquaint with the structural features of the building and the location of
pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter the location or spacing of outlets. Submit
to the Engineer for a decision as to the proper location. Be responsible for
the proper reinforcement of any ductwork necessary to carry the added
weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on the bottom of
such ductwork.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, ANSI,
LOCAL STANDARDS and with recognised industry practices to ensure that
lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.
B. Furnish all fixtures complete with lamps. Install permanent lighting fixtures
after completion of all masonry and structural work do not use for lighting
purposes during construction. Provide temporary lighting as herein before
specified.
118
C. Where job conditions require mounting heights different from those specified
or shown to avoid equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in
mounting heights shall be as directed by the Engineer.
D. Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, level and in alignment. Secure in
accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings.
3.03 INTERNAL LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A. Luminaires shall be arranged for surface, recess or pendant mounting as
required by the general structure and decor of the building. Where a
suspended ceiling is provided, fix recess mounted luminaires as specified or
noted on the Drawings.
3.04 SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A. All surface or pendant mounted luminaires shall be fixed to a surface or flush
mounted metal conduit box. Direct surface mounted luminaires shall be
spaced a distance of 12mm from the mounting surface by using extension
rings.
B. Make connections between the permanent wiring and the luminaire using
porcelain or heat resistant connector block housed in the conduit box.

3.05 RECESS MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A. Suspend all recess mounted luminaires independently of the ceiling in which
they are fitted. Where such an arrangement is not possible or practical, the
luminaires shall be fitted in and supported by the ceiling. Ensure that the
suspended ceiling is suitably strengthened to carry the additional weight.
B. Make the connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire using a
heat resistant flexible cable connected to a 2 A, 3 pin "plug-in" type ceiling
rose, conduit box mounted adjacent to the luminaire and accessible on
removal of the luminaire.
C. The flexible cable shall be three core type, one core being used as the circuit
protective and earth bonding conductor. Where the cable forms the
connection to a tungsten lamp luminaire , it shall be rated for operation at 150
3.06 PENDANT MOUNTED INSTALLATION

A. Mount tube pendants from a ball and socket type swivel dome cover plate
fitted to a ceiling mounted metal conduit box and conduit of minimum
diameter 20 mm. The conduit entry to the luminaire shall be fitted with a lock
nut and provide a flexible copper bond from the fixed conduit installation to
the pendant tube.
B. Proprietary type pendant luminaires, whether single or multi-lamp units shall
be bonded and provided with suitable terminations to ensure reliable earth
continuity throughout all exposed metalwork.
C. Plain pendants shall consist of a multi-terminal ceiling rose, a flexible cord of
heat resistant cable and a heat resistant lampholder.
D. Do not suspended luminaires by means of flexible cables with the exception
of certain lightweight domestic and commercial types of luminaires, which
shall be agreed with the Engineer.
119
E. Support suspended luminaires by means of purpose manufactured metal

supports.
F. Provide white break joint rings between the fittings and conduit box to mask
the joints as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of

installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of
construction period.
A. Comply with section 16910.
B. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry
has been energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units
at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
C. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which
are observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractor's use and tested.
D. Test all luminaires functionally to prove that they operate satisfactorily.
E. Check and record actual illumination levels and compare them with the
design requirements as per applicable standards.
3.09 EARTHING
A. Provide equipment earthing connections for all lighting fixtures in accordance
with NEC 250.
B. Use separate earthing wire between fixtures and panelboard. Minimum size
2
to be 2.5 mm .
120
SECTION 16520
EXTERIOR AND STREET LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Exterior and street lighting including area and façade lighting including, but
not limited to, the following:
1 Exterior/Street light fixtures.

2 Distribution Pillars.
3 Lighting Poles/Columns.
4 Lighting Controls.
D. Section 16410 LV Power Distribution Boards.
E. Section 16420 LV Protective Devices.
F. Section 16510 Interior Lighting.
G. Section 16530 Emergency and Exit Lighting.
H. Section 16550 Special Lighting.
I. Section 16640 Earthing System.
J. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI RP 8 American National Standard Practice for Roadway.
B. ANSI C 82 4 Mercury Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply type).
121
C. ANSI C 82.5 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Reference Ballasts.
D. ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.
E. ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc (hot-dip Galvanized) Coatings on Anchor

Bolts.
F. ASTM A 325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated 1201105

KSI Minimum Tensile Strength.
G. ASTM A 385 Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot – Dip).
H. ASTM A 595 Specifications for Steel Tubular Poles Lighting.
I. IES handbook Handbook of Illumination Engineering Society.
J. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 4- Equipment for

General Use.
K. UL 1572 Listed for Wet Locations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, catalogs and technical/photometric data for

exterior and street lighting fixtures to show that the proposed light fixtures are
of the required type, construction and quality.
C. Dimensioned drawings of the light fixtures installations, including but not

necessary limited to, the layout and connections to panelboards, fixture shop
drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each proposed fixture and
accessories assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order.
D. Computer calculations confirming horizontal and vertical illuminance levels

and corresponding uniformity.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the lighting

fixtures of types and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory used in similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference to
be given to local manufacturer’s and suppliers/agents.
122

successful installation and experience on projects with the lighting fixtures
C. The exterior and street lighting fixtures shall be UL listed and comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI, NEMA, ASTM, NEC, IEC.
B. Deliver the exterior and street lighting fixtures, lamps and accessories to job
site wrapped in protective covering and stored in a dry location free from dust
or water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and
handling. The light fixtures, lamps and accessories shall to be handled
carefully to prevent damage. Replace damaged items at no additional cost.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Comply with the Contract Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL

Section 15180.
2.02 EXTERIOR/STREET LIGHT FIXTURES
A. All exterior and street light fixtures including area/façade lights shall be
complete with all necessary accessories such as ballasts lamps, sockets,
reflectors, mounting hardware, etc., to make a workable unit.
B. Exterior and Street light fixtures shall be generally made of extruded or

pressure die-cast and aluminum alloy housing with sheet aluminum corrosion
resistance type and top sealed with fasteners and silicone sealant.
C. Optical system shall be composed of polished aluminium reflectors allowing

field adjustment to the desired light distribution. Reflector shall be adjustable
and retained in position by a spring loaded per device. Lens shall be clear flat
tempered glass or acrylic. The external surface shall be smooth to reduce to
minimum dirt and accumulation and, therefore maintenance.
123
D. All exterior and street light fixtures shall be dust and splash proof, conforming
to the protection classification IP 65 or approved equivalent.
E. Any proposal for lighting fixtures other than specified fixtures shall be
accompanied by complete lighting calculations and photometrics for the
proposed fixtures.
F. Comply with the requirements of Section 16510, for exterior and street
lighting fixtures, as applicable.
G. Ballasts and other components of the control gear of light fixtures shall be
mounted on an inner tray with a cover and retained in the closed position by
two quarter turn fasteners. The entire tray assembly shall be removable for
replacement or maintenance. Some light fixtures may require remote
mounting of the control gear; in this situation a detail showing construction of
remote control gear and distance from the light fixture is shall be submitted
for the approval of Engineer.
H. Ballasts to be of the ratings, types and makes as recommended by the

manufacturers for starting the high intensity discharge lamp which properly
matches lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and
impedances for which lamps are designed.
2.03 LAMPS
A. All lamps shall conform to Section 16510.
2.04 DISTRIBUTION PILLARS
A. Distribution Pillars for exterior and street lighting as shown on the Drawings.
Housing circuit breakers, contactors, fuses, time switches as shown on the
Drawings and shall meet the requirements of the Sections 16410 and 16420.
B. The distribution pillars shall be provided with time switches and shall include
a master ON/OFF key switch with an indicator lamp located immediately
above the switch to indicate the switch is "ON".
C. Carry out any interfacing with the BMS for remote monitoring/control of
exterior and street lighting in accordance with the requirements given in
Section 15180.
2.05 LIGHTING POLES/COLUMNS
A. Lighting poles/columns for exterior and street lighting shall be round, tapered,
manufactured of steel, with smooth exterior surface. The height, bottom and
124
top diameters and other pertinent information regarding lighting

poles/columns shall be as indicated on the Drawings and schedules.
B. Lighting poles/columns shall be supplied with steel plate base flange which
shall include earthing nut, handhole with cover and four galvanized steel
anchor bolts.
C. Lighting poles/columns of 9 to 18 m height shall be supplied with suitable

brackets to accommodate the mounting of the type and number of light
fixtures indicated on the Drawings and schedules.
D. Lighting columns of 20 m height or greater shall be suitable to accommodate

the mounting of a movable head frame. The head frame shall have suitable
slots which can accept floodlights for the mounting of the number of
floodlights indicated on the Drawings. The head frame shall be raised via a
portable lift. The lift shall use a motor device mechanism suitable for use in
column lighting. Power supply shall be from a single or three phase socket
outlet , as required and installed in the base of each tower.
E. Anchor bolts shall be smooth or threaded bars and shall be used of a grade
at least equivalent to the grade use for the shaft and a minimum of 75
mm long. No welding will be carried out on the bolts.
F. The lighting poles/columns shall be able to withstand a wind loading of 130
km/hr blowing at a height of 12 m above ground level on the effective
projected areas of pole, bracket and lighting fixtures. Foundations shall
be in accordance with the structural requirements contained elsewhere
in the specifications.
G. Lighting poles/columns used for exterior and street lighting shall be unpainted
and have a frangible anchor base for pad mounting per AASHTO LTS
2. The poles shall be provided with a wiring compartment at a height
suitable for access and maintenance. Provide fuse, with fuse holder
and an internal grounding lug inside the compartment.
2.06 LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. All exterior and street lighting shall be controlled via time switches and photo
electric cells with the following characteristics:
1. Supply voltage As shown on the Drawings.

2. Control load rating As required on site.
3. Sensitivity Switch on 50 lux, switch off 100 lux.
4. Power consumption Max. 10 watts during daylight conditions.
5. Delay time for daytime
fluctuations 30 seconds.
6. Ambient temp. range -20 C to +60 C.
125
7. Net weight 500 grams (approximately).

8. Mounting 3 pin locking plug to suit cirlock socket.
Gasket to ensure water / dust tight fitting.
9. Housing Weatherproof and resistant to ultra-violet
radiation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The exterior and street lighting luminaires shall be fixed to columns on the
ground prior to erection. After erection of the columns and final cable
connections are completed, each luminaire shall be aimed in accordance with
specialist lighting supplier's instructions.
B.. The lighting poles/columns shall be erected plumb. Column locations shall be
staked prior to installation to assure there is no conflict with other utilities.
Conflicts that arise shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for direction
in relocating column at no extra cost.
C. Foundations for columns shall be based on manufacturer's data and shall be

designed and detailed by the Contractor taking into account their
location, corresponding soil bearing capacities and wind loads. No
construction shall be done, without the approval of the Engineer.
E. Columns shall be erected onto the foundation bolts using a sling to protect
the surface finish and plumb checked.
F. Control gear, located in each column, shall include a cut-out unit with sub-
circuit HRC fuse rated appropriate to the luminaire(s) served and allow the
use of a reduced size cable within the column where appropriate.
G. Install cabling on the headframes of the columns in weather proof trumbling

of XLPE insulated copper cable. All cables shall have numbered ferrules
fixed at each termination position. Other single wire cables shall be PVC
insulated stranded copper of sizes to suit the number of lamps on the circuit
and be installed in liquid-tight flexible or rigid galvanized steel conduits as
appropriate.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Comply with Sections Contract Conditions.
B. Clean dirt and debris from all light fixture upon completion of the installation.
126
C. Protect installed lighting poles/columns and lighting fixtures from damage

during remainder of construction period.
B. Upon completion of installation of floodlights, and after building circuitry has

been energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units
at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
C. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in floodlights which are

observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and tested.
D. Check and record actual illumination levels and compare them with the
design requirements as per applicable standards.
3.04 EARTHING
A. Throughout each installation, all conduit, trunking and metallic sheating of

cables shall be electrically continuous to form a complete bonded system with
the column earthing system.
B. Each column shall be connected to the earthing system by a stranded bare or

PVC insulated copper wire as indicated on the Drawings and required as per
NEC 250 and Section 16640.
127
SECTION 16530
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Emergency and Exit Lighting units provided to facilitate orientation within, and
escape from, buildings, upon failure of the normal lighting system.
B. Dependent on their location within the building, the emergency and exit
lighting units will be powered either from a central battery system, standby
generator set or by individual self-contained batteries.
1.02 RELATION SECTIONS
D. Section 16510 Interior Lighting.
E. Section 16520 Exterior and Street Lighting.
F. Section 16550 Special Lighting.
G. Section 16610 LV Emergency Power Generation System.
H. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C 82.1, 1a Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
B. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter-4 Equipment for

General Use.
C. NFPA 101 Safety to Life From Fire in Buildings and Structures.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
128
B. Submit manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, drawings, technical/photometric

data to show that the proposed light fixtures are of the required type,
construction and quality.
C. Submit dimensional drawings of the light fixtures in booklet form with

separate sheet for each fixture and accessories.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting

fixtures and associated control gear of the types, sizes and ratings required,
than 10 years. Preference shall to be given to local manufacturers and
agents/suppliers.

similar to that required for the Project.
C. All emergency and exit lighting fixtures and associated control gear shall be
UL listed and comply with the requirements of NFPA, NEC, NEMA, ANSI and
LOCAL STANDARDS.
B. Pack equipment for protection during transportation and storage.
C. Store in dry, clean location.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials specified herein to be of high quality and of proven suitability for
the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service.

Section 15180.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
129
A. Self-contained emergency lighting fixtures shall provide at least the minimum

illumination level required as NFPA Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) along
corridors, staircases, etc. leading to exits from the buildings.
B. In the event of main and essential power failures to the areas served by the
emergency lighting, emergency lighting shall switch on automatically and
independently of the on/off mode of the normal light switch.
C. Selected lighting fixtures designated as emergency lighting fittings shall be

complete with battery, charging units and inverter unit as appropriate or
connected to LV emergency power generation system as shown on the
Drawings.
D. On restoration of the normal supply, the fixtures shall return to the normal
operating mode as they were working prior to the power interruption.
2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All emergency and exit lights and associated equipment shall be standard
products supplied by a single manufacturer.
B. The battery shall be a self-contained sealed nickel cadmium pack of minimum

12 V 4 Ah capacity to suit the operation of light fixtures and lamps for 3 hours
continuously without any deration.
C. The charger/inverter module shall be capable of the following characteristics

from a completely discharged condition:
1. Full capacity charge in 24 hours or less.

2. 60% capacity charge in 12 hours or less.
3. 30% capacity charge in 6 hours or less.
D. A LED to indicate “power supply” on shall be provided with each emergency

and exit light fixture.
E. Provide fuses in the unswitched power supply and in the battery supply.
F. The changeover voltage from normal power supply to emergency shall be

between 60% -85% of nominal normal voltage.
G. A 3 position test key located in the electrical risers/rooms shall provide the
following facilities:
1. Normal Operation as described earlier; key removable.
130
2. Test Isolates unswitched normal supply, energising

fluorescent tube from battery supply circuit; key trapped.
3. Isolate Isolates normal switched and unswitched power supply. The
fluorescent will be energised from the battery/inverter; key
trapped.
H. The battery/inverter and all circuit accessories to shall enclosed in a painted

steel box.
I. All emergency lighting units and illuminated exit signs that contain a
fluorescent lamp, must be provided with the instant-on type or electronic type
control gear.
2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS - SELF CONTAINED
A. Unless otherwise specified in the particular specifications, all self contained

emergency light fittings to shall of the non-maintained type. Lamps shall be
instant-on fluorescent type and shall operate in the emergency mode for a
period not less than 3 hours.
B. Each unit shall contain within its enclosure the lamp, emergency batteries,
constant voltage charging units, automatic hangover and an LED to show that
the charging circuit and the DC system are in good order.
C. All units shall have fire resisting diffusers, complying with the relevant
standards and Codes of Practice mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
D. Type of emergency lighting to be used is specified either in this specification

or indicated on the Drawings.
E. Every unit shall be connected to a permanently live supply of the LOCAL

lighting circuit. Install a switch shall be installed in the permanent live supply
so that regular testing can be carried out. These switches shall be situated
within the unit or in the positions indicated on the Drawings.
2.05 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS - MAINTAINED
A. Emergency systems shall be of maintained type, powered by battery/battery

charger.
B. The types of luminaries to be used are as mentioned elsewhere in this

specification.
2.06 ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGNS
131
A. All illuminated exit signs shall be fireproof and provided in accordance with
NFPA Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) requirements.
B. The illuminated exit signs shall be self-contained normal/emergency exit

lighting fixture, equipped with fully automatic solid state charger and sealed
rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery.
C. The housing of exit light fixtures shall be made of cold rolled sheet steel,
baked enamel finish, with 8 W instant-on type fluorescent lamp and Arabic
and English letters. The housing shall be surface or recessed type to suit the
site conditions with colour of the finish as required by the Engineer.
D. Where required for normal exits and emergency fire escape routes, the
illuminated exit signs shall be provided with the sign plates comprising arrow
to show the direction of the exit, as approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will be installed
and correct or any unsatisfactory conditions before installation commences.
Do not proceed with the work until conditions have been corrected to the
C. Examine the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings and become

facilure with the structural features of the building and the location of pipes,
ducts, etc., which would alter the locations or spacing of outlets to the
Engineer for a decision as to the proper location. This Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper reinforcement of any ductwork necessary to carry
the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on the
bottom of such ductwork.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install emergency and exit lighting fixtures in accordance with the

manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA,
NFPA, LOCAL STANDARDS and with recognised industry practices to
ensure that lighting fixtures fulfil requirements.
B. Furnish all fixtures complete with lamps. Emergency lighting fixtures shall be
installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be
used for lighting purposes during construction.
132
C. Where job conditions require mounting heights different from those specified
or shown to avoid equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in
mounting heights shall be as directed by the Engineer.
D. Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall
be secured in accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop
drawings.
B. Clean all lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of the
installation.
C. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction

period.
B. Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting fixtures, and after

building circuitry has been energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate
capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
C. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which

are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and tested.
D. Test all emergency and exit lights functionally to prove that they operate
satisfactorily for the intended purpose.
E. Check and record actual illumination levels and compare them with the
design requirements, as per applicable standards.
3.05 EARTHING
A. Provide equipment earthing connections for all emergency and exit lights.
B. A separate earthing wire shall be used between any fixture and panelboard of
minimum size 2.5 mm2.
133
SECTION 16550
SPECIAL LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Special Lighting fixtures including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Swimming Pool/Fountain lights.
D. Section 16120 LV Cables and Wires.
E. Section 16510 Interior Lighting.
F. Section 16520 Exterior and Street Lighting.
G. Section 16530 Emergency and Exit Lighting.
H. Section 16190 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 5- Special

Occupancies.
B. ANSI C 82.1, 1a Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
C. ANSI C82.4 Mercury Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type).
D. ANSI C 82.5 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Reference Ballasts.
E. UL 1572 Listed for Wet Locations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
134
B. Submit manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, catalogs and technical/photometric

data for special light fixtures to show that the proposed fixtures are of the
required type, construction and quality.
C. Submit dimensioned shop drawings for the installation of all types of special
lights, including but not necessary limited to, layout and connections to
panelboards. Submit fixtures shop drawings in booklet form with separate
sheet for each proposed fixture, assembled in luminaires “type” alphabetical
order.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting

fixtures of types and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference to

successful installation and experience on projects with installations similar to
that required for this project.
C. All special lighting fixtures and associated components to be UL listed,

complying with NEC, NEMA, ANSI, LOCAL STANDARDS.
A. comply with Contract Conditions.
B. Special lights, lamps and accessories shall be delivered to the job site
wrapped in protective covering and stored in a dry location free from dust or
water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and
handling. Handle special lights, lamps and accessories carefully to prevent
damage. Replace damaged items be replaced at no additional cost.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in
services.

Section 15180.
135
2.02 SWIMMING POOL/FOUNTAIN LIGHTS
A. The swimming pool/fountain lights and associated isolation transformers shall

be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements.
B. The swimming pool/fountain lights shall comprise stainless steel or bronze

under water luminaires. The luminaire shall have a high purity anodised
aluminium reflector. Clear lenses shall be fitted to the luminaire as required to
give a good lighting distribution. The lamp shall be PAR type lamp at 12 V.
C. The light fixtures shall be suitable for submerge situation under water and
protected to classification 68 or equivalent.
D. The isolation transformer for swimming pool/fountain lights shall be double

wired capable of step down from input voltage 220 to 12 V output at 50 Hz.
Transformer shall be totally enclosed in a sheet steel enclosure with
protection classification IP 41 for interior use and IP 55 for exterior use.
Transformers shall be suitable for floor mounting at a depth of 1 m below the
water surface or at locations shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Examine the areas and conditions in which the special lights will be installed
and correct or bring to the attention of the Engineer any unsatisfactory
conditions before installation commences. Do not commence work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the
Enginer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install special lighting fixtures in accordance with fixture manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, ANSI, LOCAL
STANDARDS and recognised industry practices.
B. All wiring and/or cabling within swimming pool or fountains shall be in rigid
PVC conduit fully recessed. No exposed cables or conduits will be permitted.
Conduits and accessories shall be sealed and made fully watertight.
C. Connection to junction boxes in the swimming pool or fountains shall be

sealed against the ingress of water with a waterproof sealing compound
applied to all threads. All junction boxes located inside the water feature shall
be below water level. They shall be manufactured with threaded conduit
entries or comparison gland end seals for cable entry. All junction boxes and
136
check boxes shall be filled with epoxy resin compound or approved

equivalent prior to filling the pool lights and after circuits have been checked.
B. Upon completion of installation of special lights, apply electrical energy to

demonstrate capability and compliance with safety and waterproof
requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest
to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units,
and proceed with retesting.
3.04 EARTHING
A. Earth all electrical system to maintain a continuous positive electrical earth

throughout the entire system.
137
SECTION 16610
LV EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Diesel electric LV Emergency Power Generation System including, but not

limited to, fuel storage tanks, lubrication system, control panels and all
associated devices and equipment.
A. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C. Section 15484 Fuel Oil Storage and Piping System.
D. Section 15513 Noise Control.
E. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements.
F. Section 16030 Electrical Identification.
G. Section 16120 LV Cables and Wires.
H. Section 16140 Electrical Raceways.
I. Section 16410 LV Power Distribution Boards.
J. Section 16620 Enclosed Transfer Switches.
K. Section 16640 Earthing System.
L. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
B. NFPA 37 Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines.
C. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), 445 – Generators Chapter 7-

Special Conditions.
138
D. NFPA 101 Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
E. NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and
interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various
loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams
including schematic and interconnection diagrams.
C. Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings interconnection

points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel,
battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators,
fuel tank, sound attenuation, sand filter, radiator, and remote annunciator.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions inside container.
E. Submit controls systems for auto synchronization of generator sets where

specified or shown on the Drawings.
F. Submit operation and maintenance data, include instructions for normal

operation, routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and
fuel tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency
maintenance procedures.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the generator sets

and associated equipment of types, sizes and ratings required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10
years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturer’s and
agents/suppliers.

C. Generator sets and associated equipment shall be UL listed and comply with
the requirements of LOCAL STANDARDS, ASTM, NFPA, NEMA, IEC and
NEC.
139
B. Accept engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify
damage.
C. Protect equipment form dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy

plastic.
1.07 WARRANTY
1.08 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Furnish the spare parts normally provided with engine generator set for a
period of two years as recommended by the manufacturer, plus the following:
1. One set of spark plugs, ignition points and condenser as applicable.

2. Two filters for all services (fuel, oil and air).
3. Two spare injectors or equivalent.
4. One fuel injection pump complete.
5. Three fuses for each rating.
B. Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels

clearly designating the contents and the piece of equipment for which they
are intended.
C. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine
generator set. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Supply of LV emergency power generation system with ancillary equipment

including fuel day tanks, fuel transfer equipment, interconnecting cabling and
pipe work necessary for the proper functioning of the installation, both
mechanically and electrically.
B. LV Emergency power diesel generator sets shall be skid mounted and

located in an acoustically treated space to reduce noise level and annoyance
to residents within the locations.
140
C. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements given in

Section 15180.
D. LV Emergency power diesel generator sets shall incorporate the following

basic design criteria:
Output power rating The generator shall have Prime power

rating of standard module size for
continuous duty after taking into account all
relevant derating factors and power
consumed in auxiliaries.
Nominal Output Voltage As shown on the Drawings.
Frequency 60 Hz.
Speed 1500 r.p.m.
Automatic Voltage Regulation ± 1.5% (from no-load to 100% load

and from 0.8 p.f. lagging to unity p.f.).
Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 4% at full load.

AC Waveform
Overload Capability 10% for 1 hour in 12 hours (Noise control

level of adjacent areas to be met).
Noise Criteria 80 dbA at 7.5 m in any direction.
Maximum Starting Time 10 seconds.
In addition, full account shall be taken of the nature of the loads particularly
motor loads such as air conditioning, fans, pumps, etc. that are likely to be
connected to the generator.
2.02 RATING
A. Sets shall be continuously rated taking into consideration the site climatic
conditions (altitude, temperature, etc.) as given in Section 16010. The rating
of the generator sets as referred to on the drawings and schedules is
minimum and subject to the submittal and approval of the final load
calculations considering the approved electrical and mechanical equipment
fed from the emergency supply to justify the rating of the generator. 20%
spare capacity shall be allowed for future expansion.
141
2.03 MECHANICAL DETAILS
A. Lifting eyes are required on all items of equipment over 25 kg in weight which
may need removal.
B. No critical speed of the complete shaft assembly shall be within 15% of rated
speed. All moving live parts are to be adequately guarded to prevent injury to
personnel.
2.04 ALTERNATOR
A. The alternator shall be UL listed and as per NEMA and ANSI requirements
with Class `F' insulation, screen protected, drip proof, rotating field, brushless
type, driven through a solid half coupling and bolted direct to the engine
flywheel or driving motor as applicable.
B. The AC exciter and rotating rectifier unit shall be overhung on the non-driven
end of the alternator.
C. The alternator shall be capable of giving a continuous output at 0.80 pf

lagging at the system rated voltage specified earlier.
D. Steady state voltage shall be maintained to ± 2.5% under any condition from
cold start to maximum working temperature, from zero load to 10% overload,
and from unity p.f. to 0.8 p.f. lagging.
E. After a load change from 0 to 35% rated load the voltage shall not change by
more than ± 15% and shall recover to 94% of rated value within 15 seconds.
F. Harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5%.
G. Windings shall be connected in "star". The ends of the windings and neutral
shall be brought out to a suitable terminal box.
H. The machine shall be of the two bearing type, generously rated, grease
lubricated and efficiently sealed.
I. The automatic voltage regulator shall be provided with an adjustment for

setting the level of the controlled voltage to within ± 5% of the normal voltage
and shall be capable of maintaining its adjustment for long periods without
attention once the set is running.
J. The alternator shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit current of 300%

F.L.C. for 3 seconds.
142
K. The alternator shall be capable of carrying a 50 % overload current, with the

field set for normal excitation for one minute, and a 10 % over load for one
hour at rated power factor without being subject to any damage.
L. The alternator shall have a main circuit breaker with all required accessories,
furnished as an integral part of the unit and installed as close as possible to
the main terminals of the alternator.
2.05 ENGINE
A. Engine may be naturally aspirated or turbo charged but must be capable of

accepting full load within the required time limitation of 15 seconds.
B. The operating speed shall not exceed 1500 r.p.m.
C. Governing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,

except that speed drop shall be limited to ± 2%.
D. Manual adjustment shall be provided for ± 5% rated speed.
E. Steady load speed band shall not exceed 1% of rated speed.
F. Engine shall be 4 stroke, direct injection, radiator cooled and with forced
lubrication from wet sump with automatic oil make-up system. Full flow oil
filters shall be supplied with differential pressure alarm and gauge.
G. Sufficient reserve shall be allowed in the lubrication system to allow 36 hours

running without replenishment. Oil cooling shall be by heat exchanger.
Simple oil drainage facilities shall be provided.
H. Thermostatically controlled jacket water heaters shall be provided. The

nominal temperature setting shall be 45 oC but the control should be
adjustable between 30 oC and 50 oC. Vee type engines shall be provided with
a heater in each bank to ensure uniform heating.
Valve seats shall be replaceable.
I. Five micron dual fuel filters shall be supplied in the fuel line complete with on
line changeover facilities. Induction shall be via heavy duty oil bath air filters
or suitably rated disposable paper element type.
J. A fail-safe mechanical overspeed trip facility shall be provided, set at 115%
rated speed.
Suitable means shall be provided for turning the crankshaft and the
associated generator by hand.
K. The following dial or digital type engine instruments shall be provided:-
143
1. Engine speed indicating tachometer, reading rev/min.

2. Lubricating oil pressure, reading kPa.
3. Cooling water temperature, reading oC.
4. Service hours counter.
5. Fuel pressure, reading kPa.
These instruments shall be mounted on a suitable panel fixed to the engine.
2.06 FLYWHEEL
The flywheel shall be dynamically balanced and shall be capable of being

rotated at 125% and 95% of rated speed during normal running.
2.07 GOVERNOR
A. The engine shall incorporate an adjustable isochronous electronic or

hydraulic governor.
B. The governor shall be controlled manually at the engine control panel, from
the associated generator switchgear equipment by the governor control
switch or automatically.
C. The governor shall provide adjustable speed settings from 48 to 52 Hz,

adjustable speed regulation from 0 to 5% , adjustable load limit from 0 to
125% of unit rating.
D. The governor shall permit parallel operation of any and all other generating
units furnished under this contract and with an infinite bus.
E. The governor shall be cable of maintaining the frequency constant within +

0.25% for any constant load between 25% and 100% generator rating. After
any sudden load change of not more than 25 % of rated load, the governor
shall re-establish stable operating conditions in not less than 4 seconds.
Surging period shall not exceed 3.6 Hz.
2.08 EXCITER
A. The exciter shall be a brushless type using a rotating, fused rectifier bridge
circuit. The three phase, full wave, rectifying unit shall be mounted on the
generator motor shaft. The exciter shall be capable of supplying the field
excitation current requirements for the generator and delivering 150 % of its
rated current for one minute without being subject to damage. The complete
exciter shall be enclosed and protected by a removable cover.
B. A diode failure detector shall form part of the exciter circuit.

144
2.09 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) shall be of completely solid state

design.
B. A maximum voltage drop of 3 % of rated voltage will be allowed for 0 to 110

% of rated load, but shall be a minimum consistent with the requirements for
satisfactory parallel operation. The voltage at any constant load from 0 to
100 % load shall be within a band of 1 % of rated voltage.
C. Transient voltage dip after a sudden 25 % load stop-change increase and

transient voltage rise after a sudden 25 % load decrease shall not exceed 5
% of nominal voltage. For this requirement, the initial load shall be taken to
be within the range of 50 to 85 % of actual operating capacity under
conditions of any generating set or any combination of generating sets,
applicable, operating on the bus.
D. The voltage shall recover to within 1 % steady-state band specified above,

within 1/2 second after initiation of the load changes specified above.
E. The AVR shall be equipped with cross-current compensation and an

adjustable droop range from 0 to 5 % for parallel operation.
F. The exciter shall be complete with all components necessary to provide the
excitation, and shall be designed without the use of electronic tubes or
electrolytic capacitors.
G. The exciter shall utilize a multiphase, amplifier controlled silicon rectifier and
a three phase exciter power transformer for receiving the power from the
generator output.
H. Provision shall be made for relay-operated pilot excitation or field flashing

that receives its power from the storage battery, or from permanent magnets.
I. Special provision shall be made to ensure that the silicon rectifiers are not
subject to peak inverse voltages in excess of their rating under any condition
of system operations, including transient conditions.
J. The system shall be designed to sustain 300 % of rated current for 3 seconds
when a symmetrical short circuit is applied at the generator terminals.
K. The AVR shall have a + 10 % voltage adjustment range capable of being

controlled automatically or by remotely mounted adjusting devices.
145
L. The AVR shall be equipped with a variable control for setting the degree of
stability of reactive current during parallel operation. The maximum
difference in reactive kVA of one generating unit and that of the average of
the units shall not exceed 5 % of the continuous kVA rating of any one unit.
The requirements shall apply under any load condition from 20 to 125 % of
combined rating at rated frequency and at any power factor between 0.8
lagging and unity.
M. The AVR shall be equipped with a switch selectable (or link) rheostat for field
current limiting with an adjustable setting. A time delay shall be included in
the circuit so that there is no interference with normal field forcing.
N. To prevent over fluxing of the machine at low speeds, a frequency fall of

circuit shall be included in the AVR to progressively reduce the generator
when the frequency falls below 90 % of the nominal. This facility shall be
selected by a link on the AVR.
O. An electronic manual voltage regulator with potentiometer control on the main

control panel, shall be provided. A manual/automatic selector switch shall be
provided on the main control panel.
2.10 STARTING SYSTEM
A. Electric starting shall be provided to all machines and shall comprise 24 V

equipment including starter motor, alternator and rectifier, lead acid batteries
of ample capacity and mains powered constant voltage charging equipment
and all connecting wiring.
B. Batteries are to be mounted on each set and capable of withstanding five 20

second starts in succession in any four hour period, without any derating.
C. A battery charging panel for each starter battery shall be provided and shall
be capable of recharging the battery from discharged state in 6 hours and
maintaining it in a charged state when the set is standing idle. The battery of
each generator set shall be charged only from the alternator/rectifier of the
same generator set, when that particular set is running.
D. The batteries shall be used to supply auxiliary relays as required whose

operation must not be affected whilst supplying starting current. Auxiliary
circuits are to be protected by fuses.
2.11 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. The exhaust system shall be manufactured in heavy quality steel tubing fitted
with suitable robust gas-tight flexible sections close to the engine to allow
engine movement and to reduce the transmission of engine vibrations to the
146
remainder of the exhaust system and the surroundings. Bends shall have a
minimum radius of three times the diameter of the tube. As far as possible,
flexible sections shall be vertical, free from bends and have sufficient length
or slack to allow free movement without damage.
B. Silencers shall be of the heavy duty baffle and absorption, residential type, so
designed and installed as to reduce noise to the minimum level as per the
requirements given in Section 15513, without appreciably impairing the
working efficiency of the engine.
C. Vibration isolating equipment shall be provided with each silencer for use
where they are mounted on structural steelwork in accordance with the
D. The silencers and exhaust pipework shall be properly and adequately

supported clear of fuel and feed pipes and shall be provided with suitable
insulation to protect personnel, plant and buildings from excessive heat.
Design of exhaust system shall be suitable for site conditions and routing,
where shown on layout.
E. The pipework shall drain away from the exhaust manifold and drain pipes
shall be fitted in the low points of the system to avoid accumulation of
condensate.
F. The system shall be so constructed as to enable it to be readily dismantled

for maintenance. Provision shall be made to prevent rain water entering the
exhaust pipe at its outlet to the atmosphere.
G. All exhaust connections shall be made as per ASTM standards.
H. All necessary brackets, supports, insulation and protection shall be provided,

together with all fixing bolts. Bolts, washers and nuts shall be greased with
graphite grease or other suitable heat resisting lubricant during assembly.
I. The finish of all exhaust silencers exposed to the open air shall be sprayed
metallic aluminium by special process complying with the recognised industry
practices.
2.12 COOLING SYSTEM
A. Engine cooling shall be by a water jacket, with water circulating pump and
heavy duty tropical radiator with an electric driven pusher fan.
B. The radiator shall be fitted with drawing legs.
C. The fan shall be rated for the climatic conditions given in Section 15010.
147
D. The cooling equipment complete with feed and expansion tank and pumps as
necessary.
E. Where necessary to limit the oil temperature, a water cooled lubricating oil
temperature stabiliser, shall be incorporated in the engine cooling system.
Sufficient corrosion inhibitor shall be added to the cooling water to protect the
cooling system from internal corrosion. Thermostatic control shall be
incorporated.
2.13 FUEL SYSTEM
A. The fuel system shall comply with NFPA 30 and 37.
B. The engine shall be operated on DF 2 fuel.
C. The fuel system shall be complete and shall consist of an external fuel
storage tank suitable for 72 hours continuous operation at 100% load, a dual
filtering system, an engine day tank suitable for 8 hours continuous operation
at 100% full load, two electrically driven fuel transfer pumps and one hand
pump for emergency situations.
D. The fuel oil storage tank shall be a standard size tank with piping systems
and associated accessories as specified in section 15484.
E. One full flow strainer and one duplex filter shall be provided between the day
tank and the engine. The strainer shall be of the metal edge or screen type
with a maximum spacing of 0.18 mm (80 mesh). The filter case shall be
compatible with the filter element. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in
accessible locations without disconnecting the piping or other engine
equipment when changing the strainer and filter element. Indicating pressure
gauges shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across the strainer
and filter.
F. The engine fuel pump shall be a positive displacement, engine-driven type,
and shall be capable of supplying an adequate quantity of fuel under all
conditions of operation. A relief valve shall be provided to prevent the build-
up of excessive pressure if the discharge line becomes blocked.
G. Provide rigid fuel pipework and fittings in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations. Flexible connections shall be provided at the interface
between the engine and the fixed pipework.
H. Provide high and low level switches both in the bulk fuel storage tank and day
tank with overflow acoustic alarm.
148
I. Provide an electrically operated valve on the engine mounted day tank to

dump the fuel oil and shut-down the engine when a signal is received from an
external fire alarm panel.
J. Provide control logic to shut-down fuel transfer pump when a signal is

received from an external fire alarm panel. This control circuit shall be
independent from the day tank drain valve control circuit.
2.14 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A. The engine lubricating system shall conform to NFPA 30 and NFPA 37 and
operate under a predetermined and constant pressure.
B. The primary lubricating oil pump shall be an engine driven, positive

displacement pump.
C. An electric DC motor driven prestart lubricating oil pump shall be installed as

an integral part of the genset. The control logic shall be designed to stop the
electric lubricating oil pumps when the genset attains sufficient speed to
maintain adequate oil pressure through the engine driven mechanical pump.
D. A sump pump, relief valves and by-pass valves shall be installed if required
for proper operation.
E. One tube type oil cooler arranged for utilizing engine cooling water as the
cooling medium shall be furnished for each engine. The cooler may be
separately mounted or mounted on the engine. The capacity and
construction shall be as recommended by the Engine Manufacturer.
F. One full flow strainer and one full flow strainer and duplex filter shall be
provided in the lube oil line on the discharge side of the lube oil pumps. The
strainer shall be of the metal edge or screen type with a maximum spacing of
0.007 inch (80 mesh). The filter shall be of the multiple cleaning and
replaceable element type and the filter case shall be compatible with the filter
element. A pressure relief valve shall be provided to relieve if it becomes
clogged. An alarm condition shall be annunciated when the relief valve is in
the open position. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in accessible
locations without disconnecting the piping or other engine equipment when
changing the strainer and filter element. Indicating pressure gauges shall be
provided to measure the pressure drop across the strainer and filter.
2.15 SAFETY SYSTEM

A. The generator set shall be equipped with automatic safety devices which shut
down the generator set and open the generator circuit breaker in the event of
low lubricating oil pressure, high coolant temperature, engine overspeed,
high lubricating oil temperature, over load and as specified elsewhere. The
149
stop switch on the engine instrument board may be connected in the circuit if
so recommended by the manufacturer.
B. The safety system shall be equipped with visual and audible devices that
become operational before engine shutdown.
C. Lube oil pressure and cooling water temperature and pre-alarms to be inter-
connected to the Building Management System.
D. Simultaneous activation of the audible signal, activation of the visual signal,

stopping the engine, and opening the generator field and main circuit
breakers shall be accomplished.
E. For startup of the engine-generator set, time-delay devices shall be installed

bypassing the low lubricating oil pressure alarm during cranking, and the
coolant-fluid outlet temperature alarm. The lube-oil time-delay device shall
return its alarm to normal status after the engine starts. The coolant time-
delay device shall return its alarm to normal status 5 minutes after the engine
starts.
2.16 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND ALARMS
A. An engine instrument panel shall be provided that displays gauges and

indicators for proper engine control, surveillance and maintenance. The
panel shall be mounted on a bracket welded to the skid. All connections to
the engine shall be flexible types providing anti-vibration isolation. All
instruments and gauges to be analogue and in metric units, where applicable.
B. The engine instrument and alarm panel shall contain all the switches,
indications, meters, push buttons, displays, etc. for the proper monitoring and
control of the operations of emergency power generation system described in
this section. As a minimum the following items shall be provided:
1. Coolant-fluid inlet temperature display.

2. Lubricating-oil pressure indicator.
3. Lubricating-oil inlet temperatures display.
4. Red emergency stop (push-button or switch)
5. Run-time meter.
6. Fuel meter display.
7. Fuel-header-pressure display.
8. Tachometer display.
9. Engine start-stop switch.
10. Start-attempt light indicator.
150
11. Lubricating-oil prelubricating pump start-stop switch.

12. Pyrometer display with selector switch.
13. Alarms.
C. All alarms and instrumentation shall be provided and arranged to stop the
engine automatically. In the event of an emergency the operation of this
safeguard shall at the same time give individual warning of the failure by
illumination of an appropriate visual indicator and the sound of a distinctive
audible alarm. A self-resetting audible alarm muting switch shall be provided.
These safeguards shall operate when any of the following conditions occur
irrespective of whether the set is on automatic or manual control:
1. Engine over-speed.
2. High cooling water temperature.
3. Low cooling water level.
4. Low lubricating oil pressure.
5. High lubricating oil temperature.
6. Low fuel level (to operate at 10% capacity of fuel tank).
7. Control circuit fault.
8. Fail-to-Start.
9. Generator failure (Set running).
D. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in

Section 15180.
2.17 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
A. The control panel shall be floor mounted, totally enclosed, metal clad cubicle
type and shall contain the following equipment together with any other items
which are required to ensure a complete and safe installation. The control
panel shall comply with the requirements given in Section 16410.
B. The generator control panel shall provide controls, gauges, meters, etc. to
include but not limited to the following:
1. Main circuit breaker (MCCB).

2. Four position selector switch with Off-Auto-Man-Test.
3. A hand operated switch to raise or lower the speed of the engine
together with a hand operated voltage trimming rheostat.
4. All engine controls, relays, indicator lamps, fuses, wiring etc.
151
5. Voltmeter with seven position selector switch.

6. Three Ammeters.
7. Kilowatt-hour meter.
8. Power factor meter.
9. Frequency meter, dial type with a range of 90 to 110 % of rated
frequency.
The instruments shall be 100 mm square, flush mounted, 90 oC scale moving

iron type with chromium plated bezel. The kilowatt-hour meter shall be of the
digital read-out type, flush mounted. The instruments mentioned above are
additional to the instruments specified elsewhere in this specification.
C. Indications
1. Flush type coloured indicators illuminated by low voltage lamps for the
following:-
Green lamps: Main supply available.
Red lamps: All alarm conditions listed above in clause 2.16 (C).
2. The indicators shall be clearly labelled as to their duty. The "mains
supply available" indicator shall be operated from the mains supply.
D. An audible device with reset shall also be provided.
E. Suitable robust protected type spring return push-buttons on the front of the
control panel for the following duties:-
1. Start engine (for testing, servicing etc. with control selector switch in
‘Manual’ position).
2. Stop engine.
F. Test buttons for verifying the operation of the alarm conditions listed above in
clause "2.16(C)".
G. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in

Section 15180. Additionally provide clean contacts for remote indications, to
any other location, of the following conditions:-
1. Mains supply normal.

2. Mains failure, standby running.
3. Generator set under manual control.
4. Fault in control circuit.
5. Low fuel level.
152
6. Low oil pressure .

7. High water temperature.
8. Fail to start.
H. Provision for connection to a dummy load by means of lugs with butterfly nuts
for commissioning purpose.
I. The generator control panel shall include all necessary controls and
instructions required for auto-synchronization of two or more generator sets
when specified or shown on the Drawings.
2.18 CONTROL OPERATION
A. The manufacturer shall provide the following switch selectable operational

modes on the diesel electric generator control system.
1. Manual Control (Manual start and stop).

2. Semi-Automatic Control (Auto-start manual return).
3. Full-Auto control (Auto-start with auto stop when commercial supply
returns).

Section 15180.
C. In the automatic mode, main failure shall cause a changeover relay to de-
energise. This relay shall have an adjustable 0-10 seconds delay before
contacts re-set when it is de-energised so that if power is restored within that
period no changeover shall take place. If the power is not restored, the
changeover relay contacts shall re-set and operate as follows :-
1. The mains contactor control circuit shall be opened. This contactor will
already have opened owing to loss of supply.
2. The engine run relay shall be energised and the standby set run up.
3. The standby contactor control circuit shall be prepared and complete
when the generator voltage and frequency monitors show that the set
is up to speed, and the contactor shall close. The generator is required
to take over full load within 10 seconds of start up.
4. When mains power is again available it shall be detected by a reset
timer with an adjustable time delay of 0-30 minutes before operation
when energised. When the timer operates it shall energise the
changeover relay. Energizing the changeover relay shall:
153
a. Open the standby contactor control circuit, dropping out the

contactor.
b. Close the mains contactor control circuit so that the contactor
closes.
c. De-energise the engine run relay.
The relay shall have a time delay adjustable up to 15 minutes before

the contacts re-set to allow the engine to continue to run on no load
before shutting down.
D. Coordinate with the requirements of enclosed transfer switches given in

Section 16620 and provide controls accordingly.
E. All necessary controls shall be provided for auto-synchronization of two or

more generator sets when specified or shown on the drawings. The controls
shall be in accordance with the latest applicable standards and industry
practices and shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval.
2.19 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL ITEMS
A. Wiring:
1. All cabling and small wiring shall be securely cleated in systematic

runs; small wiring shall be multi-strand copper not smaller than 1.0
sq.mm flexible cord.
2. Power and small wiring cables interconnecting major components shall

be heat and oil resisting.
3. All cabling and small wiring shall be coded and terminated with lugs or
letters of the terminals to which they are connected. Terminals shall be
numbered or lettered, easily accessible and fitted with individual
insulating barriers or adequately spaced.
4. Barriers shall be fitted to separate control terminals from power wiring

terminals.
B. Earthing:
1. All metalwork housing electrical equipment shall be provided with

earthing terminals for bonding to the building earthing system. The
genset earthing shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of NEC reference 250 and Section 16640.
C. Contactors:
154
1. Contactors shall have magnetic circuits designed for AC or DC

operation and shall be suitably rated. Four pole contactors shall be
fitted for three phase equipment and two pole contactors for single
phase equipment. Main and auxiliary contacts shall be silver faced.
D. Relays:
1. Switching and control devices shall be solid state where possible.

Electro-mechanical relays shall be of robust and rugged construction
with rolling or wiping contacts. They shall be mounted on individual
sub-bases and wired so that easy access is obtained to soldered
connections. Unsealed relays shall be enclosed in individual or
common dust protecting cases.
2. Time delays, if of the pneumatic type, shall operate on filtered air. The
thermal type of time delay relay will not be accepted.
E. Fuses:
1. A spare fuse cartridge for each pole shall be mounted inside each
equipment.
F. Rectifiers and Capacitors:
1. Rectifiers and capacitors shall be suitable for any transient voltages

likely to be encountered during the operation of the equipment and for
the internal operating temperature of the enclosures at the specified
maximum external ambient temperature.
G. Winding Heaters:
1. Suitably rated heaters for operation on the appropriate voltage shall be

provided for every alternator, motor and electrical panel. A separate
terminal block shall be provided for the heater supply in each relevant
panel.
H. Trunking and Accessories:
1. Trunking runs and connections between trunking and boxes shall be

flanged, spigotted and/or provided with coupling pieces with earth
bonding continuity straps. Trunking and accessories shall be in
155
I. All accessories and fittings shall be manufacturer’s proprietary items as far as

practical with site fabrication maintained to a minimum. Any site fabrication
shall be approved by the Engineer.
2.20 LABELING AND SAFETY
A. Each major component of the unit shall have the manufacturer’s name,
address, style, type or catalog number on a place securely attached to the
component of the units.
B. The function or duty of each meter, instrument, indicator, switch, or push

buttons or other device for external control, shall be clearly defined with
labels in accordance with Sections 16010 and 16030.
C. An instruction notice and first air chart for the proper and safe working of the
plant shall be fixed in a position close to where the operation is carried out, in
D. The engine/generator set shall have a notice fixed in a conspicuous position,

with titles at least 25 mm high and remainder 12 mm high, both in Arabic and
English and in red color, stating:-
DANGER - KEEP CLEAR
THIS SET IS REMOTELY/AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED

AND MAY START AT ANY TIME. WRITTEN AUTHORITY
MUST BE OBTAINED AND APPROPRIATE SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS TAKEN BEFORE ANY WORK IS
UNDERTAKEN ON THE SET OR ASSOCIATED CONTROL
EQUIPMENT.
E. Exposed parts that are subject to high operating temperatures or are

energised electrically and moving parts which are of such nature or so
located as to be a hazard to operating personnel, shall be insulated, fully
enclosed, or guarded. Guarding shall be arranged in a manner that will not
impair the proper function of these parts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field dimensions are as
shown on drawings.
C. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use.
156
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and the

requirements of NEC, NEMA, LOCAL STANDARDS standards and
recognized industry practices.

B. Provide full load test utilizing portable test bank on site, when required, for
four hours minimum. During test, record the following at 30 minutes intervals:
1. Kilowatts.
2. Amperes.
3. Voltage.
4. Coolant temperature.
5. Inside container or room temperature.
6. Frequency.
7. Oil pressure.
C. Test alarm and shut down circuits by simulating conditions.
D. Test system in case of automatic mode as described in this specification.
E. Demonstrate adequacy of engine-generator unit to operate as specified in all

aspects. Any failure to demonstrate adequacy in any respect shall be
corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.04 TRAINING
B. Provide instruction and training to the Owner’s staff for the operation and
maintenance of the equipment. Provide a minimum of 18 hours training to be
divided between classroom and hands-on training as required by the Owner.
3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME

157
SECTION 16630
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. UPS cubicles/modules.
2. Static by-pass transfer switch.
3. Battery.
4. Accessories.
A. Section 15130 Noise Control.
C. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements.
D Section 16030 Electrical Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. IEC 146 Semiconductor Converters (UPS).
B. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
158
B. Submit Manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, drawings, technical data covering

the equipment required.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of UPS, batteries, battery

racks, etc., which show accurately scaled equipment layouts, wire/cable
routing and connections between UPS and batteries, single line diagram
indicating metering, control; heat rejection and air flow requirements.
D. Submit product data for major component, such as batteries. Include

catalogue sheets and technical data sheets with physical data and electrical
performance.
E. Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified,
not later than the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a
complete list of parts and supplies with source of supply and an itemized
price breakdown of spare parts. Recommended spare parts selected shall be
those which, in the manufacturer's judgement, will be involved in the majority
of maintenance difficulties encountered.
F. Manufacturer's detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and

materials, manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, battery sizing
calculations, installation instructions, single-line diagrams, ladder-type
schematic diagrams, elevations, layout drawings, and details required to
demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly
as a unit.
G. Factory and field test reports in booklet form tabulating factory and field tests
and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed
system. Factory and field test reports shall be signed by an official
authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer of the UPS system that the
system meets specified requirements.
H. Six complete copies of operation and maintenance manuals outlining the

step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation and
shutdown. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name,
equipment model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of
equipment and its basic operational features. Six complete copies of
maintenance manuals listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Corrective
maintenance procedures shall identify the most probable failures and the
appropriate repairs. Test measurement levels shall be referenced to specific
test points on the installed equipment. Operation and maintenance manuals
may be either combined or separate.
159
I. Lesson plans and training manuals for the training phases, including type of
training to be provided and proposed dates, with a list of reference materials.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of UPS equipment,

than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturers and
suppliers/agents.

successful installation experience on projects with UPS equipment installation
similar to that required for project.
C. UPS equipment shall be UL listed and comply with the requirements of NEC,
NEMA, ANSI, LOCAL STANDARDS and IEC.
B. Pack all equipments for protection during transportation.
C. Store in a dry, clean location.
D. Do not install equipment until it can be protected from damage during

construction.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The UPS and battery system shall be capable of withstanding the harsh
environmental and ambient conditions as described in Section 16010 without
mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics.

Section 15180.
160
C. Sound pressure levels produced by the UPS, when operating under full rated
load, at a distance of 1.5 m in any direction from the perimeter of the unit,
shall not exceed 65 dB as measured on the A scale of a standard sound level
meter at slow response. Acoustical treatment of the UPS room, when
required, shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements given in
Section 15130.
A. A non-redundant type, static UPS system with reverse transfer designed for
capacity expansion by addition of parallel modules in the field with minimal
downtime.
B. As a minimum, the following components shall be provided:
1. Battery.
2. Rectifier/charger with capacity sufficient to supply full load to inverter
while recharging fully discharged battery to 95% of full capacity in four
hours or less; and within the input current limits specified.
3. Inverter to provide power to load during normal operation.
4. Static switch to transfer the critical load to the by-pass AC input source
without interruption. The load shall be gradually transferred back to
the inverter output, either manually or automatically, without
interruption, once the inverter has been synchronized to the by-pass
source.
5. Manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance to isolate the
rectifier/charger, inverter and static switch while continuing to supply
power to the load via the by-pass AC input source. Transfer to the
manual switch shall be without interruption to the load.
2.03 EQUIPMENT RATINGS/CHARACTERISTICS
A. UPS Power Rating:
1. The continuous power rating of the UPS shall be, in no case less than
that indicated on the Drawings. It shall meet all the criteria specified
herein to fulfill the power demand of the loads fed by UPS as shown on
the Drawings.
2. The continuous power rating shall be over entire battery voltage range
at specified power factor. It shall maintain output voltage within
specified limits at any load from full load to no-load.
B. Battery Capacity:
161
1. Battery shall be capable of operating at full load for 15 minutes without

any voltage drop.
2. Discharge time to end voltage: 20 minutes, at 25 C. Battery shall be
capable of delivering 125% of full rated UPS load at initial start-up.
C. Input Voltage:
1. Rating: 380/220 V, 3 phase as shown on the Drawings.

2. Operating Range: Plus 10% or Minus 15%.
D. Input Frequency:
1. Rating: 60 Hz.
2. Operating Range: + 3 Hz.
E. Input Current:
1. Maximum Limit: Adjustable to maximum of 125% of that required to

operate at full load with battery bank on float charge.
2. Current Walk-in: 25 to 100% in fifteen seconds.
F. UPS Power Factor:
1. The power factor over full range of loads and input voltages shall be in
the range of 82 to 100%, lagging.
G. Total Harmonic Current Distortion:
1. The maximum harmonic current distortion of input current wave form

shall be 10% at full load.
H. Output Voltage:
1. Configuration: Three phase, 4-wire plus earth, 380/220 V as shown on

the drawings.
2. Regulation:
a. + 0.5% for balanced load, full range of DC input and no load to
full load variations.
b. + 3% for 50% unbalanced load, full range of DC input and no
load to full load variations.
c. +10% during maximum overload of the system.
3. Adjustment: + 5%.
I. Output Frequency:
162
1. Rating: 60 Hz.
2. Operating Range: + 0.1%.
3. Slew rate: 1.0 Hz per second maximum
J. Output Power Rating: As indicated on the Drawings, at 0.8 lagging pf.
K. Output Current:
1. Shall not exceed 150% of rated output current.
L. Phase Displacement:
1. Balanced load: + 1 o of by-pass input.

2. 50 % load imbalance phase-to-phase: + 3 o of by-pass input.
M. Bypass Line Synchronizing Range:

+ 0.5 Hz
+ 1.0 Hz Switch Selectable
+ 3.0 Hz
N. Load Power Factor Range: 1.0 to 0.8 lagging
O. Overload capability: At full voltage and excluding battery shall be as follows:
1. 125 % load for 10 minutes.

2. 150 % load for 30 seconds.
3. 300 % load for one cycle after which it shall be current limited to 150 %
until fault is cleared or UPS goes to bypass.
P. Voltage Transient Response:
1. 20 % load step: + 4%.

2. 30 % load step: + 5%.
3. 50 % load step: + 8%.
4. Loss or return of AC input power: + 1%.
5. Manual Transfer of 100 % load: + 4%.
6. Automatic transfer of load to bypass: + 4%.
Q. Transient Recovery Time: To within 1 % of output voltage within 50 ms.
R. Voltage Unbalance:
1. Balanced Load: + 1%.
163
2. 20 % unbalanced load: + 1%.

S. Output Harmonic Distortion: At rated frequency and voltage, from 10 % load

to full load and over entire battery voltage range, when measured into a linear
load with a crest factor of less than 3 to 1, the output harmonic distortion shall
be:
1. For any single harmonic: maximum 3%.

2. Total rms harmonic distortion: maximum 5%.
T. Efficiency: Not less than 92% at full load and half load including battery and
isolation transformer losses.
The efficiency of UPS system including battery and isolation transformer

losses shall be not less than 92% at full load and half load.
2.04 UPS MODULE
A. UPS module shall consist of a rectifier/charger unit and a 3-phase inverter

unit with their associated transformers, synchronizing equipment, protective
devices and accessories as required for operation.
B. Rectifier/charger unit shall be solid state and shall provide direct current to
the DC bus.
C. Rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input protective device. The

protective device shall be sized to accept simultaneously the full-rated load
and the battery recharge current. The protective device shall be capable of
shunt tripping and shall have symmetrical interrupting capacity as required.
The protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. A
surge suppression device shall be installed at the UPS input to protect
against lightning and switching surges.
D. A dry-type, isolated-winding power transformer shall be used for the rectifier

unit. The transformer's hottest spot winding temperature shall not exceed the
temperature limit of the transformer insulation material when operating at full
load. The transformer insulation shall be Class H, 150 C rise. Transformer
connections shall be accessible from the front.
E. Rectifier/charger unit shall be protected by a power walk-in feature such that

when AC power is returned to the AC input bus, the total initial power
requirement will not exceed 20 % of the rated full load current. This demand
164
shall increase gradually to 100% of the rated full load current plus the battery
charging current over the specified time interval.
F. Rectifier/charger unit shall be sized for the following two simultaneous

operating conditions:
1. Supplying the full rated load current to the inverter.

2. Recharging a fully-discharged battery to 95% of rated ampere-hour
capacity within ten times the discharge time after normal AC power is
restored, with the input protective device closed.
G. Primary current limiting: Battery-charging current shall be voltage regulated

and current limited. The battery-charging current limit shall be separately
adjustable from 2 % to 25 % of the maximum discharge current. After the
battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger unit shall maintain the battery at full
float charge until the next operation under input power failure. Battery
charger shall be capable of providing equalizing charge to the battery.
H. Rectifier/charger unit shall have an output filter to minimize ripple current

supplied to the battery; the ripple current into the battery shall not exceed 3%
RMS.
Rectifier/charger unit shall have manual means for adjusting DC voltage for
battery equalization, to provide voltage within plus 10% of nominal float
voltage.
I. Module shall have a DC protective device to isolate the module from the
battery system. The protective device size and interrupting rating shall be as
required by system capacity and shall incorporate a shunt trip as required by
circuit design. The protective device shall have provision for locking in the
"off" position.
J. Inverter unit shall be a solid-state device capable of accepting power from the
DC bus and providing AC power within specified limits.
K. The inverter shall be able to sustain an overload as specified across its

output terminals. The inverter shall not shut off, but shall continue to operate
within rated parameters, with inverse-time overload shutdown protection.
L. The inverter shall normally operate in phase-lock and synchronism with the
bypass source. Should the bypass source frequency deviate beyond 50 Hz
by more than 0.5 Hz, the internal frequency oscillators contained in the power
module shall be used to derive the new frequency reference. Upon
restoration of the bypass source within the required tolerance, the inverter
shall resynchronize with that source at a slew rate not exceeding the
specified limits. The design of the oscillator and synchronizing circuits shall
165
be such that failure of any associated component, connector pin, terminal

lead wire or DC power source in either the open or shunted mode shall affect
only one inverter leg. Such failure shall not cause transient disturbance of
the critical load in excess of the stated limits.
M. Electronic controls shall be incorporated to provide individual phase voltage

compensation to obtain phase balance.
N. Each control logic printed circuit board shall be electrically and physically
packaged on an individual plug-in module with separate indication and
adjustments.
The control logic shall include status indicators for trouble-shooting the
control circuits. These indicators shall be mounted on the circuit card edge
or face such that they will be visible without repositioning the card, and shall
be labelled with the function name.
O. The output protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping and shall have
interrupting capacity as specified. Protective device shall have provision for
locking in the "off" position.
P. The inverter output transformer shall be similar to the input transformer and
shall be capable of handling up to K-13 nonlinear loads as described in IEEE
C 57.110.
Q. UPS module shall have built-in self-protection against undervoltage,

overvoltage, overcurrent and surges introduced on the AC input source
and/or the bypass source. The UPS system shall sustain input surges
without damage. The UPS shall also have built-in self-protection against
overvoltage and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by
paralleled sources, load switching, or circuit breaker operation in the critical
load distribution system.
R. UPS module shall be self-protected against overcurrent, sudden changes in

output load and short circuits at the output terminals. UPS module shall be
provided with output reverse power detection which shall cause that module
to be disconnected from the critical load bus when output reverse power is
present. UPS module shall have built-in protection against permanent
damage to itself and the connected load for predictable types of failure within
itself and the connected load. At the end of battery discharge limit, the
module shall shut down without damage to internal components.
S. An RS 232 C communications and data acquisition port shall be provided.

This port shall allow the system parameters, status, alarm indication and
control panel functions specified to be remotely monitored.
166
2.05 STATIC BY-PASS TRANSFER SWITCH
A. A static by-pass transfer switch shall be provided as an integral part of the

UPS which shall consist of a static switch and a by-pass protective device or
by-pass switch. The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit
that senses the status of the inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and
provides an uninterrupted transfer of the load to the by-pass AC power
source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when a
malfunction occurs in the UPS or when an external overload condition occurs.
The power section of the static by-pass transfer switch shall be provided as a
plug-in type assembly to facilitate maintenance. The static by-pass transfer
switch shall be used to connect the by-pass AC power source or the UPS
inverter output to the critical load when required.
B. The static by-pass transfer switch shall automatically cause the by-pass AC
power source to assume the critical load without interruption when the by-
pass control logic senses one of the following conditions and the UPS
inverter output is synchronized to the by-pass AC power source:
1. Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating.

2. Battery protection period is expired and bypass is available.
3. Inverter failure.
C. If an overload occurs and the UPS inverter output is not synchronized to the
by-pass AC power source, the UPS inverter output shall current-limit for 200
milliseconds minimum. The inverter shall then turn off and an interrupted
transfer to the by-pass AC power source shall be made. If the by-pass AC
power source is beyond the conditions stated below, an interrupted transfer
shall be made upon detection of a fault condition:
1. By-pass voltage greater than + 10% from the UPS rated output
voltage.
2. By-pass frequency greater than + 0.5 Hz from the UPS rated output
frequency.
3. Phase differential of AC bypass voltage to UPS output voltage greater
than +3 o.
D. It shall be possible to make a manually-initiated static transfer from the

system status and control panel by turning the UPS inverter off.
E. The static by-pass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer, without
interruption after the UPS inverter is turned "on", or after an instantaneous
overload-induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load current has
returned to less than the unit's 100 % rating.
167
F. The control logic circuitry shall provide the means of making a forced or
reverse transfer of the static by-pass transfer switch on an interrupted basis.
Minimum interruption shall be 200 milliseconds when the UPS inverter is not
synchronized to the bypass AC power source.
G. The static by-pass transfer switch shall withstand the following overload
conditions:
1. 2000% of UPS output rating for two cycles.

2. 200% of UPS output rating for 5 minutes.
3. 125% of UPS output rating for 10 minutes.
2.06 UPS CABINET FABRICATION
A. The UPS cabinet shall be floor mounted, totally enclosed cubicle type in
B. Electroplate brackets and securing hardware with corrosion resistant

material. Secure bolts, studs and nuts with lock washers.
C. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding

lugs.
D. Conversion Equipment Enclosure: The enclosure shall allow access from

front for servicing adjustments and connections. Access hinged door
equipped with tumbler lock and latch handle. Equip cabinet for fork truck
lifting.
E Equip air inlet with permanent type filters and pressurize cabinet, or use
gaskets around door and panel openings to prevent entry of dirt.
F. Cabinet finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with suitable semi-
gloss enamel.
2.07 BATTERY
A. Storage Battery: Sealed lead acid or nickel cadmium open or vented heavy
duty industrial battery, designed for auxiliary power service. Provide battery
with impact resistant plastic case. Provide cells with explosion proof vents,
clear containers, and ample space for plate growth without stressing
container and cover.
B. Electrolyte Specific Gravity: No greater than 1.25 when full charged and
measured at 25C.
168
C. Ampere-Hour Rating: Sufficient to supply direct current to inverter for outage

period specified, with inverter operating at full rated output, to a discharge
limit of not less than 1.65 V per cell.
D. Battery Racks: Maximum of three-tier, all steel construction, with plastic

insulating rails at all points of contact with the battery case. Paint racks with
acid resistant paint.
E. The battery pack assembly shall be furnished in a battery cabinet matching

the UPS cabinet. The battery cabinet shall be designed to allow for checking
the torque on the connections in the battery system and to provide adequate
access for annual housekeeping chores. External wiring interface shall be
through the bottom or top of the assembly. A smoke and high temperature
alarm shall annunciate detection of either smoke or high temperature within
the battery cabinet.
F. Each battery pack assembly shall have a fused disconnect switch provided in
an enclosure, finished with acid-resistant paint and located in line with the
assembly. Switch shall be complete with line side and load side bus bars for
connection to battery cells. Switch shall be rated 3-pole with interrupting
rating as required by system capacity, and shall have an external operator
that is lockable in the "off" position.
G. The battery support system shall conform to ICBO-01 requirements for

seismic zone 0.
H. A battery monitor shall be provided for each battery pack assembly. As a

minimum, this device shall monitor the following parameters:
1. Total system voltage.

2. Ambient room temperature.
3. Total battery discharge cycles with a duration of 30 seconds or less.
I. The monitor shall also record the total accumulated discharge minutes and
accumulated battery system discharge kW hours.
2.08 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A. Controls: All standard controls and alarms as recommended by the

manufacturer shall be provided, which shall include the following as a
minimum:
1. AC input circuit breaker.

2. "Inverter operate" switch, to initiate inverter operation.
169
3. "Inverter standby" switch, to cause inverter to cease operation.

4. "Static switch transfer" switch, to permit manual actuation of static
transfer switch.
5. "Static switch lock-out" switch, to inhibit automatic retransfer of load to
inverter.
6. Battery charge timer.
7. "Indicator test" switch.
8. Static switch output circuit breaker.
9. Static switch output circuit breaker.
10. Static switch bypass circuit breaker.
11. Controls for maintenance bypass switch.
B. Indicators: All standard indicators as recommended by the manufacturer

shall be provided, which shall include the following as a minimum:
1. "Inverter synchronized to utility."

2. "Load connected to utility."
3. "Static transfer switch inhibited."
4. "High/low DC voltage."
5. "Over temperature."
6. "Inverter output overload."
C. Meters: All standard meters as recommended by the manufacturer shall be

provided, which shall include the following as a minimum:
1. Rectifier/charger DC voltage and current.

2. Utility, inverter output, and load AC voltage.
3. Load AC current.
4. Inverter output and utility frequency.
5. UPS output watts.
D. Selector switches for each phase of the AC valves shall be provided. All
meters shall be rated for 1% accuracy class.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install UPS system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and

the requirements of LOCAL STANDARDS, NEC, NEMA, ANSI and IEC.
170
B. Verify specification performance criteria; measure battery discharge and

recharge times; simulate fault in each system component and utility power;
Operate the unit for eight hours; and other tests as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems.
B. Include services of technician to supervise adjustments, final connections,

and system testing.
C. The services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the

installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified shall be
provided. The representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment and
testing of the equipment. The representative shall check the wiring between
equipment, start up the system, and field test the functions, interlocks and
protective devices to ensure that the total system is functioning according to
the intent of the design. The field tests shall be performed under the
supervision of a factory-trained representative of the equipment manufacturer
and witnessed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be given 2 weeks written
advance notice of the date and time when testing will be conducted.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION / TRAINING
B. Demonstrate operation of Uninterruptible Power Supply by simulating an

outage.
C. Provide 24 hours of instruction each for four persons, to be conducted at

project site with manufacturer's representative.
D. Framed data and instructions containing wiring and control diagrams under
glass or in laminated plastic shall be posted where directed. Condensed
operating instructions, prepared in typed form, shall be framed as specified
above and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be
posted before acceptance testing of the system.
171
E. A field training course shall be provided for designated operating and

maintenance staff members. Training shall be provided for a total period of
24 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is
functionally complete but prior to final acceptance test. Field training shall
cover the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals. The
24 hours shall be divided into minimum four sessions of 6 hours each. Each
session shall be conducted on a different day. Field training shall be
videotaped and two tapes shall be left with the Engineer, or two factory
training videotapes shall be provided as part of the training materials.
172
SECTION 16640
EARTHING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Earthing System including, but not limited to the following :
1. Earth rods.
2. Earth conductors.
3. Earth connection bar.
4. Earthing of various systems.
D Section 16180 Underground Electrical Services.
E. Section 16330 Power Transformers.
F. Section 16350 Package Type Substation.
G. Section 16370 MV Emergency Power Generation System.
H. Section 16610 LV Emergency Power Generation System.
I. Section 16650 Lightning Protection System.
J. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing System
B. ANSI C 2 National Electrical Safety Code.
C. IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Resistivity.
D. UL 467 Underwriter’s Laboratories Certification for Ground

Rods.
173
E. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit manufacturer’s data, illustrated leaflets, dimensions, fixing details and

description of the proposed products.
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of earthing

equipment, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturers
and suppliers/agents.
B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be UL listed and

conform to the requirements of ANSI, NEC, LOCAL STANDARDS and BS.
B All products shall be carefully packed to avoid damage during transportation.
1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All the materials required for earthing system shall be furnished new and
undamaged in accordance with the requirement stated in this section.
B. Conduct soil electrical resistivity tests at four locations (minimum) advised by
the Engineer. The earthing calculations based on the test results shall be
submitted for Engineers approval, to demonstrate that the proposed design of
earthing system complies with the specifications and standards.
C. For medium voltage equipment, a connection shall be provided from the main
earth loop. Also earth pits shall be installed as per Electricity Authority
requirements, which will be isolated from the main earth loop.
D. For communication room, separate earth pits shall be installed, which will be
isolated from the main earth loop.
2.02 EARTH RODs
A. Earth rods shall be UL listed and conform to NEC requirements.
174
B. Earth rods of the 'copperweld' (copperclad rods constructed with a minimum

0.25 mm thick copper exterior sleeve inseparably and permanently molten-welded to
a central high tensile steel core for rigidity) type shall be used.
C. Earth electrodes for each system shall have an interconnected resistance to
earth of not more than 5 ohms. Where this value is exceeded it shall be augmented
by additional electrodes connected in parallel spaced at approximately four metres
apart until this value is reached.
2.03 Earth conductors
A. Size of earth conductors shall be as shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with the applicable standards.
B. Earth conductors shall be as follows:
1. Outdoor underground: Soft drawn bare high conductivity annealed
plain stranded copper conductor.
2. Inside building: Same as for outdoor conductor but with green/yellow
coloured polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation.
C. PVC insulated copper conductor cable shall be used for final connections
from earth loop to structures, equipment, etc and for earthing/bonding of equipment
and metalwork inside the building.
D. All copper to copper connections, splices, taps, etc. in conductor and at the
accessories for termination shall be made by the exothermic weld process. Joints for
underground installation shall be epoxy resin encapsulated before burial.
E. The earth conductor in the conduit shall be continuous through the conduit
run with bushing earth connection and terminated on the panel board earthing.
2.04 earth connection bar
A. For connection of MV and LV equipment, each sub-station shall have high
conductivity copper, earth connection bar with minimum dimensions of 50 x
6 mm and mounted on porcelain insulators. The bar shall be of suitable
length with pre-drilled holes at a minimum distance of 50 mm between hole
centres.
B. Earth connection bars for transformer neutral and LV switchboard frame shall
be separate from earth bar for MV and transformer frame.
C. MV Generator frame and neutral shall be connected to the same earth

connection bar.
D. Each earth connection bar shall have a permanent label to identify the
connections together with the wording "Main Earth Bar".
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
B. Examine the area and conditions under which the earthing systems are to be
installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the timely and
175
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until the conditions are
satisfactory in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
3.02 general installation requirements
A. The installation shall be carried out in accordance with NEC 250. The
position of all conductors, joints and terminals shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to commencing the work.
B. All electrical equipment shall be connected to the earth with copper earth
conductor. The term "electrical equipment" shall include all metal enclosures
containing electrical connections or bare conductors. Individual devices such as
solenoids, pressure switches, and limit switches shall be exempt from this
requirement unless the device requires earthing for proper operation. Large
equipment such as power distribution board or motor control centers shall be
furnished with an earthing bus, which shall be connected at two points to the earth.
All earth connection surfaces shall be cleaned immediately prior to connection.
Provide all earthing material required but not furnished with the equipment.
C. All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of all the installations shall be
effectively earthed in accordance with the NEC requirements. The steel conduit
systems, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic lighting fixtures, cable trays, all
non-current carrying metal parts of electrical systems and any other equipment or
system components shall be earthed and the connection shall be extended to the
nearest panel board earth or earthing bar in sub-station.
D. The conductive sheaths and armour of cables shall be connected to earth.
E. All connections and joints for the earthing system including bonding
connections shall be made using "Exothermic" process which produces a fused
joint.
3.03 earth rods INSTALLATION
A. All earth rods shall be installed at suitable locations and to the depth to
achieve required resistance. Where the earth rod length exceeds 2.5 m, standard
sections shall be connected with aluminum bronze coupling to extend the rod.
B. Earth rods shall be driven with a cap driving stud.
C. All connections between rods and earthing conductors shall be made by
removable bolted connection.
D. All earth rods shall have inspection pits as shown on Drawings. The pit shall
be constructed from pre-cast concrete. All connections to the earth rod shall be
exposed when the cover is raised. Attach a “DANGER - ELECTRICITY” sign to the
wall of the inspection pit. Use English and Arabic white letters on red background.
Inspection pit cover shall be constructed from cast iron.
3.04 EARTH CONDUCTORS INSTALLATION
A. Standard sizes of stranded copper conductor used for earth continuity shall
be according to the requirements of BS7671 AND BS7430.
B. Suitable earthing facilities, acceptable to the Engineer, shall be furnished on
electrical equipment to consist of compression type terminal connectors bolted to
the equipment frame or enclosure and providing a minimum of joint resistance.
C. The conduit system shall not be considered as continuous for earthing
purposes. A separate earth conductor shall be installed in the same conduit with the
176
phase and neutral conductors. The separate earth conductors shall be sized
according to NEC requirements. No earthing conductors shall be smaller than 2.5
mm2 unless this is part of a multicore cable. Where flexible connections are made to
equipment, earthing jumpers shall be provided. All connections of heavy gauge steel
conduit system shall be checked for good electrical continuity.
D. Exposed conductors shall be installed inconspicuously in vertical or
horizontal positions on supporting structures. When located on irregular supporting
surfaces or equipment, the conductors shall run parallel to or normal to the
dominant surface.
E. Conductors routed over concrete, steel or equipment surfaces shall be kept in
close contact with those surfaces by using fasteners located at intervals not
exceeding 1 m.
F. Exposed earthing conductors shall be securely fastened to the mounting
surface using copper or brass straps.
G. Clamps, connectors, bolts, washers, nuts and other hardware for bolted
connection to earthing system shall be of copper.
H. Exothermic welds shall comprise moulds, cartridges, materials, and
accessories as recommended by the manufacturer.
I. The earthing conductors entering the building shall be installed in a 25 mm
diameter PVC conduit. Waterproofing shall be provided at all entry of earth
conductors, details of which shall be approved by the structural engineer.
J. Earth conductors shall be buried at a minimum depth of 750 mm below
finished grade.
K. Underground conductors shall be buried in clean sifted earth.
L. Except for sub-stations and electric rooms, the exposed earth conductor shall
run in protective pipes for runs below 900 mm from floor level. Pipe shall also be
provided at locations where conduct is likely to be subject to physical damage.
M. Extensions from earth loop as indicated on the Drawings shall be provided
for connection to electrical equipment. Connect the earthing conductor to the
equipment, earth bus, pad or lug. In addition to the earth grid extension conductors,
an earth cable to each end of the earth bus in each assembly of power distribution
board or panel boards shall be provided.
N. Where an earth conductor is included with the phase conductors of power
circuits, the earth conductor shall be connected to the equipment earthing facilities
and to the source earth bus. Where an earth conductor is not included with the
phase conductors, the equipment shall be earthed by connecting a separate earth
cable to the equipment earthing facilities and to the tray earthing cable or source
earth bus. Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, integral parts of a
cable assembly shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of NEC.
3.05 EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE
A. The completed earthing system shall have sufficiently low impedance to limit
the voltage to earth and to facilitate the operation of the current protective devices in
the circuit. Earth loop impedance shall not exceed the values specified in BS or
other applicable standards.
3.06 BUILDING SYSTEMS EARTHING
177
A. The building low current systems including communication, control and alarm
functions shall be provided with earthing as shown on the Drawings and in
relevant specifications. Where applicable requirements of functional earthing
shall also be complied with.
B. The installation of the earthing for building systems shall be in accordance

with the recommendations of standards, and the applicable provisions of this
section.
3.07 SUPPLEMENTARY AND EQUI-POTENTIAL BONDING

A. In accordance with Section 547 of the IEE Wiring Regulations 16th edition
(BS 7671) bonding conductors shall be installed in appropriate locations to
ensure all simultaneously accessible exposed or extraneous conductive parts
are at equal potential. Undertake such tests and install such supplementary
bonding conductors that are necessary to ensure compliance with these
requirements.
B. Supplementary bonding conductors shall conform to the requirements of

Section 547-03 of the IEE Wiring Regulations and shall have a minimum
cross-sectional area of 2.5 sq. mm where mechanically protected and 4.0 sq.
mm where not so protected.
C. Main equi-potential bonding conductors shall conform to the requirements of

Section 547-2 of the IEE Wiring Regulations and shall have a minimum
cross-sectional area of 6.0 sq. mm.

B. Earth resistance tests shall be carried out after installation of the individual
earthing systems in accordance with the Specifications. The earth resistance
tests shall be carried out in accordance with Section 713-11 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations 16th edition and readings obtained officially recorded by all
witnessing parties.
C. Prior to connection of earth rods to the earthing system, the earth resistance
of individual earth rod shall be measured by using an approved type of earth
resistance tester.
D. After completion of all the connections of earthing system, the earth
resistance shall be measured from the earthing test point in presence of the
Engineer.
E. All the earth resistance test reports shall be submitted for Engineer’s
approval.
178
SECTION 16650
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDEs
A. Lightning Protection System including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Air Termination Network.
2. Down Conductors.
3. Test Terminals/Clamps.
4. Earth Rods.

D Section 16640 Earthing System.
E. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 780 Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
B. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC), 250-Grounding.
C. ANSI National Electrical Safety Code.
D. UL 467 Underwriter’s Laboratories Certification for Ground Rods.
E. BS 6651 Code of Practice for Protection of Structures Against Lightning.
F. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit Manufacturer’s data, design calculations, illustrated leaflets or
products, dimensions, fixing details, description of products.
179
A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lightning

protection and earthing equipment, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local
manufacturer and agents/supplier.
B. All equipment furnished under these specification shall be UL listed and
conform to applicable NFPA, NEC, ANSI, BS.

B. All products shall be carefully packed to avoid damage during transportation.

1.07 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The Lightning Protection System shall comprise air terminations, down
conductors, earth electrodes, etc., necessary to form a complete system in
accordance with the required standards.
B. All materials furnished shall be new and undamaged in accordance with
relevant standards and requirements stated herein.
2.02 AIR TERMINAtion NETWORK
A. Air termination network shall be provided on roof and consist of vertical air
terminals and/or horizontal roof conductors as shown on the drawings. No part of
the roof within the air termination network should be more than 5 m away from a roof
conductor.
B. Horizontal air termination network or roof conductors shall comprise 25 x 3
mm flat, high conductivity copper tape with a covering of polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
The PVC covering shall be resistant to ultra-violet radiations.
C. Vertical air terminations shall be solid copper rod, having minimum 8 mm
diameter. The length of the rod shall be appropriate for protection of the structure.
The provision of the vertical air terminations, their height and locations shall be
subject to the approval of Architect and Engineer.
2.03 DOWN CONDUCTORS
A. Down conductors shall comprise minimum 70 mm2 high conductivity copper
conductors..
B. For connection in down conductors and to dissimilar metals forming part of
the lightning protection system, exothermic connections shall be provided. Where
exothermic connections are not possible, standard accessories from the
manufacturer of the system and approved by the Engineer shall be used.
2.04 TEST TERMINALS/CLAMPS

A. Each down conductor shall be provided with a test terminal/clamp. The
terminal shall be located near the down conductor connections with the earth
electrode or as approved by the supervising Engineer.
180
2.05 EARTH RODS

A. Earth rods of the ‘copperweld’ (copperclad rods constructed with a minimum
0.25 mm thick copper exterior sleeve inseparable and permanently molten-welded to
a central high tensile steel core for rigidity) type shall be used as per the
B. Earth electrodes for each system shall have an interconnected resistance to
earth of not more than five (5) Ohms. Where this value is exceeded, additional
earthing approved by the Engineer shall be installed until this value is reached.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The installation shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6651. The
position of all conductors, test clamps, ground rods and earth terminals shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to commencing the work.
B. Location of all components and routing of the conductors shall not affect the
building aesthetics or finishes.
C. Except where bonding is required by standards, the building reinforcement
shall not be connected to the lightning protection system.
D. All steelwork members of building structure and conductive components of
other services shall be bonded to the lightning protection system.
E. Each down conductor shall be connected to earth through a test terminal.
F. No lightning protection system shall be closer than 6 meters to the building
electrical earthing system.
G. All connections shall be made using "Exothermic" process which produces a
fused joint. Bolted connections shall not be used except at the connection to the
test terminal and ground rods which shall be disconnectable for testing purposes.
3.02 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK INSTALLATION
A. The horizontal and vertical air terminations shall be installed on the building
using accessories suitable for the particular surface.
B. Vertical air terminations shall not be visible from the possible viewing
positions of the buildings from outside, and their application and positioning shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.03 DOWN CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Down conductors shall be routed along the shortest path approved by the
Engineer, and avoid bends as much as possible.
B. Vertical and horizontal conductors shall be fixed by clamps at intervals not
exceeding 900 mm and 1200 mm respectively.
C. Tapes shall pass through test clamps and protrude a minimum of 25 mm into
the connection. Tape shall be applied with tin conductive lacquer at contact
surface.
D. Where site conditions do not permit surface installation of down conductors,
these may be run in embedded non-metallic pipes. The clamps to support the
conductor at ends shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to support the conductor
weight.
3.04 EARTH PIT INSTALLATION
181
A. Ground rods shall be driven into ground to a required depth and shall be
provided at the position of each down conductor.
B. A concrete inspection pit shall be fitted at each rod to tape joint position.
Rods shall be located as close as possible to the building.
B. The electrical and mechanical continuity of all conductors, bonds and joints
shall be verified.
C. The resistance to earth of the whole installation and each earth termination
shall be measured and shall be in accordance with BS 6651. The overall resistance
of the installation to the general mass of earth shall not exceed 5 ohms. The
resistance of each test joint shall satisfy BS 6651. Additional earth terminations shall
be added, if required, under the directions of the Engineer.
182
SECTION 16710
TELEPHONE SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Electronic Private Branch Exchange (EPABX) telephone system, main frame

cross-connects and station devices, and all necessary equipment and
software to provide a telecommunications network with centralized voice mail,
centralized administration and management from a single database.
A. Division 16 and Contract Conditions.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEC National Electrical Code.
B. IEC Uninterruptible Power Supplies.
C. EIA RS 470
A. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years in the
installation and service of EPABX networked or campus systems.
B. Provide references of the last 2 networked projects of comparable size and

complexity and nature for the manufacturer's equipment. The references shall
include the project name, address, date of cut-over, and name, title or
(position) and telephone number of manager of the system.
C. The equipment and installation shall meet the voltage and format
requirements of the Project, special attention shall be given to harsh
environment in this area.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
183
B. General Requirements: Furnish the Engineer a set of illustrations,

specifications and engineering data sheets for the equipment items he
proposes to furnish under these specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete shop drawings shall be provided for this system.
1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.07 DESCRIPTION - EPABX AND STATION EQUIPMENT
A. Provide a complete and operating telephone system with centralized voice

mail, centralized administration and management and feature transparency
throughout the complex suitable for the telephone service requirements for
the project.
B. Each EPABX shall be a digitally controlled switch for control of data and
voice services.
1. The system shall have facilities for operation with standard analog
station equipment including, telephones, FAX machines, Data modems
and TDD (hearing impaired) equipment, etc.
2. The system shall have facilities for operation with dedicated digital
business station equipment with multi-line stations with display panels,
hands-free operation, speed dialing, etc.
3. The system shall have provisions for interfacing CCITT ISDN PRI,
CCITT ISDN BRI and digital switched services.
4. The system shall have provisions for T-1/E-1 Carrier Interface with D 4
and ESF signaling.
a. CCSA - Common Control Switching Arrangement Access.

b. Programming shall be by processor stored program control
through a programming station or import from a computer
terminal via a communication port.
c. Programming backup shall be stored on magnetic disk, or tape
for retrieval in the event of system failure (method shall be
defined in the shop drawings). A second backup copy shall be
provided to Owner at system cut-over.
d. The switching matrix shall be essentially non-blocking.
i. State the number of lines at which the system is non-
blocking.
184
ii. State the number of simultaneous calls possible with the

proposed model and feature package.
1. The EPABX shall have provisions Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks and
DSS service.
2. The system shall provide the following progress tones:
a. Dial tone
b. Busy tone
c. Ringback tone (queuing)
d. Reorder tone
3. The EPABX shall have the following capabilities:

i. Call forwarding
ii. Conference calling
iii. Busy/No Answer
iv. Direct Inward Dialing
v. Hunting groups
a. The ability to provide SMDR and call accounting reporting from
a central location or from a single database:
i. A network wide basis
ii. A network node basis
4. All feature assignments, station equipment restrictions, and moves and

changes shall be software programmable via an on premises terminal
or off premises remote terminal. Access to programming shall be
restricted by advanced security measures.
5. The system shall have the following features:
a. ARS - Automatic Route Selection

b. DDC - Direct Department Calling
c. DID - Direct Inward Dialing
d. DISA - Direct Inward System Access
e. Optional capability for Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
f. Flexible system numbering plan
g. Intercept treatments
h. Miscellaneous trunk restrictions
i. Multiple listed directory numbers
j. Music On Hold
k. Night service arrangements
l. Recorded announcement interface
m. Remote access
n. SMDR - Station Message Detail Recording
o. System speed dialing
185
p. Data channel transport of 64 kbs

q. Through dialing
r. Traffic measurement capabilities
s. Trunk queuing on all outgoing trunk groups, with or without
implementing ARS
t. Trunk to trunk transfer
u. Trunk/station class of service or restriction with no less than five
levels
v. Toll fraud prevention
w. Force the entry of an account code to place a long distance call
6. The system shall have the following attendant features:
a. Alternate console position

b. Attendant access to trunk groups
c. Attendant access to individual trunks
d. Attendant control of trunk groups
e. Attendant selective answering priority
f. Automatic timed recall on camped on calls
g. Automatic timed recall on held calls
h. Automatic timed recall on station no answer calls
i. Busy override
j. Busy verification of station lines and trunks
k. Call Hold
l. Call status display
m. Call waiting in queue indication
n. Calling station number display
o. Calling trunk number display/ incoming call ID
p. Outbound trunk queuing
q. Conferencing
r. Flexible key assignment
s. Line lockout
t. Minor and major alarm identification
u. Night service control
v. Station status display - busy lamp field
w. Station class of service indication
x. Timed reminders
y. Executive override or priority calling
7. The system shall have the following station features:
a. Automatic callback from busy or not answered station - station

to station queuing
b. Automatic trunk queuing
c. Call forwarding - busy and no answer
d. Call hold
186
e. Call park
f. Call transfer with automatic station to station connection when
busy
g. Call waiting originating, or terminating
h. Conference, three way both internal and external
i. Distinctive ring on all instruments for external/internal calls.
j. Do not disturb
k. Last number redial
l. Message waiting, originating and terminating
m. Personal central office line appearances on business phones
n. Individual speed dialing
o. Station hunting
p. Station controlled trunk to trunk call transfer
q. Hands free intercom initiated from receiving station only
r. Minimum of three distinctive ring selections.
s. Station controlled trunk to trunk call transfer
t. Hands free intercom initiated from receiving station only
u. Minimum of three distinctive ring selections.
C. The EPABX system software shall be the current version as of the date of
handover.
D. Each EPABX system shall operate by 220 V AC power with a full time self
regenerating Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) as an alternative power
source for continuous operation in the event of a power interruption. The UPS
shall have the capacity to operate the EPABX, remote shelves and peripheral
equipment, such as voice mail, for a minimum of 2 hours.
E. Coordinate with the electrical contractor the power requirements for the
installed system.
F. Provide station equipment. Station equipment to include single line, analog

wall and desk phones, hearing impaired station apparatus, and EPABX
dedicated business stations and a dedicated attendant console.
G. Provide power failure telephones.
H. The EPABX shall have the ability to support digital telephones up to 800 m
from the EPABX without any additional equipment such as line drivers,
amplifiers and etc.
I. Each EPABX shall provide operational interfaces for the building zoned and
all-call paging systems.
1.08 DESCRIPTION - VOICE MAIL SYSTEM
187
A. The voice mail system shall be fully integrated with the EPABX and be
compatible with the Audio Messaging Interchange Specification (AMIS)
standards to allow integration with other manufacturer's voice mail systems.
B. The voice mail system shall provide the following:
1. Be fully integrated with the switching system with the following:
a. Control message waiting lamp on users telephone station.

b. Receive information from the switching system that indicates the
called number for routing source calls to the proper mail box.
c. Direct transfer to users mailbox from the users extension
without additional dialing.
d. Direct personal greeting without keying additional keys.
e. Allow caller to dial 0 or other single digit to revert call to
selected department attendant group.
f. Accessibility from inside or outside the switching system so that
subscribers may retrieve or send messages.
g. Provide for multiple greetings by call forwarding type.
2. Allow total interaction from a DTMF telephone.
3. Automatically terminate the call if no sound is initiated within a

predefined period.
4. Message storage shall be dynamic using storage space as necessary

for each mailbox as demanded.
5. Provide a structured menu of voice prompts for subscriber controlled

functions.
a. Allow for entry of command prompts at any time during prompt

messages.
b. Allow for entry of multiple command prompts without waiting for
each prompt in turn.
c. Allow for entry of command prompts in both English or Arabic.
d. Allow for entry of command prompts for assisting or aiding users
in voice mail operation.
6. Provide password security for access to all mailboxes.
a. Subscriber shall be able to change password at any time.

b. System administrator shall be able to retrieve or reset password
in the event of a subscriber change or loss of password.
c. System administrator shall be able to force the use of
passwords to prevent toll fraud abuse.
188
7. Provide the following subscriber features:
d. Subscriber recorded personal greetings for callers reaching

subscribers mailbox.
b. Notification of number of messages immediately upon logging in
to mailbox.
c. Date and time stamp all messages.
d. Record, replay, restart and re-record messages before sending.
e. Erase messages.
8. Subscriber retrieval of messages:
a. Immediate indication of number of stored messages in mailbox.

b. Receive messages in order of called in sequence.
c. Skip ahead and backwards while playing messages.
d. Replay all or part of message.
e. Cancel message review before all messages have been
handled.
f. Reply to messages.
g. Delete individual messages.
C. System Administration and Reporting.
1. System administrator shall have the following controls:
a. Define and modify the systems parameters.

b. Add, Edit and delete subscribers.
c. Change mailbox number of subscriber without reprogramming
mailbox parameters.
d. Modify attributes for mailboxes.
2. System shall provide the following reports:
a. Detail and summary of subscriber activity.

b. Detail and summary of mailbox status including number of
saved messages and new messages.
c. Port utilization.
d. Disk utilization reports.
e. System usage.
f. System diagnostics.
g. Error logs.
h. Printouts of reports.
3. System shall provide reports on a predefined schedule or as requested

by the administrator.
189
4. System shall provide reports for the following:
a. System alarms and errors.

b. Disk capacity limitations.
D. Provide instruction cards for each telephone station defining functions of the
Voice Mail System.
1.09 DESCRIPTION - MANAGEMENT COMPUTER
A. The operational on-premise management computer must be a

microprocessor based system compatible with the EPABX(s) and provide
traffic data, system control techniques, and data that permit for timely and
effective management of all telecommunications resources:
5. It shall function as an input/output device to the system, and shall be

used for maintenance and system administration including changes in
software such as extension number assignment, classes of service,
etc.
6. It shall be capable of identifying major and minor alarms, major alarms

being defined as any failure of the common equipment and minor
alarms being defined as the failure on any peripheral equipment.
7. It shall provide for the timely detection and isolation of faulty common
carrier facilities.
4. It must be capable of accessing information to effectively control and

administer the system and network as follows:
c. Dynamic status of switching equipment and trunks.

d. Results of self testing procedures.
e. Vary or cancel ARS routes.
f. Apply, modify, or disable restrictions.
g. Obtain traffic usage data for specific trunks, access lines, and
facilities for specific time periods.
h. Determine the operational status of all trunks and station lines.
i. Add, modify, or delete authorization codes.
j. Provide an inventory of working station numbers with
associated station ports in use and associated telephone types.
5. Maintain an alarm log.
6. Provide hard copy record via attached A4 laser printer with continuous
paper feed printer.
190
7. Operation of the management computer must be consistent across the

network.
1.10 WARRANTY
B. Warranty shall be for one full year from the Substantial Completion date of
the systems based on the written approval of the Owner of compliance with
the specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following manufacturers are approved to supply equipment for this

project.
1. EPABX equipment:
a. AT&T
b. Fujitsu
c. Northern Telecom
d. Mitel
e. Siemens
f. NEC
g. Ericsson
h. Cisco
2. Voice Mail Equipment:
a. AT&T - Audix
b. AT&T - Intuity
c. Northern Telecom - Meridian Mail
d. Centigram – C 70, 120 I, 120 S
e. Octel Overture 250 and 350
f. NEAX Mail AD 16
g. TIE Infor Manager
B. One manufacturer's brand of telephone equipment shall be used through out

the network.
2.02 EQUIPMENT - EPABX
191
A. The system provided shall have the minimum capacities listed in the following
table.
1. Equipped - All chassis, equipment, hardware and software provided to

operate number of lines or devices listed (20external trunk lines
expandable to 50 lines with 300 Extension lines expandable to 500).
2. Wired - Wired chassis provided for future equipment to allow for

expansion at capacities listed.
3. Capacity - Capacity of the system when fully equipped without

replacement of basic chassis system. Additional chassis may be
added.
2.03 EQUIPMENT - VOICE MAIL SYSTEM
A. The system shall be a digital type system with hard disk storage with floppy
disk and DVD R/RW . The system shall be equipped for the following
minimum capacities: (the capacities shall be provided by the operator at later
stage).
2.04 EQUIPMENT - MDF
A. Provide MDF Terminal Equipment to cater for all connected cablesand to

allow for future expansion required. Terminal equipment shall be AT&T 110
terminal block system.
2.05 EQUIPMENT - STATION SETS
A. Provide Desk mounted/wall mounted digital and analogue sets to match the
operator requirements – telephone sets shall be priced separately and
submitted for the Engineer/Operator final approval.
B. Provide the following EPABX Digital Attendant Console. The console shall
be PC based attendant console and have the data base to search for the
users directory number either by name or department and shall be a full
featured attendant call routing center with visual display terminal. The
console shall have features for functions such as, lines, speed dialing, hold,
conference call, park, tap, etc. The sets shall have a display screen for
display of features as they are being used for programming and calling
features. The visual display terminal shall display status of all active CO
trunks and station lines and display status of any requested trunk or station.
The attendant console must be fully compatible with the EPABX supplied.
Provide ONE (1) hand held receiver and ONE (1) head worn receiver set for
hands free operation at the console.
192
Quantity: one.
C. Provide the following TDD Hearing Impaired Station Apparatus. The TDD
apparatus shall have facilities to display current messages, store messages
with a minimum of 8 Kbs of on board storage and a printer port for output of
hardcopy documents. Provide a dot-matrix printer with each TDD apparatus.
Quantity: Provide Two.
D. Provide the following Voice Mail Instruction Cards. The cards shall describe
the access and program functions of the voice mail system.
Quantity: Provide one card for each telephone device plus 25% Spare.
2.06 EQUIPMENT – UPS SYSTEM
A. Provide the following UPS system. The on-line UPS system with cabinet
shall be suitable for operation with the digital electronic EPABX equipment.
The UPS shall allow for full capacity operation of the system, voice mail and
related peripheral equipment for a period of 2 hours and shall not cause any
loss of service or system activity, including calls in progress and system
management functions. The UPS system shall be certified for use by the
EPABX manufacturer for the specific system installed. The UPS shall have a
visible alarm panel with varying color lights as alarm.
Manufacturer: Exide or equal and approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Demonstrations: Provide a demonstration of operation of the telephone and

voice mail systems. The demonstration shall include features and operation
of the EPABX, station equipment and voice mail operation.
B. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of trunk lines from the local

telephone service intake point.
C. Installer Qualification: Installation shall be by a factory certified

vendor/installation contractor of the equipment to be installed. Furnish, with
the shop drawings, certification documents showing factory authorized
training record of installation personnel.
D. Installation: All equipment shall be installed in a clean professional manner:
1. Mounted equipment shall be vertically plumb and fastened securely

with appropriate hardware for the application.
193
2. Cable terminations, the pair twist shall continue as close as possible to

the termination point.
3. MDF installation, blocks shall be vertically plumb and securely

fastened to the back boards. Station and riser cables shall be routed
in D-rings, brackets, and troughs and be securely fastened to prevent
strain at the terminations.
4. Cables routed to EPABX equipment located on the floor shall be

harnessed and neatly dressed with enough slack to allow equipment
movement as necessary for installation and service.
E. Labeling: Terminal blocks shall be labeled legibly with permanent embossed

labels or by labeling pen.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Riser cable shields, equipment frames and cabinets shall be grounded with a
No. 6 awg stranded copper cable connected to the nearest building ground
location. Grounding shall be in accordance with NEC, IEEE, IEE Regulations
and Local Codes.
B. All equipment shall be grounded per manufacturer’s recommendations and in

accordance with NEC, IEEE, IEE Regulations and Local Codes.
3.03 TESTING
A. Station equipment connected to the EPABX(s) and voice mail system shall be
tested for all functions of operation including software programmed attributes
and restrictions.
B. Perform all equipment tests as directed by the equipment manufacturers.

Submit results of tests with as-built documents.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Vendor shall provide in service training to selected staff.
1. Provide on site training for console operators, end users, system

administrators, voice mail and UPS operators. Training services shall
be furnished to the Owner as required for the entire warranty period as
defined in the Contract Conditions.
2. Provide manufacturer’s formal class for system administrator training
(5 days) for four persons for each persons for each model of EPABX
purhcased.
194
2. Provide manufacturer's formal class for voice mail administrator

training (5 days) for four persons.
4. Provide manufacturer’s formal class for basic maintenance (5 days) for

four persons for each model of EPABX purchased.
B. Provide both service and training personnel for the first four hours on the
day(s) of handover.
3.05 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide maintenance service during warranty period as follows:
1. Service Response Times: Perform corrective work as follows:
a. Normal Service - same day for calls before 12:00 noon; next
day for calls after 12:00 noon for weekdays.
Normal Service - next working day for calls on weekends and
holidays.
b. Emergency Service - Two hour response time for normal

working hours, four hour response time for evening, weekend or
holiday service.
Emergency Service shall be for failure of:
i. Total system.
ii. Over 50% of the EPABX service for non-essential station
equipment or electronics.
iii. Over 50% loss of non-essential trunk line service for non-
essential trunks.
iv. Attendant console.
v. Connections to emergency services i.e,, fire alarm,
emergency page system, or security system, etc.
vi. Loss of service to customer defined essential equipment
or operational features.
2. After the installation the supplier shall assign one engineer on-site for
at least one month.
3. Repair Parts: Repair parts shall be available on-site within 24 hours for
all system equipment.
195
SECTION 16715
VOICE AND DATA CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Voice and Data Cabling Systems supporting the following network
topologies; Analogue Voice Circuits, AppleTalk, Ethernet 10BaseT, IBM
Token Ring 4Mbps and 16Mbps and 100BaseT, and 1000BaseT standards
including outlet plates, voice and data grade unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
cable and terminal equipment and cabinets.
B. Electrical and mechanical systems including rough-in, pathways, conduit,

boxes and backboards.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 16710 Telephone System Equipment.
B. Section 16716 Computer Networking L.A.N. Equipment.
C. Section 16910 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. EIA/TIA Bulletins:
1. EIA/TIA 568A
2. EIA/TIA 606
3. EIA/TIA 607
4. TSB 67
B. UL Underwriters Laboratories
C. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
D. NEC National Electric Code
E. Local Codes as they apply

1.04 SUBMITTALS
196
B. Furnish 6 complete sets of shop drawings for the proposed system. The
submittal shall be neatly bound in a three ring or comb type binder, with
protective covers. The cover must identify the project, system, date and
vendor name. The submittal shall consist of, but not be limited to the
following items:
1. Title sheet showing the Contractor's name, address, phone number

and date submitted. Clear area shall be provided on the title sheet for
shop drawing review stamps.
2. Material list showing quantity, manufacturer and description of each

item being furnished.
3. Engineered riser diagrams showing all distribution equipment,

connections and calculated tap values and signal strength levels at
each device and outlet.
4. Product data sheets with complete technical data for each item being
furnished.
A. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with a minimum of 5 years

experience in the installation and service of voice/data cabling
communications systems and registered with the equipment manufacturer(s)
as franchised reseller of registered systems and serve as the installing
contractor and ongoing registered service provider. Written certification by
the warranting manufacturer(s) shall be provided with shop drawings.
B. Provide 3 references of projects of comparable size and scope that have

been completed within the last 2 years. The references shall include: project
name, address, date of substantial completion, and name and telephone
number of manager of the system.
C. Contractors not meeting the above minimum qualifications are not approved
to bid on this project.
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. The Voice and Data Cabling System shall include:
1. Horizontal cable system consisting of:

a. Data transmission cable system includes data grade cable and
outlet and termination hardware.
197
b. Voice transmission cable system includes data grade cable and

outlet and termination hardware.
2. Riser cable system consisting of:
a. EIA/TIA Category 5 voice grade multi-pair cable and 110 type

termination blocks.
b. EIA/TIA Category 6 cable for data.
3. Voice risers shall be sized to accommodate 25% spare capacity over

the served frame capacity .
B. Communications outlets and connecting hardware.
1. Outlets shall comprise:
a. Data grade connecting devices shall be 8-pin modular jacks

(Category 6).
b. Voice grade connecting devices shall include 8-pin modular
jacks (Category 5).
c. Connecting devices shall be part of a product line of modular
components that assemble into frames, plates and panels to
complete a multi-purpose outlet system in one assembly.
d. Jack frames shall be compatible with the manufacture of the
connecting devices, and provided with approved colour cover
face plate to match with other installed wiring devices.
2. Connecting hardware
a. Data connecting hardware shall be 8-pin modular jacks

mounted in patch-panel frames configured to install on 483 mm
racks, frames and cabinets.
b. Voice connecting hardware shall be 110 style connecting
hardware.
C. Labelling of communications outlets and connecting hardware.
1. Identify each outlet and associated termination point on the blocks with
the following label format. Labelling shall be by a permanent labelling
method. The room number identification shall be the final room number
provided by the Owner.
2. Closet number, followed by a dash and room number, followed by a

dash and number of outlet in room (if multiple outlets are in the room):
a. Closet end:
198
i) Sample A-205-V 2: closet A - location 205 - Voice cable

No. 2.
ii) Sample C-205-D 4: closet C - location 205 - data cable
No. 4.
b. Outlet end:
i) Sample B-205: closet B - location 205
Identify individual jacks on each plate with outlet type and
number, if multiple outlets occur in the room: label
adjacent to each outlet with a "D" for each data outlet, "V"
for each voice outlet and "TV" for each RF television
outlet (multiple TV outlets need not be identified); "D2",
"D3", "V2", etc. if multiple drops.
3. Color code for communications outlets shall be as follows:
a. Data jacks black jack inserts

b. Voice jacks white jack inserts
4. The outlet plate labelling shall be engraved, 5 mm high, onto the cover
plates. No other labelling method is acceptable for the device outlet
plates.
D. Provide voice riser cables from communications closet to telephone

equipment room. Terminate and test all cables.
E. Provide fire stop at all penetrations through fire rated walls and ceiling/floor
systems designated for technology use. Fire stopping method shall meet or
exceed the minimum rating of the wall, ceiling or floor penetrated.
F. Provide equipment cabinets in the main communication room for data patch
panels and space for future network electronics NIC. Provide Wall/Floor
mounted, open frame equipment racks in each auxiliary communications
room as deemed practical. Each rack shall include horizontal and vertical
cable management systems.
G. Provide removable cable fasteners to dress all station cables in

communications rooms and closets. The fasteners shall be hook and loop
plastic straps (Velcro).
H. Provide patch cables as follows:
1. Data station cables - Category 6, 8-pin modular plug to 8-pin modular

plug, configure pin assignment to 568 B. Provide 1 cable for each
outlet with 50% of the cables 2 m long and 50% of the cables 3 m long.
199
I. Cable management software. The software shall be compatible with network

operating software and the cable testing results produced by the testing
equipment for tests described in 3.03.A. The system shall identify:
1. Station type; voice, data, DOS, Apple, etc.
2. Network type, 10 BaseTm 100 BaseT, 1000 BaseT, Token Ring,

AppleTalk, etc.
3. Cable type and tested performance.
4. Location of outlet and termination point.
5. Connection at distribution location.
6. Time history of; connection, testing, traffic, faults, etc.
J. The cable management software shall be the product of the testing

equipment used for link certification.
1.07 WARRANTY
B. Warranty shall be for a minimum period of 20 years from the substantial

Completion date of the structured cabling system (voice/data) based on the
written approval of the Owner and compliance with the specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One manufacturer's brand shall be used for each component throughout the
building.
B. One manufacturer's product line shall be used for all termination equipment
at both the outlet end and at the administration end of all cabling.
2.02 VOICE AND DATA CABLE
A. Approved manufacturers:
1. AMP.
200
2. Comm Scope.
3. Ortronix.
4.. Avaya Communications.
5. Mohawk/CDT.
6. Belden.
B. Voice and Data Cable shall be 4 pair unshielded twisted pair type cable,
rated by manufacturer to meet the following minimum performance criteria:
1. EIA/TIA 568 A Category 5 and 6 for voice and data cables

respectively. Category classification shall be printed on the cable.
2. Attenuation figures by frequency and distance at a temperature of 20

o
C shall be provided.
3. Pair to pair near end cross Talk figures by frequency and distance at a
o
temperature of 20 C. Figures represent worst pair specification.
Minimum values for NEXT shall be derived from power sum testing as
defined for backbone cabling in article 10.3.4.7 of the EIA/TIA-568-A
Standard.
4. Nominal outside diameter shall not exceed 6mm.
5. Cable shall meet NEC, CMR and CMP rated insulation and jacket
material as required for specific installation.
6. Data cable shall have a yellow jacket.
7. Voice cable shall have a blue jacket
C. Voice Riser Cables shall be installed to meet the requirements of the

following standards:
1. EIA/TIA-568-A, Category 5.
2. Cable shall meet NEC, CMR and CMP rated insulation and jacket
material as required for specific installation.
D. Data Patch Cables shall be Category 6 patch cable with 8-pin modular plug
termination. Refer to specification for Voice and Data Horizontal Cables.
E. Voice Patch Cables shall be UTP 4 pair patch cable Category 5 with 110
modular plug termination.
201
2.03 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT
1. AMP.
2. Leviton Telcom.
3. Avaya Communications.
4. Ortronics.
5. Siemens.
B. Voice and Data outlets shall be 8-pin modular outlets rated by manufacturer
to meet the cables performance as described earlier and with cover plate
matching the approved wiring devices finish.
C. Wall outlets for wall mount telephones: shall be single gang receptacles with
6 or 8-pin modular jack insert and mounting posts for wall mount telephone.
Jack shall have Insulation Displacing Connectors (IDC) direct connection.
D. Patch panel frames and terminal blocks shall be 110 type high density punch
down type systems with IDC terminations. Frames shall include cable
management channel behind the wiring block and patch cable management
between each 100 pair wiring block group.
1. Connecting blocks shall be four pair type to match station cable pair
count.
E. Patch panels 8-pin modular jack fields shall be 483 mm wide panels for
installation on 483mm inch racks and cabinets. Panels shall have 8-pin
modular jacks on front with label strips and IDC termination hardware on the
back to terminate 4 pair UTP cables.
F. Terminal racks shall be 483 mm equipment racks with 1778 mm of vertical

space and 483 mm equipment mounting width. Racks shall be tapped with 8
mm machine screw threaded holes at EIA spacings. Provide 77 mm to 101
mm wide vertical cable management channels on outside ends of each rack.
2.05 CABLE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. The cable management software shall be the product of the testing

equipment used for link certification.
202
2.06 FIRE STOPPING:

A. Comply with Division 2 Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be by installers trained in the installation of voice and

extended performance data grade cable and equipment.
B. All installing personnel shall be trained in the proper installation of extended

performance data cable prior to installation by outside training course or in-
house training program. A letter describing training program shall be
included in the shop drawing submittals.
C. All equipment shall be installed in a neat professional manner.
D. Cables shall be concealed within conduit or raceway below finished ceilings

and continuously below exposed structural ceilings.
E. Cables routed above accessible ceilings and in utility areas shall be installed
in cable Trunking and in conduits provided in the building.
F. All communications outlet boxes shall be finished with a cover plate, including
outlets in modular furniture. Blank plates shall be provided for all boxes that
are not cabled at this time as indicated on the plans.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Refer to EIA/TIA 607 and NEC.
B. Grounding system is provided by electrical work of the building project.
3.03 TESTING
A. Perform the following tests for voice and data station cables:
1. For 100% of the pairs perform testing as described in bulletin TSB-67,

level I, basic link. Record the results of the test with cable
identification and provide as part of the as-built drawings and cable
management software. Any cable that fails shall be replaced and
retested.
B. Record test data to the cable management software data base. Data base
shall be loaded with structured cabling information for each drop, room
203
closet, general path, cross connects completed by contractor, for riser cables
and terminal block layouts.
3.04 CUSTOMER INSTRUCTION
A. Provide instruction and training to Owner’s personnel for the following:
1. Labelling system and cross reference to documentation. Provide 1/2

hour.
2. Interpretation of cable test results. Provide 2 hours
3. Operation of the cable management software. Provide 2 hours
204
SECTION 16720
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Integrated fire detection and voice evacuation system to be intelligent device

addressable, analogue detecting, low voltage and modular with multi-plex
communication techniques in full compliance with all applicable codes and
standards. The features described in this specification are a requirement for
this project and shall be furnished by the successful Contractor.
1. The system as described shall be installed, tested, and delivered to

the owner in first class condition. The system shall include all required
hardware, raceways, interconnecting wiring and soft-ware to
accomplish the requirements of this specification and the Contract
Drawings, whether itemized or not.
2. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art
products of a single manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and
sale of analogue fire detection devices for over ten years. The
manufacturer shall have an installed base of analogue systems as a
reference.
a. In the interest of job coordination, the Contractor shall contract

with a single source for supplying job materials, services, and
programming, including final inspection/test services for the fire
alarm system.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Division 15 Fire Protection System
B. Division 15 HVAC
C. Division 16 Electrical Specifications
1.03 MATERIALS AND SERVICES
A. The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements:
1. Master system CPU and share units including all fire detection, voice
control modules and amplifiers.
2. Circuit interface panels including all modules.
205
3. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers.
4. Equipment enclosures.
5. Intelligent addressable manual pull stations, heat detectors, analogue

smoke detectors, strobe lights both internal and external alarm
monitoring modules, and supervised control modules.
6. Annunciator panels, printers and video display terminals.
7. Audible and visual evacuation signals.
8 Color graphic displays and historical archiving.
9. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning

system.
10. Wiring and raceway.
11. Installation, testing and certification and education labor.
12. Multiplex, system driven remote annunciators.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The standards listed below form a part of this publication to the extent
referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic
designation only. The latest version of each listed publication shall be used
as a guide unless the authority having jurisdiction has adopted an earlier
version.
B. Factory Mutual (FM) AG Approval Guide.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 72A Local Protective Signaling Systems.
3. NFPA 72B Auxiliary Protective Signaling System.
4. NFPA 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling System.

5. NFPA 72D Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems.
6. NFPA 72E Automatic Fire Detectors.
206
7. NFPA 72F Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems.
8. NFPA 72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems
9. NFPA 72H Testing Procedure for Protective Signaling Systems.
10. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
D. Local Codes.
E. Local authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1. UL 864/UOJZ, Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems.
APOU
2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signalling

Systems.
3. UL 268 A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
4. UL 217 Smoke Detectors Single Station.
5. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems.
6. UL 228 Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems.
7. UL 464 Audible Signalling Appliances.
8. UL 1638 Visual Signalling Appliances.
9. UL 38 Manually Activated Signalling Boxes.
10. UL 1076 Proprietary Burglary / Grade AA.
11. UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems.
12. UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
13. UL 1711 Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
207
A. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in installing fire alarm and
detection systems of the same type and design as specified. Include the
names and locations of at least two such installations, specify type and
design for each system and furnish documentation that the system has
performed satisfactorily for the preceding 18 months.
B. Provide the services of a representative or technician from the manufacturer

of the system, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of
system provided. The technician shall supervise installation, software
documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification
of the system. The technician shall provide the required instruction to the
Owner's personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Include the following information in the equipment submittal:
1. Power calculations.
a. Battery capacity calculations.

b. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment.
c. Alarm power requirements for all equipment.
d. Justification showing power requirements of the system power
supplies.
e. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs in worst case
condition.
2. Complete manufacturer's catalogue data including supervisory power

usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting
requirements.
3. Submit panel configuration and interconnection of modules and all

other data as required to make an informed judgement regarding
product suitability. As a minimum, data shall be submitted on the
following:
a. Master system CPU including all fire detection and voice control
modules.
b. Circuit interface panels including all modules.
c. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers.
d. Equipment enclosures.
208
e. Intelligent addressable manual pull stations, heat detectors,

analog smoke detectors, alarm monitoring modules, and
supervised control modules.
f. Annunciator panels, printers and video display terminals.
g. Audible and visual evacuation signals and devices.
h. Color graphic displays and historical archiving.
i. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete
functioning system.
j. Wiring. Wire and cable shall be listed for fire alarm circuits,
color coded insulation, solid copper conductors, as per local governing
electrical and fire code requirements. All wiring and cable shall be sized
and installed in accordance with the system
Manufacturer’s instructions and code requirements. All Fire Alarm system
cables to be fire resistant as per BS: 6387 category C, W & Z. Provide
minimum 2- hour fire
Rated feeders from central fire alarm control panel to each DGP and to first
device in
Each fire zone, and any other requirement as per local fire authority
requirements. Refer to Section 16050 for additional requirements
.
k. Multiplex, system driven remote annunciators.
l. Interface module and wiring configuration from local system to
Fire Command System.
4. Data describing more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to
indicate the type the contractor intends to provide for a given
application. The Engineer will assume that all options not crossed out
in submitted material will be furnished for the project. Submit copies of
UL listing or FM approval data showing compatibility of the proposed
device or appliance and the panel being provided.
5. Submit the following drawing for the proposed system.
a. Floor plans showing all initiating, end of line, supervisory,

indicating appliances, and output control devices; including
circuit interface panels, enunciators, printers, video display
terminals, color graphic displays and the main CPU locations.
b. Raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size,
showing the percentage of allowable National Electric Code fill
used.
c. Indicate ambient sound levels used by the system layout
designer for sound level calculations and mathematical
justification for signal placement to meet the code required 15
dBA above ambient for audible warning signals.
209
d. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals

used for all electrical connections to the system devices and
panels.
e. Complete single-line riser diagram showing all equipment and
the size type and number of all conductors.
6. A complete proposed system database including a description of all

logic strings, control by event programming and point identification
labels on a CD and in a formatted printed form, required for off site
editing, uploading and downloading shall be submitted for evaluation
by the owner. A programming manual shall accompany the submitted
program and shall be adequate to allow understanding, operation and
editing by the system owner.
7. Statements shall be included, with copies of required licensing,

verifying the qualifications of the installer as specified.
1.07 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
B. For use in system test, a complete operation and maintenance manual with
two sets of proposed installation drawings shall be submitted.
1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover:
a. "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

b. Building location.
c. The name of the contractor, system manufacturer and system
subcontractor.
d. The name and phone number of the fire department required to
respond to alarms at the project location.
2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings
folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be
circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain
detailed operation and control of each item of equipment and a control
sequence describing start up instructions.
Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions,

safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and software
documentation.
C. Upon completion of the installation, record drawings shall be submitted on

each system before final acceptance of the work. Furnish to the Engineer a
set of record drawings including system diagrams for each system. The
210
record drawings masters shall be on reproducible mylar film, uniformly sized

as required for legibility and reproduction and on CD in DXF format.
D. To avoid delays in the progress of the project, submittals proposing
substitutions to the specified equipment shall be provided for evaluation by
the designer together with the required documentation within thirty days of
the award of the contract. A single evaluation of substitute submittal data will
be provided for proposed substitutes.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Comply with the requirement of Contract Conditions.
B. Warranty all control equipment, analogue sensors and addressable I/O

modules for three years. All other materials, peripherals, installation and
workmanship for one year from date of acceptance unless otherwise
specified.
C. Guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or

electrical defects for one year from date of final acceptance of the system.
1.08 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Activation of any fire alarm initiating device shall cause the following actions
and indications:
1. Display a custom message describing the device originating the alarm

condition at the Fire Command Center, and at the local fire alarms
control panel LCD alphanumeric display. Remote LCD annunciators
shall display the alarm condition via unique messages as required by
the system owner. LED type annunciator displays, conventional and
graphic style shall indicate alarm zoning as specified.
2. Sound, a custom message in Arabic and English through the speaker

circuits, and activate the visual signals on the floor of alarm, the floor
below and the floor above
a. Audible/Visual signals shall be silencable from the fire alarm

control panel by an alarm silence switch.
The alarm indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator on
the control panel and the alarm signals shall resound for a
subsequent alarm condition, reported by a different device.
b. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not
be silencable while the sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of
flow equal to a single head.
211
3. Shut down all air handling units within the smoke zone of the alarm
origin.
4. Provide for an alarm system closure for connection to an off site
reporting device.
5. Close all smoke doors shown on the drawings to prevent the spread of smoke.
6. Start smoke extract and pressurisation fans in the area of the alarm
origin.
7. Record within the non-volatile system historical memory the

occurrence of the event, the time and date of occurrence and the
device initiating the event.
B. Initiation of an alarm from a smoke detector installed in the supply air stream
of any s air handling unit not operating as part of an engineered smoke
removal system shall cause the shutdown of that fan.
C. Activation of any supervisory circuit, supervised valve closure, fire pump

trouble shall cause the following actions and indications:
1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the Fire

Station, and at the local fire alarm control panel alphanumeric LCD
display.
2. Activate supervisory audible and visual signals.
a. Audible signals shall be silencable from the fire alarm control

panel by an alarm acknowledge switch.
The supervisory indication shall be transferred to a visual
indicator on the control panel and the supervisory signals shall
resound for a subsequent supervisory condition, reported by a
different device.
3.The capability to furnish an alarm system closure for connection to an

off site reporting device.
4. Record the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the
event.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm systems by the

following or equal approved.
1. Fenwal Inc.
212
2. Honeywell Inc.
3. Notifier Co.
4. Simplex
2.02 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall
be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories,
devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on the
Contract Drawings and installation specifications shall be the best suited for
the intended or if provided by different manufacturer, recognized as
compatible by both manufacturers.
B. Service availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and
have a fully equipped service organization capable of guaranteeing response
time within 8 hours of service calls, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to service
completed systems.
2.03 CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Control Panel shall be an intelligent response controller. The controller

shall be modular for ease of installation, maintenance, and configuration. The
controller shall be capable of supporting up to 2000 supervised
inputs/outputs per single line network without any change in hardware. The
controller shall have an 80 character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) that offers
(2) 40 character lines.
B. The controller shall differentiate between long term drift above the prealarm
threshold (maintenance alert, indicative of the need for cleaning) and a fast
rise above the prealarm threshold (indicative of a smoldering alert on the
LCD only and shall not be confused as a trouble or an alarm. The unit shall
contain a real time clock, tactile feel keypad LED's for Normal, Alarm,
Supervisory, Trouble and Test/Program indications.
E. The Controller shall support and control any combination up to 28 additional

true networked slave control modules. Audio Control Panel (2/6 channel),
serial annunciators and switches. Each controller shall contain a
printer/programming port for programming locally via an IBM PC or down
loading through modems from a remote PC. When operational each
controller shall support a printer through the port and be capable of message
routing. The controller shall support up to 10 Intelligent loop cards, each
card shall support 90 intelligent sensors and 90 intelligent modules as a
minimum. Each sensor shall respond to a panel poll for information with an
analog representation of measured fire related phenomena (smoke density,
213
particles of combustion, temperature). Such response proves end to end

sensor response including the operation of the sensor electronics. Systems
which only monitor the presence of a conventional detector in an addressable
base shall not be acceptable.
F. The Controller shall have the following additional features without any
changes in hardware of firmware:
1. Logic Statements.
2. Time Controls.
3. Sequences.
4. Actions.
5. Weekday/Holiday Schedules.
6. Guard Patrols.
7. Analogue Value Reporting of all analogue sensors and traditional

zones.
8. Maintenance Reporting By Intelligent Sensor.
9. Sensitivity Setting by Sensor (Within UL Limits).
10. Sensitivity Setting changed by time (Day/Night Mode).
11. Alarm Verification by point or zone (0 to 60 Seconds).
12. Print a history of Sensors Activating the Verification Cycle.
13. On demand system condition printouts (status).
14. Up to 99 priorities for any event driven relay/output.
15. Enabling and Disabling of any system device and inputs.
16. Ground Fault Detection on all system device and inputs.
17. Three Types of One Man Walktests.
18. Normal and Silent Walktest.
19. Field Programmable Walktest.
214
2.04 POWER SUPPLIES
A. The Power Supply/Charger, shall use one unit space in the cabinet and
provides the means of automatically supplying 24 Vdc operating and
emergency power to the system. The power supply shall be high efficiency,
switch mode solid state design with built in maximum transient protection
including UL recognized EMI filter, spark gaps, either 3.5 or 7.0 amp output)
of usable, fully regulated, power limited 24 Vdc to the operate listed signaling
devices. In addition the power supply shall provide 24 Vdc to operate (3)
distributed amplifiers. The power supply shall provide diagnostic LEDs to
notify the operator upon AC power and/or the control unit CPU battery
detection, system ground fault detection when connected to the control unit
and shall be capable of charging from 5 AH to 60 AH batteries of either gel
electrolyte no maintenance or nickel cadmium. Upon AC power failure the
power supply shall automatically transfer the system to battery backup and
power the system for 48 hours minimum normal operation followed by 30
minutes Alarm/Evacuation mode. The battery charger may be disabled to
provide additional auxiliary output power if required.
B. Features
1. High Efficiency Magnetic Field Switch Mode Design.
2. Completely Power Limited.
3. 100% Fully Regulated Power Supply.
4. Primary Power (AC) Presence Monitor.
5. Automatic / Demand Battery Charger Circuit.
6. Dual 3.5 A Output with Electronic Current Limiting.
7. All Conditions Monitored & displayed.
8. Ground Fault Detection Circuit.
9. Battery Monitor Circuit; Hi/Lo Voltage and Open.
10. Lead Acid and NI-CAD Compatible.
11. 5-60 AH Battery Charging Capacity.
12. Instant Transfer to Battery upon Thermal Overload.
215
13. Relay Outputs for Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory Condition.
14. Dedicated Output for Distributed Amplifiers.
2.05 INTELLIGENT LOOP I/O CARD
A. The I/O Card shall plug into 1 slot in the Controller and serve as the interface
between the controller and the Addressable Intelligent Analog Sensors and
single and multi-zone I/O Modules. The I/O Card shall be for Class “A” wiring
and capable of supporting and providing positive point identification for up to
90 intelligent sensors and 90 I/O modules or 12 multi-zone I/O Modules or
may be intermixed. The I/O Card contains its own dedicated resident Central
Processor Unit (CPU) and shall provide power, process, store, control and
communicate with sensors and I/O modules.
B. The Controller through the I/O Card shall provide for sensitivity adjustment
and alarm verification by point, process the analogue values from all
intelligent devices on it's loop and determine Normal, Alarm, and Trouble
conditions. The average time to detect an alarm shall be 2 seconds or less.
The polling time for the system remains the same regardless of the number of
intelligent loops in the system up to it's maximum of 10 loops.
2.06 INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide intelligent analogue smoke and thermal sensors as shown. All

intelligent sensors, single I/O modules shall communicate with the I/O card
over 2 wires (twisted pair). The Detectors addresses shall be software
assigned via the main controller to all devices connected. All sensors shall
provide dual alarm LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal operating and
communication conditions, and both LEDs shall illuminate at a steady state
when the sensor's sensitivity level (analog value) exceeds the predetermined
limit and commands from the control panel place the sensor into the alarm
state. All sensors shall include a test means, whereby the sensor's that have
entered the alarm verification mode shall be displayed on the Network Master
LCD display, or vectored to a hard copy printer, or by locally activating the
sensor's internal magnetic switch.
B. Activating the sensor remotely by a control panel command without the

control panel being in other than the test mode, shall not be allowed. When
the sensors reach a predetermined sensitivity the Network Master shall
automatically display a maintenance alert message. All single I/O modules
shall contain an alarm LED that shall flash during normal operation and
communication and shall go to a steady state when commanded by the
control panel that an alarm or supervisory value has been detected.
216
1. Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor (All Detectors for Guest Rooms shall

be provided with sounder base for guest notification- rooms for hearing
impaired guests shall be provide with Horn/strobe light notification
devices)
The Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor shall connect wires (twisted pair)

to the I/O card. The sensor shall be easy to install into a twist-lock
base. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type identification so the
system can identify the type of sensor. The sensor shall be continually
monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the
environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). The sensor
shall use the photoelectric principle to measure smoke density and
shall on command from the control panel send data to the panel
representing the analog value of the smoke density. The sensor shall
provide advanced indication of the analog value of the level of smoke
density to the panel that maintenance is required, reducing the
maintenance required to inspect routinely all sensors in order to
ensure normal operation. The sensor’s sensitivity shall be adjustable
by device. The unit shall have built-in heat detection element’s (dual
technology).
2. Intelligent Thermal Sensor
The Intelligent Analog Thermal Sensor shall connect with 2 wire

(twisted pair) to the I/O card. The sensor shall be easy to install into a
twist-lock base. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type
identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The
sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their
sensitivity, because of the environment (dirt, temperature, humidity,
etc.). The sensor shall use dual solid state from 10 oC, to +60 oC and
provide a fast response to rapid increases in temperature. The sensor
on command from the control panel, shall send data to the panel
representing the analogue value of the ambient temperature.
3. Intelligent Monitor Module
The Intelligent Monitor Module shall be used to connect a supervised

conventional initiating device or zone of supervised conventional
initiating devices (water flow switches, tamper switches, manual pull
stations 4 wire smoke detectors conventional 4 wire duct/plenum
detectors, etc. to one of the 2 wire intelligent analog loop cards. The
module shall mount in a 100 mm square, 6 mm deep (4 inch square, 2
1/8 inch) deep electrical box and shall be capable of Class "A" or "B"
supervised wiring to the initiating device. In order to maintain proper
supervision there shall be no T-taps allowed on Class "A" lines. The
217
module (Class "B" only) shall mount behind the Manual Station in a
single gang electrical box.
4. Intelligent Control Module
The Intelligent Control Module shall be used to connect and supervise,

conventional indicating device or zone of indicating devices that
require an external power supply, such as horns, strobes, bells,
speakers or telephones to one of the 2 wire intelligent analog loop I/O
cards (Class "A" or "B"). The control Module shall be capable of
operating as a relay (dry contact form C), to control Door Holders, Air
Handling units etc. The module shall mount in a 100 mm square, 6
mm deep (4 inch square, 2 1/8 inch deep) electrical box and shall be
capable of Class "A" or "B" supervised wiring to the indicating or
control device.
5. Isolating Module
The Isolating Module shall be an automatic switch, which will open

when the intelligent loop voltage drops below 4 volts. The Isolator
Module shall be placed between groups of sensors/intelligent modules
on the loop in order to protect the intelligent loop if a short (less than 4
volts) should occur. If a short occurs between any two 2 isolators,
then both isolators switch to open circuit conditions and isolate the
group of sensors/modules between them. The remaining devices on
the intelligent loop shall continue to operate and communicate
normally. One isolator shall be provided to isolate between two fire
zones. Additional isolators shall be provided within each fire zone to
divide the zone detectors into groups of maximum 20 addressable
devices. The Isolator shall be designed to mount in a 100 mm square,
50 mm electrical box.
6. Remote Zone Module (RZM)
The Remote Zone Module Class B, shall be a multizone, multipurpose

addressable I/O module that shall connect to the I/O Card loop. The
RZM shall provide eight 8 selectable for alarm, supervisory, or security
initiating circuits (2 wire smoke detectors, waterflow, heat, tamper,
etc.). The 8 2-wire inputs shall be jumper selectable for standard N/O
devices or verifiable), standard 30 seconds 2 wire smoke detectors. It
shall provide two supervised single channel outputs (bells, horns,
strobes, etc.), two supervised dual channel outputs that may be
selected as audible circuits (9) speakers, telephones, etc.,) and two
non supervised form C dry relay contacts (elevator recall, doors
holders, fans, etc.). If the RZM is not polled or loses communications
with the I/O Card it shall become a stand alone unit and perform all it's
pre-programmed functions unless there is a loss of 24 V DC. The
218
RZM shall use 1 unit mounting space mount in any of the standard
cabinets or mount in it's own unique cabinet.
7. Audible/Visible Appliances
The unit shall be suitable for indoor and outdoors applications. The
unit shall be with the following minimum specificiation.
- 30 Candella for indoor application and 110 Candella for

outdoors application.
- Compatible with ADA requirements.
- It shall be possible to be mounted horizontally or vertically.
- 24 VDC powered Xenon flashtube.
- Wiring terminals shall be separate for both auto/power.
- Synchronous type.
- Built in horn model.
- Flash rate 1 Hz.
- Sound pressure level 87 dB at 3m.
- The unit shall be suitable for installation in a harsh
environment.
2.07 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
A. Provide manual station as shown, the single action manual station shall be of
the non coded type with terminals and contain an internal toggle switch. The
red manual station shall be constructed of rugged aluminum with a key reset
switch for positive resetting action and shall be available with an optional
break glass rod. The manual station shall be used with the addressable
monitor module where point addressability is required. The manual station
shall mount to a standard single gang switch box or an optional red surface
mount box.
B. Provide speakers and speaker strobes in wall or ceiling mount configuration

as shown. They shall be UL 1480 listed to meet the demanding needs of Fire
Protection Systems. The speaker shall be a high efficiency sealed back
speaker design for maximum output. They shall be a high efficiency and
designed for voice clarity and low frequency fire evacuation signals such as
"slow whoop". The speaker shall have a peak output of up to 96 DBA at
5790 mm (19 ft.) with four field selectable power taps (1/4 W to 2 W) for
optimum audibility. They shall be flush wall or ceiling mount to standard 100
mm square box. The speaker shall include an integral blocking capacitor for
DC line supervision and screw terminals for in and out wiring. They shall
operate from standard signalling circuits or addressable single or multi-zone
I/O Modules. The integral strobe shall be UL listed for Fire Protection
Service and shall produce 8000 peak candlepower (0.6 Watt) or shall be
70,000 candlepower.
219
C. Speakers and Strobes shall operate on nominal 24 V DC (18-31.2 V DC) and

be compatible with DC supervision of alarm lines and satisfy the latest code
requirements for visual signaling. All models shall have white lenses with red
FIRE lettering with a red mounting grille and flash approximately once per
second. Speaker and strobe shall operate independently or in unison.
2.08 TWO-WAY FIRE DEPARTMENT COMMUNICATION
A. Provide two way communication module to call pre-programmed fire brigade

lines upon fire incident/general evacuation mode.
2.09 COMBINATION AUDIBLE/VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Combination audible/visual notification appliance shall provide the same

requirements as individual units except they shall mount as a unit in standard
backboxes. All units shall be factory assembled. Any other audible
indicating appliance employed in the fire alarm systems shall be approved by
the authority having jurisdiction.
2.10 COLOUR DYNAMIC GRAPHIC ALARM DISPLAY TERMINAL
A. System capacities and capabilities
1. The color graphics display system shall consist of a Windows based

computer system, complete with keyboard, floppy and hard disk drives,
DVD R/RW, mouse, printer and color monitor. The system shall be
capable of being expanded up to the maximum capacity of the fire
alarm system. The system shall be field programmable.
2. In an alarm or trouble condition the following shall occur:
a. Sound an audible at the color graphics display location.

b. Write the details of the actuation to a system log file on the
color graphics system hard disk drive.
c. Print the details of the actuation to the system printer.
d. Activate the color graphic display system controls.
The system shall have the following minimum requirements:
i. "Zoom In" and "Zoom Out"; providing a minimum of ten

levels of zoom.
ii. "Next Alarm", provide access to the next active device in
alarm.
iii. "Show Troubles", provide access to devices in trouble
should alarms be active.
220
iv. "Show Alarms", provides access to devices when viewing

troubles. Alarms shall be prioritized over supervisory,
trouble, security conditions, and any new alarm shall be
automatically displayed.
v. "Previous”, provides access to the previous event of any
type in the queue.
vi. "Show Supervisory", provides access to devices in a
supervisory condition, should alarms be active.
vii. "Show Security", provides access to a device in a
security condition, should alarms be active.
3. The system shall have the capacity to sequence up to 190

simultaneous alarms, 190 troubles, 190 supervisors and 190 security
events.
4. System configuration shall be menu driven and capable of being

operated by a person with no previous computer programming
experience.
B. Equipment
1. Furnish current industry standard branded (PC with minimum

specification as follows:
PC with a Pentium 4 processor with at a minimum processing speed of
700 MHZ.The power supply shall be rated at a minimum of 180 W
continuous load. The computer shall have at least one 3 1/2" high
density floppy diskette drive CD Read/Write Drive, DVD Read/Write
Drive and be equipped with at least 1 Gegabyte dynamic random
access memory and 160 Gegabyte Hard Drive, optical mouse
,enhanced keyboard and multimedia cards/speakers.
2. The computer shall have two serial RS 232 input/output ports

configured as COM 1 for communications with the FACP and COM 2
for interface to optional touch screen. Communications to the fire
alarm control panel shall be via an interface module. This module,
supplied by the fire alarm control panel manufacturer, shall contain the
circuitry to interface the computer RS 232 format configured as COM 1
with conversion to 20 MA current loop or other long distance
transmission for communication to the fire alarm control panel.
3. The monitor shall be 19” Flat Screen.
4. A logging Laser printer shall be installed adjacent to the graphics

terminal. This printer shall be compatible to the systems character set
with a parallel data connection to the graphics computer parallel port
designated as LPT1.
221
C. Software:
1. The software shall control the operations, functions and display of the
graphics system and provide for automatic boot up and run from the
hard disk drive of the computer.
2. All project specific actuating device programming shall be capable of

being carried out on site via password access.
3. The graphics system shall monitor all alarm, supervisory, trouble and
security conditions detected by the fire alarm control panel and
provide separate disk based log files, for each condition.
These logs may be enabled, disabled, or cleared with password

access. These log files are to be continually appended until manually
cleared so as to provide complete historical information of all alarms
and troubles.
This log information is not to be lost upon power failure or fire alarm
control panel reset. A utility file shall be provided to sort the log data
by date or by device and display this information either on the screen
or the system printer.
5. The system shall be capable of automatically displaying a device

specific custom message of 70 characters for each actuating device
connected to the fire alarm control panel. Up to 190 current alarms
and 190 current troubles, 190 current supervisors and 190 current
security events shall be able to be displayed.
6.When an alarm or trouble is registered at the fire alarm control panel

the graphics system shall display the first screen image for the first
actuated device.The system shall be capable of zooming in for further
information up ten (10) times if required.
At all times when in the alarm or trouble mode the fire control panel
status i.e. number of current alarms and or troubles is to be displayed
on the graphics screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Show a general layout of the complete system including equipment

arrangement specific to the equipment manufacturer’s requirements. It shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify dimensions and assure
compatibility of all other systems interfacing with the fire alarm system.
222
1. Identify on the drawings, conduit and conductor sizes and types with
number of conductors in each conduit. Provide each conduit and
device with a unique identification. For addressable alarm initiation
devices, the system identifier shall be the system address for that
device. Signals shall be sequentially numbered as the address of the
controlling module.
2. Indicate on the point to point wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring

within the panel between modules, and connecting wiring to the field
device terminals.
3. Provide mounting details of FACP and other boxes to building

structure, showing fastener type, sizes, material and embedded depth
where applicable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of NEC, NFPA 70 and

NFPA 72 (A to G).
B. Fasten equipment to structural members of building or metal supports

attached to structure, or to concrete surfaces.
1. Use clamping devices for attaching to structural steel, or when

clamping is impractical, obtain written authority to weld or to drill.
2. Fasten equipment to concrete or masonry with expansion anchors.
3. Fasten equipment to drywall by screws into studs, and to metal wall

panels by weld studs, bolts or self taping metal screws.
4. Do not install conduit raceways and boxes in positions that interfere

with the work of other trades.
5. Attach nameplates on panels or other components as specified.
6. Cable types, method of installation and circuit identification shall be in

accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3.03 DEVICES
A. Relays and other devices to be mounted in auxiliary panels are to be

securely fastened to avoid false indications and failures due to shock or
vibration.
223
B. Wiring within subpanels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to

equipment for adjustment and maintenance.
C. Detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72. Detectors shall be

at least 300 mm from any part of any lighting fixture. Detectors shall be
located at least 900 mm from diffusers of air handling systems. Each
detector shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware as required
by its mounting location. Detectors which mount in free space shall be
mounted directly to the end of the stubbed down rigid conduit drop. Conduit
drops shall be firmly secured to minimize detector sway. Where length of
conduit drop from ceiling or wall surface exceeds 900 mm, sway bracing shall
be provided.
D. Notification appliances shall be mounted a minimum of 2.4 m above the

finished floor unless limited by ceiling height or otherwise indicated.
E. Annunciator equipment provided shall be mounted where indicated.
F. Devices exposed to external weather shall be of special type they shall be

protected against humidity and off shore weather condition.
3.04 SPLICES AND CABLE TERMINATIONS
A. All splices shall be made using solderless connectors or compression type

terminal strips.All connectors shall be installed in conformance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded

conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have
upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors.
3.05 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
A. Complete and submit to the Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72,

paragraph 2.2.2.
A. Testing, general:
1. All intelligent devices shall be tested for correct address and sensitivity
using test equipment specifically designed for that purpose. These
devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in
an area not visible when installed, showing the system address, initials
of the installing technician and date.
224
2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds
before system is energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings
shall be made as work progresses.
a. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using

schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be
provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.
b. The acceptance inspector shall be notified before the start of
the required tests. All items found at variance with the drawings
or this specification during testing or inspection by the
acceptance inspector, shall be corrected.
c. Test reports shall be delivered to the acceptance inspector as
completed.
3. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the
system tests shall be made available by the installing contractor. The
following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:
a. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed

equipment.
b. Multimeter for reading voltage current and resistance.
c. Intelligent device programmer/tester.
d. Laptop computer with programming software for any required
program revisions.
e. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and
supplies.
f. Spare printer paper.
g. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow
through air duct smoke detector sampling assemblies.
h. Decibel meter.
4. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing
Contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the acceptance
inspector.
5. System wiring: Fire alarm circuits shall be tested for continuity,

grounds, and short circuits.
B. Acceptance testing
1. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm
system components and installation will be prepared by the engineer
in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 72E NFPA 72H and this
specification. The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance
of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the
correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming.
225
2. A program matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor

referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a
result of an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs
programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any", "or",
"not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; the complete output
equation shall be referenced in the matrix.
3. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator

displays and logging printers shall be prepared by the installing
contractor prior to the ATP.
4. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings in co-
ordination with the documents specified under paragraph 3.01 during
the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed.
In conducting the ATP, the acceptance inspector shall request

demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items
tested shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system
response and correct subsequent system operation in the event
of:
i. Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog signaling
circuit.
ii. Open, shorted and grounded network signaling circuit.
iii. Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits.
iv. Open, shorted and grounded speaker, telephone circuits.
v. Intelligent device removal.
vi. Primary power or battery disconnected.
vii. Incorrect device at address.
viii. Printer trouble, off line or out of paper.
b. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be
demonstrated as follows:
i. All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed.
ii. Audibility and visibility at required levels.
c. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:
i. Correct message display for each alarm input at the control
panel, each remote alpha-numeric display and each CRT
terminal.
ii. Correct annunciator light for each alarm input at each
annunciator and color graphic terminal as shown on the
drawings.
iii. Correct printer logging for all system activity.
d. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as
follows:
i. Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input.
226
ii. Trouble signals received for disconnect.

e. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:
i. System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of
time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm
condition shall be created and the system shall perform as
specified for a period as specified.
ii. System primary power shall be restored for 48 hours and
system charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a
fully charged battery bank.
iii. System battery voltages and charging currents shall be
checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes
and displayed on the LCD display.
f. Fireman's HVAC override system functions shall be
demonstrated as follows:
i. Operation of key lockout switch preventing unauthorized
operation of controls.
ii. On/off control of each controlled element and test for
interaction of other automatic and manual control functions
while in the over-ride mode.
iii. Correct status display of monitored elements.
iv. Correct logging of activity to printer and historical memory
as programmed.
5. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed

during the ATP procedure, at the discretion of the acceptance
inspector, the test shall be terminated.
a. The installing Contractor shall retest the system, correcting all

deficiencies and providing test documentation to the
acceptance inspector.
b. The acceptance inspector may elect to require the complete
ATP to be preformed again if, in his opinion, modifications to
the system hardware or software warrant complete retesting.
c. Changes made to a systems configuration program required by
the acceptance inspector or to comply with the systems
operating parameters shall be validated to insure that in making
the software programming change no other part of the systems
operation was effected. The validation shall utilize system
software which meets the requirements of NFPA 72 section
7-1.6 "System Reacceptance Testing" as specified in the NFPA
72 National Fire Alarm Code 1993 edition. Change validation
methods other than that described will not be considered
acceptable and shall allow the acceptance inspector to require
the complete ATP to be performed again.
227
3.07 DOCUMENTATION
A. System documentation shall be furnished to the owner and shall include but
not be limited to the following:
1. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of

reproducible masters and drawings on CD in a DXF, BMP format.
2. System operation, installation and maintenance manuals.
3. Written documentation for all logic modules as programmed for system

operation with a matrix showing interaction of all input signals with
output commands.
4. Documentation of system voltage, current and resistance readings

taken during the installation, testing and ATP phases of the system
installation.
5. System program showing system functions, controls and labeling of

equipment and devices. Also provide a CD with system file.
3.08 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish all test equipment as required to program devices and test the
system, specifically an intelligent device tester and programmer.
3.09 SERVICES
A. Warrant the entire system against mechanical and electrical defects for a
period described in the Contract general conditions. This period shall begin
upon completed certification and test of the system or upon first beneficial
use of the system, whichever is earlier.
B. The fire alarm system Subcontractor or manufacturer shall offer for the
Owners consideration at the time of system submittal a priced inspection,
maintenance, testing and repair contract in full compliance with the
requirements of NFPA 72 H.
1. The services offered under this Contract shall be performed during the
first year after system acceptance and the Owner shall have the option
of renewing for single or multiple years up to five years at the price
quoted upon completion of the warranty period.
2. The Contractor performing the contract services shall be qualified and

listed to maintain ongoing certification of the completed system to the
UL for specific installed system listing.
228
C. The installation Contractor shall furnish training as follows for a minimum of

four employees of the system user:
1. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgement of alarms.
2. Training in the system operation including manual control of output

functions from the system control panel.
3. Training in the testing of the system including logging of detector

sensitivity, field test of devices and response to common troubles.
4. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 24 hours,

conducted on three successive days, but shall be sufficient to cover all
items specified.
229
SECTION 16740
PUBLIC ADDRESS SOUND SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Complete paging and intercom system.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Standards and Practices of the Sound and Communications Industries.
B. National Electric Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Furnish complete shop drawings of the proposed system including:
The manual shall be bound in a three ring or comb type binder, with
protective covers. The cover must identify the project, system, date and
vendor name. This submittal shall consist of, but not be limited to:

2. Physical and schematic drawings of special and custom components

or hardware. Any special installation requirements shall be listed.
Include panel layouts.
C. Product data sheets with complete technical data for each item being
furnished.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Public Address

Systems of the type required for the project, whose products have been in
B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years in the
installation and service of Public Address communications systems.
230
C. Provide 3 references of projects of comparable size and scope that have

1.05 WARRANTY
B. The system shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of

12 months from the date of handover to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Contract Conditions
2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. System Functions: Include the following:
1. Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal source.

2. Selectively amplifying sound among various microphone outlets and
other inputs.
3. Sound sources shall be routed and amplified through mixers,
preamplifiers, amplifiers, etc., as shown on the drawings.
4. Communicating simultaneously to all zones or selectively to selected
zones regardless of zone or source switch settings.
5. Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all
speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed.
6. Pre-recorded messages via the permanent digital record system are to
be manually switched in, and are to have automatic priority over the
external source introduced previously.
7. Reproducing high-quality sound from source that is free of noise and
distortion at all loudspeakers at all times during equipment operation
including standby mode with inputs off; and output free of nonuniform
coverage of amplified sound.
8. By using the microphone, operator is to have priority over audio or
message cassette inputs within the system.
9. Sound distribution to zones is to be controlled by zone selector
controls.
10. Standby amplifiers takeover.
11. Allow for recording of messages locally in coordination with DCA.
231
12. Interface with fire alarm.

13. Loudspeakers in toilets shall be muted during call to prayer.
B. Expansion Capability: Increase number of loudspeakers in the future by 25

percent above those indicated without adding any internal or external
components or main cable conductors.
C. Interfacing with other systems:
1. Hardware interfacing:
a. Monitoring on BMS for On/Off/Trouble status.
b. Fire alarm muting the music system.
c. Broadcasting of evacuation/alert messages
d. Connection to flight information system
2. Software interfacing:
a. BMS for fault diagnosis.
b. Connection to flight information system
2.3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
A. System is to be designed for public address and pre-recorded message

distribution, with uniform and acceptable level of speech intelligibility.
Design shown on the Drawings is based on selected manufacturers' models,
which are to be checked for performance before implementation. Alternative
system design is to be submitted to the Engineer for approval, with
specification, characteristics, aiming and mounting positions of
loudspeakers and full particulars of calculations and equipment selections.
System design is to be based on the following criteria:
1. Average sound pressure level: 80 to 85 dB with respective amplifiers

set at 50% of maximum volume.
2. Intelligibility : STI : better than 0.5.
3. Sound diffusion level: 10 to 15 dB (A) above ambient noise level.
4. Total harmonic distortion.
a. electronic: less than 1% at specified output level
b. acoustic: less than 3% at specified output level
5. Sound pressure level: 80 to 90 dB A.
6. Frequency response : +/-3 dB over 300 Hz to 10 kHz.
7. Uniformity of coverage : +/- 3 dB (0.5, 1, 2 and 4 kHz).
2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate features to form a complete system. Match components and

interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
232
B. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for

continuous duty, unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal
operation on input power usually supplied at 230 V, 50 Hz.
C. Waterproof Equipment: Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp

locations.
2.5 MIXER-PREAMPLIFIERS
A. The mixer-preamplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the

following facilities:
1. Controls: Power on/off switch, input levels, and master gain.

2. Independent mixing volume for each input,
3. Master volume, bass and treble tone controls,
4. Flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply connection,
5. Input Jacks: Minimum of two. One matched for low-impedance
microphone; the other matchable to cassette deck, CD player, or radio
tuner signals without external adapters.
6. AC and DC fuse protection.
7. It shall be either separately mounted or as an integral part of power
amplifier
B. Performance Characteristics Required
1. Microphone input sensitivity not to be greater than 0.5 mV for rated

output for source impedance of 200 to 600 ohm,
2. High level input sensitivity not to be greater than 400 mV for rated
output for source impedance up to 500 kohm,
3. r.m.s. output level not to be less than 0 dBm,
4. Output impedance : 600 ohm balanced,
5. Preamplifier provides at least 60 dB signal range from noise to
clipping,
6. Frequency response not to vary by more than +/- 2 dB over the
frequency range 50 to 20000 Hz at rated output,
7. Total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 0.1% between
50 and 20 000 Hz, distortion shall not increase at lower power output,
8. Base control +/- 10 dB at 100 Hz,
9. Treble control +/- 10 dB at 10 000 Hz,
10. Noise level to be better than 80 dB below rated output with input
shorted, over the frequency range 50 to 20 000 Hz, unweighted.
2.6 POWER AMPLIFIERS
A. The power amplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the following
facilities :-
233
1. Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter,

2. Mains ‘on’ indicator lamp,
3. Input protection against overload,
4. Volume, bass and treble controls,
5. Balanced floating output of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker
connections,
6. Flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply connection,
7. AC and DC fuse protection,
8. Standard sockets complete with plugs and locking rings for each input
and terminals for loudspeaker output.
9. Rack mountable
1. Input sensitivity shall be matched to preamplifier, and not to be grater

than 0.77 V for rated output for source impedance of 600 ohm,
frequency range 50 to 20000 Hz,
3. Total harmonic distortion at rated output power not to exceed 0.5%
between 50 and 20000 Hz, distortion shall not increase at lower power
output and/or less than full load,
shorted, over the frequency range 50 to 20 000 Hz unweighted,
5. Output regulation to be less than 2 dB from no load to full load, the
amplifier shall be stable under no load conditions.
2.7 MIX-POWER AMPLIFIER
A. The mix-power amplifier shall be fully solid-state, and provided with

balanced floating outputs f 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker connections.
B. As a minimum requirement, the mixer-power amplifier shall be provided with

the following facilities : -
1. Power on/off switch,

2. Mains ‘on’ indicator lamp,
3. Independent mixing volume control for each input,
4. Master volume, bass and treble tone controls,
5. Three-core flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply and
earth connection,
6. AC and DC fuse protection,
7. Standard sockets complete with plugs and locking rings for each input
and terminals for loudspeaker output.
C. Performance Characteristics Required
234

output for source impedance of 200 to 600 ohm balanced,
2. High level input sensitivity not be greater than 400 mV for rated output
for source impedance up to 50 kohm,
3. Preamplifier provided at least 60 dB signal range from noise to
clipping,
frequency range 50 to 20000 Hz, at rated output power,
5. Total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 2% between 50
and 20 000 Hz, distortion shall not increase at lower power output,
shorted, over the frequency range 50 to 15 000 Hz, unweighted.
2.8 CONTROL CIRCUITRY FOR REDUNDANT AMPLIFIER
A. Monitoring Circuit and Sensing Relay: Arranged to detect reduction in

output of power amplifier of 40 percent or greater and, in such event,
transfer load and signal automatically to standby amplifier.
2.9 TAPE RECORDERS
A. Type: Rack mounted, high quality, auto-reverse/ auto- stop, 4-track,

mono/stereo type with speed tolerance of 10%, complying with IEC 60094 or
other approved standard and accepting standard cassettes through front
panel selector switch.
B. The cassette deck shall be of speed 47.5 mm/sec.
C. The cassette deck shall be provided with the following facilities :-
1. Power on/off switch,

2. Microphone and headphone jacks,
3. Input/output level control and meters,
4. Three-digit resettable tape counter,
5. Automatic shut-off at tape end in every tape mode or auto-reverse
mode as required,
6. Noise reduction system.
D. It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics :-
1. Frequency response not to vary be more than +/- 2 dB over the

frequency range 50 to 20000 Hz using ferric oxide tape,
2. Signal-to-noise ratio to be better than 55 dB using ferric oxide tape,
3. Cross-talk attenuation 1000 Hz: better than 50 dB in stereo, better
than 65 dB in mono.
235
4. Wow and flutter to be less than 0.05% r.m.s., weighted in accordance

with BS 4847,
5. Total harmonic distortion to be less than 0.5% using ferric oxide tapes,
6. Fast forward and rewind time not to be more than 90 seconds for C-60
tapes,
output for source impedance of 200 to 600 ohm,
8. Line input sensitivity not to be greater than 78 mV for source
impedance up to 50 kohm,
2.10 CD PLAYER
A. CD Player Type: rack mounted, high quality, with 6 disc changer capability
each, capable of operating continuously and having the following functions:
1. direct access to all 6 disks

2. track programming capability.
B. CD Player Programming: it should be possible to program the CD player to

select from any CD at any order for continuous play.
2.11 RADIO TUNER AM/FM
A. Radio Tuner AM/FM: rack mounted, high quality, shall be of the latest
design and have digital frequency display, 10 memories minimum and auto
scanning. The tuner shall be of the stereophonic type. The frequency
range is 87.5 - 108 MHz for FM and 1600-540 KHz for AM. FM tuners
should be equipped with an external directional antenna for receiving the
various FM programs which can be picked up.
2.12 MICROPHONE
A. Unidirectional Microphone
1. It shall be of dynamic type provided with built-in blast and pop

protection and microphone holder.
2. The microphone shall be provided with a built-in on-off switch and a
suitable length of cable. The required length of cable is specified in the
Particular Specification.
3. All cables for microphones shall be terminated with XLR-type
connectors.
4. Where required, the microphone shall be provided with a tiltable mount
and hardware adaptable to the desk stand.
5. Finish: Satin chrome
6. Mounting: Desk stand with integral-locking, press-to-talk switch.
236
1. On-axis frequency response not to vary by more than +6 dB, -10 dB

over the frequency range 100 to 10 000 Hz, relative to 1 kHz,
2. Sensitivity not to be less than 1.0 mV/Pa (-77 dB ref. 1 V/ubar) at 1
kHz,
3. Distortion to be less than 0.5% at 1 kHz at 30 Pa sound pressure level
input,
4. Front-to-back discrimination ratio to be greater than 15 Db for 300 to 5
000 Hz for unidirectional microphones,
2.13 VOLUME LIMITER/COMPRESSOR
A. Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume

limiter/compressor. Install in central equipment cabinet. Arrange to provide
a constant input to power amplifiers.
1. Frequency Response: 45 to 20,000 Hz, plus or minus 1 dB minimum.

2. Signal Reduction Ratio: At least a 10:1 and 5:1 selectable capability.
3. Distortion: 1 percent, maximum.
4. Rated Output: Minimum of plus 14 dB.
5. Inputs: Minimum of two inputs with variable front-panel gain controls
and VU or dB meter for input adjustment.
2.14 CONTROL CONSOLE
A. Control Console: Modular, desktop cabinet.
1. Housing: Steel, 1.2 mm minimum, with removable front and rear

panels. Side panels are removable for interconnecting side-by-side
mounting.
2. Panel for Equipment and Controls: Each module is nominal 19 inches
wide by 222 mm high.
3. Controls: Include the following:
a. Switching devices to select signal sources for distribution

channels.
b. Program selector switch to select source for each program
channel.
c. Switching devices to select zones for paging.
d. All-call selector switch.
4. Indicators: A visual annunciation for each distribution channel to

indicate source being used.
237
5. Self-Contained Power and Control Unit: A single assembly of basic

control, electronics, and power supply necessary to accomplish
specified functions.
6. Spare Positions: 20 percent spare zone control and annunciation
positions on console.
7. Microphone jack.
2.15 TONE GENERATOR
A. Tone Generator: For clock and program interface.
1. Signals Produced: Minimum of seven distinct, audible signal types

including wail, warble, high/low, alarm, repeating chimes, single-stroke
chime, and tone.
2. Pitch Control: Chimes and tone.
3. Volume Control: All outputs.
4. Activation-Switch Network: Establishes priority and hierarchy of output
signals produced by different activation setups.
2.16 EQUIPMENT CABINET
A. Equipment Cabinet: House amplifiers and auxiliary equipment at each

location.
1. Cabinet Housing: Construct of 1.2-mm steel, minimum, with front- and

rear-locking doors and standard 19-inch racks. Arrange for floor or
wall mounting as indicated. Size to house all equipment indicated plus
20% spare capacity for future equipment over and above space
required for future cassette deck and CD player.
2. Power Provisions: Install a single switch in cabinet to supply cabinet
power distribution system and electrical outlets, uniformly spaced, to
accommodate ac-power cords for each item of equipment.
3. Ventilation: A low-noise fan for forced-air cabinet ventilation. Equip
fan with a filtered input vent and connect to operate from 230-V ac, 50
Hz; separately fused and switchable; arranged to be powered when
main cabinet power switch is on.
2.17 EQUIPMENT RACK
A. Equipment Rack: House amplifiers and auxiliary equipment in standard 19-

inch racks.
1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side,

and arrange controls symmetrically.
2. Power-Supply Connections: Approved plugs and receptacles.
238
3. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they

are accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with each
item removable from rack without disturbing other items or
connections.
4. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front
of rack is occupied by panels.
5. Enclosure Panels: Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use
louvers in panels to ensure adequate ventilation.
6. Finish: Uniform, baked-enamel factory finish over rust-inhibiting
primer.
7. Power-Control Panel: On front of equipment housing, with master
power on/off switch and pilot light; and with socket for 5-A cartridge
fuse for rack equipment power.
8. Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.
9. Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 300 mm o.c. the full height
of rack, to supply rack-mounted equipment.
10. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied
independent of vertical plug strip and located in front and bottom rear
of rack.
11. Spare Capacity: 20 percent spare space capacity in rack for future
equipment.
2.18 MONITOR PANEL
A. Monitor Panel: Mounted above amplifiers.
1. Equip with digital VU or dB meter, speaker with volume control, and

multiple-position rotary selector switch.
2. Connect selector switch and volume control to permit selective
monitoring of output of each separate power amplifier via VU or dB
meter and speaker.
2.19 CONE-TYPE LOUDSPEAKERS
A. Cone-Type Loudspeakers:
1. Minimum Axial Sensitivity: pressure rating of 45 dB.

2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 50 to
20,000 Hz.
3. Size: 200 mm with 25-mm voice coil and minimum 140-g ceramic
magnet.
4. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees.
5. Rated Output Level: 10 W.
6. Matching Transformer: Full-power rated with four standard taps.
Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
239
7. Surface-Mounting Units: Ceiling, wall, or pendant mounting, as

indicated, in steel back boxes, acoustically dampened. Front face of at
least 1.2-mm steel and whole assembly rust proofed and shop primed
for field painting.
8. Flush-Ceiling-Mounting Units: In steel back boxes, acoustically
dampened. Metal ceiling grille with white baked enamel.
2.20 HORN-TYPE LOUDSPEAKERS
A. Horn-Type Loudspeakers:
1. Type: Single-horn units, double-reentrant design, with minimum full-

range power rating of 15 W.
2. Matching Transformer: Full-power rated with four standard taps.
Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
3. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 250 to
20,000 Hz.
4. Dispersion Angle: 130 by 110 degrees.
5. Mounting: Integral bracket.
6. Units in Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled for
environment in which they are located.
2.21 NOISE-OPERATED GAIN CONTROLLER
A. Noise-Operated Gain Controller: Units continuously sense space noise

level and automatically adjust signal level to local speakers.
1. Frequency Response: 20 to 20,000 Hz, plus or minus 1 dB.

2. Level Adjustment Range: 20 dB minimum.
3. Maximum Distortion: 1 percent.
4. Control: Permits adjustment of sensing level of device.
2.22 VOLUME ATTENUATOR STATION
A. Volume Attenuator Station: Wall-plate-mounted autotransformer type with

paging priority feature.
1. Wattage Rating: 10 W, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Attenuation per Step: 3 dB, with positive off position.
3. Insertion Loss: 0.4 dB maximum.
4. Attenuation Bypass Relay: Single pole, double throw. Connected to
operate and bypass attenuation when all-call, paging, program signal,
or prerecorded message features are used. Relay returns to normal
position at end of priority transmission.
5. Label: "PA Volume."
240
2.23 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Microphone Outlet: Three-pole, polarized, locking-type, microphone

receptacles in single-gang boxes. Equip wall outlets with brushed stainless-
steel device plates. Equip floor outlets with gray tapered rubber or plastic
cable nozzles and fixed outlet covers.
B. Headphone Outlet (for the Hearing Impaired): Microphone receptacles in

single-gang boxes. Equip wall outlets with brushed stainless-steel device
plates. Equip floor outlets with gray tapered rubber or plastic cable nozzles
and fixed outlet covers.
2.24 BATTERY BACKUP POWER UNIT
A. Battery Backup Power Unit: Rack-mounted unit consisting of time-delay

relay, sealed lead-calcium battery, battery charger, on/off switch and
"normal" and "emergency" indicating lights, and adequate capacity to supply
maximum equipment power requirements for one hour of continuous full
operation.
1. Arrange unit to supply public address equipment with 12- to 15-V dc

power automatically during an outage of normal 230-V ac power.
2. Arrange for battery to be on float charge when not supplying system
and to transfer automatically to supply system after three to five
seconds of continuous outage of normal power, as sensed by time-
delay relay.
3. Automatic retransfer of system to normal supply when normal power
has been reestablished for three to five seconds continuously.
2.25 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors and Cables: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair,

untinned solid copper.
1. Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 0.8 mm

thick.
2. Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 0.8 mm thick,
over shield with filled interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG tinned, soft-
copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil.
Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 60 percent.
3. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
B. Power cables shall be three-core PVC insulated, non-armoured with copper

conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 to BS 6004 and BS 6346 and complete
with an overall protection sheath of PVC.
241
PART 2. INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be installed in a neat and professional manner.
B. Cabling shall be neatly routed and bundled along the equipment cabinet
sides. Cabling shall not hang or cross in the racks. Cabling shall be run at
right angles to the rack.
C. Cable connectors shall be the mating connector to the terminal on the

equipment. Adapters will not be accepted to interface a cable connector to
the equipment jack.
D. Provide secure mounting, lightning protection and grounding for the exterior
AM/FM antenna assembly per industry standards.
E. Installer shall follow factory installation guidelines for pulling tension and
bending radius for all cables.
F. Cables shall be one continuous piece between each system device.
G. Dress cables routed to equipment with sufficient slack to allow for service of
equipment and avoid strain on connections or cable.
H. Use wire ties for supporting low voltage cables run concealed above ceilings.
Do not run cables loose on ceiling tiles. Support from structure above.
Group cables in bundles.
I. All equipment power and signal wiring shall conform to the National Electrical
Code and to applicable local codes.
J. All equipment and devices shall be securely mounted to a permanent cabinet

or panel. No device shall be supported by it's wires or cables.
K. Terminate each cable to terminal blocks in sequence, including grounding

drain wires.
L. Terminal locations and cables shall be labeled, legibly, with permanent

embossed labels or by labeling pen. Identification shall be labeled on As-
built Drawings.
2.02 SYSTEM TESTS AND PROGRAMMING

A. All system functions shall be tested for proper performance. All test results
shall be documented for inclusion in the as-built manuals.
242
B. Provide complete system programming in coordination with the Owner. The

programming shall be done by a person who has received factory training in
the programming of the installed system. Any programming not coordinated
with the Owner that the Owner wishes to have changed shall be done at no
charge to the Owner.
2.03 TRAINING
B. Provide a minimum of four hours of on-site in-service training in the operation

of the public address sound and communications system. The training shall
be provided by a training specialist specifically schooled in the operation,
programming and features of the installed system. Training provided by
salespeople or installation technicians is not acceptable. The training may be
divided into multiple times as required by the Owner. The hours shall be
documented by the Contractor to verify that specified training has been
provided to the Owner. If the hours are not documented, the Contractor shall
provide additional training to the specified hours.
243
SECTION 16750
LAN NETWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 16 section applies to this section:
1. “Basic Electrical requirements”.
2. “Earthling”.
3. “Raceways and Boxes.
4. “Câble Trayas”.
5. “Wiring Devices”.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section covers the voice and data system work as required for the
project. The system is design to utilize IP telephony which will minimize the
cabling required for the Voice, Data signals onto a common distribution
network.
B. The extent of work of the network is described by the project documents as

indicated on Drawings, in schedules and on single line diagram of the
project.
C. The scope of work of the passive parts of the LAN system shall includes
supply, installation, programming, testing and putting into operation, but is
not limited to following:
1. Screened (FTP) horizontal network and related patch panels.

2. Fiber Optical FO cabling network and related patch panels
connecting the horizontal network.
3. An intelligent infrastructure management solution, consisting of
hardware and software that is capable of providing in real time, end
to end monitoring/tracing starting from the physical layer and that will
monitor and control IP devices that reside on layer 2, 3 and 4 of the
ISO model.
4. Data Racks.
D. Work herein specified, shown on drawings, and other contract documents

required providing a complete installation of the LAN systems for this
244
project. Work required under this Division, is not limited to LAN system
services but includes any complementary work that may be necessary for
integration with other systems. Work to be accomplished includes, but is
not limited to:
1. Furnish labor, material, services

2. Skilled supervision necessary for the construction,
3. Erection, installation, connection, testing, and adjustment of all
circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or
noted on Drawings, complete in all respects, ready for use.
4. Testing and commissioning services
E. Contract Drawings are intended to convey the scope of Work, indicating

general arrangement of the system. The contractor is responsible for
verifying spaces for networks and equipment, based on actual dimensions
of equipment furnished.
F. Equipment and devices shall be connected to provide integrated system in

accordance with applicable codes
G. Work furnished by other related subcontractors for parts of the system is

considered part of the contractor’s responsibility within the scope of the
contract.
H. The LAN contractor work includes installation or connection of certain

materials and equipment furnished by others should be verified for design
and installation details (foundations for equipment etc).
I. The networks shall include supply, installation and testing of networks

including wiring, conduits, socket outlets, patch panels, etc…
1.03 GUARANTEE
A. A twenty (20) year Extended Product Guarantee and Applications

Assurance for this wiring system shall be provided. Warranty certificate
should be issued from the manufacturer of the network (overseas) not
from his local representative.
B. Extended Product Guarantee: The Extended Product Guarantee shall

cover product defects for all passive cabling and cabling components
(excluding termination tools). Passive components are defined as those
exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. The manufacturer shall
warrant, from the date of installation and after a Registration Certificate is
issued, the following:
245
1. That the cabling system is free from manufactured defects in material or

workmanship under normal and proper use.
2. That all approved passive cabling products that comprise the registered
cabling system for both of copper and fiber optic cabling installation
meet or exceed the relevant specifications of the latest ISO/IEC 11801,
CENELEC EN 50173 and TIA/EIA 568-A-5 (or any national equivalent)
standards and their approved amendments/ revisions, TIA/EIA 455-b,
Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers,
Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and other Fiber Optic
Components (1998) or similar standards.
3. That the structured cabling solution will meet the Category 6A class EA
Channel Specifications defined in the future cabling Class in
Development (TIA and ISO committees), this class will be standardized
in the amendment 1 of ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.1, and EIA/TIA 568 B2
addendum 10 (draft 4.0), even under the worst-case channel
configuration (100 meters,).
4. The manufacturer must guarantee to the End User that the passive
products referenced within the Class EA System Warranty Modules
when correctly installed in accordance with installation guidelines
provide a guaranteed headroom
 of at least 10 dB on A-NEXT
 of at least 15 dB on A-ELFEXT
5. The cabling system is also open to new applications which require a
Class EA / Cat 6A cabling system as defined in the latest draft of the
standard: ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.1 (ISO/IEC WG3 N1096) and
EIA/TIA 568 B2 addendum 10 (draft 4.0) to support the 10Gbase-T
application over 100 meters channel
6. CENELEC EN50173
7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 2.2.
C. Applications Assurance: The Application Assurance shall cover failures

of the cabling system installation to operate the application(s) the system was
designed to support, as well as other additional applications. The
manufacturer shall warrant that the registered cabling system installation will
be free from failures, which prevent operations of the specific application(s)
for which the original cabling system was designed, not including failures due
to electronic hardware and/or software problems.
1. The Application Assurance shall also cover the following additional

applications:
246
 Those as specified in the current (at the time of installation) and

future versions of the manufacturer are cabling system Performance
Specification.
 Any applications introduced in the future by recognized standards
or user forums that use the relevant ISO/IEC 11801 or TIA/EIA 568-
B or fiber components, F/UTPor fiber link/ channel specifications for
cabling.
 All proposed components including the patch cords have to be
produced by the same manufacturer. This issue will ensure that a
« Class EA Channel Warranty » can be obtained from the
manufacturer.
1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All works including Equipment, workmanship and installations shall be

performed in strict accordance with the drawings, specifications and latest
stipulations of:
1. Egyptian Electrical Standards.

2. EIA/TIA 568 B or ISO/IEC 11801 or EN50173 Performance
specification for 4- pair 100 ohm category 6 cabling.
3. EIA/TIA 569 or ISO/IEC 14763-2 or EN50174-2 Commercial
building telecommunications pathways and spaces.
4. EIA/TIA 606 or ISO/IEC 14763-1 or EN50174-1 Administration
standard for the telecommunication infrastructure of commercial
buildings.
5. EIA/TIA 607 or ISO/IEC 14763-1 or EN50310 Commercial building
grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunication.
6. Centralized Optical fiber cabling guidelines. Which Has been
incorporated into EIA/TIA 568-B – Equivalent also in latest
ISO11801
7. Additional horizontal cabling practices for open offices. Which Has
been incorporated into EIA/TIA 568-B – Equivalent also in
ISO11801
- EIA/TIA-TSB72 Centralized Optical fiber cabling guidelines.
- EIA/TIA –TSB75 Additional horizontal cabling practices for
open offices.
8. EIA/TIA-526 or IEC 61280-4 Fiber optic system testing and EIA/TIA
TSB-140 additional requirements.
9. The relevant Egyptian Building Codes.
10. Egyptian safety Standard.
247
11. Standards of local authorities having jurisdiction.

All System components should be passed the tests as mentioned
in the standards. Certificate of these testes should be submitted.
B. The engineer may accept other equivalent international standards
according to a written instruction.
C. The contractor performing the contract services shall be qualified and

listed to maintain ongoing certification of the completed system to the UL
for specific installed system listing.
D. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these
plans and specifications. Unless otherwise specified, the installation shall
comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids.
E. Equal codes and standard could be accepted, which should be listed in

detail as an alternative. Such alternative standards shall be indicated in
detail together with their equivalent IEC, CCIR, NFPA and UL. A copy of
the approved alternative standard shall be available for submittal upon
request, free of charge.
F. The engineer may accept other equivalent international standards

according to a written instruction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract:
(The Vendor should indicate specifically the country of origin of every piece,
connector, cable, software and any part of the solution)
A. General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation

indicating the type, size, rating, style, manufacturers' names, photos,
catalog and data sheets for all items including specifications and
installation instructions to ensure compliance with Specifications.
B. Submit detailed riser diagram for the system indicating all quantities,
models etc..
C. Submit Rack details indicating rack size, and all housed equipment
sizes.
D. Qualified independent 3rd party certificate –UL certificate- should

indicate that the proposed channel (end-to-end, all from a single
manufacturer) complying with the CAT 6A standards (draft). Provided
248
certificates should indicate the specific proposed item by their part

numbers.
E. Submit complete documentation explaining the provided software, its

required environment, all its provided modules and options.
F. Submit Instruction Manual: This documentation shall be subject to the

approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered without this
approval, for all equipment and devices, which are indicated by the
documents (Drawings, BOQs, etc..).
G. Shop Drawings: After receiving letter of acceptance with two weeks,

the contractor shall provide detailed shop drawings indicating equipment/
device locations and connecting wiring of network, detailed drawings of
the network and complete wiring diagrams of all the system constituents,
cable size, type and numbers.
H. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each
type of network equipment installed, including ancillary equipment and
furnished specialties and accessories. Includes standard product
maintenance manual.
A. The products specified in this document shall be supplied and produced

by a single manufacturer/supplier, with the exception of: Data racks, Floor
boxes, conduits, labels, and trays.
B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience and

shall be ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 (Environmental Management) Certified.
The entire system component should be European or American
manufactured.
C. Performance:
1. The bidder shall supply a table for guaranteed channel performance

values when configured as a worst-case channel. All readings of
horizontal cables shall be guaranteed (minimum) to apply to worst-case
100 meters, 4 connector channels for the entire frequency as indicated
by the TIA/EIA or ISO or EN (from 0 to 500 MHZ).
2. Manufacturer should demonstrate guaranteed minimum worst-case
performance to be compliant with class EA channel performance
according to the ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.1 (ISO/IEC WG3 N1096) and
EIA/TIA 568 B2 addendum 10 (draft 4.0).
249
3. The performance of both the components and channel should show

stable performance up to 500MHz in order to allow for 10Gbit
ETHERNET as per the above mentioned standardization documents.
4. The vendor should submit technical data sheet for all the components
of the system (end to end) indicating the worst value for every
parameter not the average values. All system components - end to end
- should be certified that it passed the official testes mentioned in the
standard (Channel test (Link is not yet defined for Cat.6A) for all F/UTP
cables is a must , Fiber optic cables should be tested using standard
testing methods)
5. Comment: According to standards (TSB140 from EIA/TIA), tier 1
insertion loss measurement for OF links required to be done with an
OLTS (Optical loss test set – Light source + optical power meter) to
perform a real transmission loss measurement. Tier 2 (important but)
supplements tier 1 with an OTDR trace (complementary evaluation of
the link – not suitable to measure link attenuation).
6. The vendor should submit these certificates.
D. Installer Qualifications: Installer firm shall have at least 5 years of

successful installation experience in similar projects. Installer should be
certified from the manufacture for design, install and maintain the
provided system.
E. Training: The proposal should include Two weeks training for 3 employs
on provided system, operation, maintenance, etc..
1.07 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. During the construction of the system, the contractor shall put in writing
all his remarks, during the progress of the work, concerning any
suggested alterations, if existing, from the shop drawings in wiring routes,
locations of equipment or devices which arise from coordination between
the system and other activities.
B. No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving a written

approval from the Engineer.
C. All alterations shall be registered and filled by the contractor and extra
copies shall be submitted to the Engineer. A complete as-built draft set of
drawings shall be prepared 15 days after completion of work for approval
of the Engineer. The as-built draft shall include all previously approved
alterations. Final originals and copies of drawings shall be submitted
according to Division-1, Section 01300 "Submittals".
250
D. The network supplier/contractor shall be responsible to coordinate and

exchange information with suppliers of other systems and equipment
which shall communicate with it to achieve the required functions.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufactures: subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work.
2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Coordinate the features of materials, equipment and match

components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B. Expansion capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers

cables, positions in patch panels, cross connects, and space in
backbone cable trays and wire ways to accommodate 20 percent future
increase in active workstations.
C. All the network component (end to end) should be from a single
manufacturer. The vendor should submit technical data sheets for all his
system component (end to end) indicating the worst value for every
parameter not the average valves.
D. The required horizontal network shall work to cover all required data
services. All data RJ45 outlets shall be terminated on patch panels
mounted on floor racks.
E. The contractor is requested to provide all the required equipment,
components etc….. which makes the system work as required without
any extra cost, the contractor is responsible of providing even those
equipments which aren’t mentioned in specifications, Bill of Quantities
and drawings.
F. The horizontal network shall be fully structured networks supporting or
exceeding category 6 according to requirements for Category 6
component performance mentioned in standards listed before. The
system shall comply with all of the performance requirements for current
and proposed applications such as Gigabit Ethernet, 100 BASE-TX,
token ring, 155Mbps ATM, 100 Mbps TP-PMD, ISDN, ISDL, analogue
(broad band, base band ) and digital video and analogue.
G. The riser of the network shall be fiber optic cables. All cables shall be fire
retardant low smoke zero halogen (LSZH).
H. The LAN network shall be used as a backbone for voice & data systems,
CCTV system & access control system.
251
I. There will be two networks for the project, one dedicated for the
ambulatory system connections including voice & data outlets, screens,
racks, servers…etc, where this network shall mainly cover call takers
areas, dispatch center & training rooms & all the system outlets shall be
connected to the main IT room located at first floor.
J. The other network shall be dedicated for the building general users (i.e.
employees, offices, managerial staff) and it shall include voice & data
outlets, CCTV system interconnections & access control system
interconnections.
K. The two PABXs one for each network shall be supplied by client.
2.03 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A. Cable Trays: Comply with Section “Cable Trays”.

B. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Section ” Raceways and Boxes”.
2.04 RJ 45 WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. Work area outlets: Single jack-connector assemblies mounted in single or

multi-gang faceplate. Each outlet consist of back box, face plate, inserts,
mounting frame and label. Face plate shall be with shutter and label
holder.
B. Jacks: Modular 8- position suitable for RJ45 connectors – Category 6.
Inserts shall be Cat6 suitable for selected face plate, it supports 4 pair
Cat6 UTP RJ45 connectors and support universal and class E
applications.
C. Connections: conform to T568 A.
D. Faceplate (cover-plate): Identical to Section “ Wiring Devices”.
E. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Legend: Factory label the jacks with “Data” by silk-screening or engraving.
2.05 HORIZONTAL CABING
A. The horizontal cabling covers the portion of the communication cabling

that extends from the work area (outlet/connector) to the patch panel
mounted at the data rack it belongs (according to drawings).
B. Listed as complying with wiring standard having Category 6 cables shall

meet requirements for full duplex transmission.
C. Conductors: Solid Copper.
252
D. Impedance: 100 ohm +/- 15% in the frequency range of 1 MHz up to 100
MHz.
E. UTP Cable: comply with Standard. Four thermoplastic-insulated,

individually twisted pairs of conductors, No. 24 AWG, color-coded,
enclosed in PVC jacket. All horizontal cables are to be fire retardant, low
smoke, halogen free type.
F. Trace ability numbers should accompany the cable supplied from the
manufacturers packaging to assist in quality validation of the installed
cable.
G. In order to provide alien cross-talk (AXT) immunity for 10 GBASE-T

Ethernet transmissions, the use of screened cable is mandatory.
H. Test data shall be provided by the manufacturer to show compliance to
ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.1 (ISO/IEC WG3 N1096) and EIA/TIA 568 B2
addendum 10 (draft 4.0) channel headroom requirements for both Alien
NEXT (A-NEXT) and Alien FEXT (A-FEXT) parameters.
I. In the construction of the cable cross-talk performance shall be
maintained using a C³ (Central dielectric Cross-talk Cancellation) member
set between the 4 pairs.
J. The cable shall contain 1 foil screen. This will ensure instant 360°
grounding contact for optimal and reliable EMC performance and AXT
immunity.
K. A tinned copper drain wire shall be present.
L. Horizontal cabling run horizontally along the floor and/or ceiling of the
building shall include conduits, trays, wires, cables and necessary
accessories for constructing complete work.
M. Bridged taps and splices shall not be permitted as a part of the copper
horizontal cabling. Maximum distance between the active component and
the workstation must not exceed 100m.
N. The horizontal cabling should be a star topology and RJ45 work area
outlets should be connected to the cat 6 patch panels as shown on the
single line diagrams.
2.06 DATA RACK (DR)
A. Data racks are to be used to house the patch panels, Active components
and all management components. Data racks should be provided as
indicated in the drawings.
B. Data rack should have, but not limited to the following:
253
1. Standard 19-inch Rack cabinet with closed rack style up to 42U

height. Rack shall be provided with sliding covers.
2. Glass door with lock and automatic fan as well as back door.
3. Two vertical cable organizers, basement support with wheels.
4. Front and back opening and sliding mounting plates.
5. Horizontal cable organizers.
6. Blank plates, shelves and power strips.
7. All needed accessories.
8. Earthing connection kit.
C. The contractor should submit a complete rack configuration (elevation and

plan) showing every component including the components which aren’t in
the scope of work.
2.07 BACKBONE CABLING
2.07.1 DATA BACKBONE
A. Fiber cables. Factory fabricated, jacketed, low loss, glass type, fiber optic,
multi-mode graded index, operating at 850 and 1300 nm.
1. Cable should be Fire retardant low smoke zero halogen cables.
2. Dimensions: 62.5 micrometer core diameter, 125-micrometer
cladding diameter.
3. Maximum Attenuation: minus 3.5 dB/km at 850nm, minus 1.5
dB/km at 1300 nm.
4. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 1500 MHZ/km at 850 nm, 500
MHz/km at 1300 nm, 2000MHZ/km laser.
5. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 50
deg C.
6. Storage Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 70
deg C.
7. Bending radius shall be 20 times cable diameter during
installation & 10 times cable diameter after installation.
B. Cable Connectors: Quick-connect, simplex-and duplex-type SC couplers with
self-centering, axial alignment mechanisms. Insertion loss not more than 0.7
dB.
C. The vendor should submit a single line diagram indicating the attenuation at
every point and the overall attenuation for every channel.
254
D. Splices aren’t accepted in fiber optic cables in general but in very limited
cases, in such case, only fusion splices hall be accepted.
E. All fibers shall be color coded to facilitate individual fiber identification.
F. All the fiber optic system components should support 10G speed based on
OM3 fiber type. If the backbone sub-system also has to be controlled by the
IIM system patch panels and cords must be equipped with the same
intelligent technology than for horizontal distribution data panels and cords.
G. Fiber optic connectors for fiber optic patch panels should be ceramic
connectors. Epoxy with heating or two components anaerobic are the only
accepted methods for connecting the fiber optic connectors.
H. The tight – buffered dry indoor fiber optic cable shall be suitable for indoor
and outdoor use in risers or ducts (IEC 794-1-E3 – crush resistance). The dry
fiber optic cable shall be fully waterproof, longitudinally and radially and shall
include Glass Yarns reinforcement elements.
2.08 UTP CAT6 SCREENED PATCH PANELS

A. Patch panels category 6 according to requirements for category 6
component performance as the standards listed before.
B. Patch panels should be 24 RJ45 ports modular. And to have label holder
to indicate patch panel number and every port number.
C. Modular jack to have minimum 750 mating cycle and 110 Block to have
200 termination cycles.
D. The RJ45 connector shall be screened to ensure protection against EMI
and for Alien cross-talk compliance. It is fully compliant to the IEC 60603-
7-5 category 6 standard, and moreover offers the 500 MHz performance
required to be used to form a 100 meters Class EA channel as specified in
ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.1 (ISO/IEC WG3 N1096) and EIA/TIA 568 B2
addendum 10 (draft 4.0).All RJ45 connectors shall be reusable. When the
RJ45 connectors are to be reused, this shall be done in a safe and
reliable way. For this reason, a tool specially developed by the
manufacturer shall be used.
E. The full metal rear shielding provided by default shall be used on the
screened format connector to maximize screen connectivity and to ensure
protection against EMI.
F. Every port of the panel must be equipped with integrated copper sensors
to support ‘out band’ detection of a patch cable via its 9th wire (IIM). The
communication between the intelligent panel and the scanning hardware
(analyzer) must utilize a close circuit (DC electrical loop) to constantly
(real time) detect connectivity changes.
255
2.09 UTP RJ45 PATCH CORDS
A. pairs category 6 screened patch cord according to standard requirements

for category 6 performance. Category 6 patch cord should be RJ45-RJ45.
B. Category 6 patch cord should utilize colored cable and cable boots that
matches the color of the cable.
C. UTP patch cords should be in different lengths according to the location
and requirements. They should be used for cross connect between patch
panels and connection to electronics, also to connect face plates and PC
devices.
D. All patch cords should be round and consist of only 8 wires 24-AWG
copper, stranded conductors, tightly twisted into individual pairs with
9thstranded wire to perform the detection of the cord.
E. IIM principle: Both RJ45 or OF plugs on the patch cords are equipped
with an unobtrusive external probe built into the plug boot. Probes located
at both ends of the cord are connected to the same 9th wire integrated
into the patch cable. The probes shall mate with the copper sensor pad
built into the patch panels in order to detect the circuit that will be
created between two patch panel ports when both plugs of the cord are
inserted.
F. Intelligent patch cords must be equipped with sprung sensor probes on
both RJ45 connectors to perform the ‘outband’ detection of the cord via
the 9th wire of the patch cable. The intelligent detection methodology
must use the 9th wire technology (outband wire) to avoid interferences
(Alien crosstalk) with data transfer in the copper twisted pair cable.
2.10 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL
A. Modular Fiber Optic patch panel, (24-Fibers) with SC connector,
sliding Drawer-style, front loading.
B. Fiber optic patch panel should include preinstalled cable
management, rugged cable entry strain relief sliding tilt out drawer
adjustable mounting brackets for different position easy mounting.
C. Fiber panel shelf should be accessible from front and rear. The unit
shall slide out to allow access from the top.
D. Every port of the panel must be equipped with integrated copper sensors to
support ‘out band’ detection of a patch cable via its copper wire. A dedicated
panel will be used per type of connectivity and fiber grade (single mode or
multimode) SC or LC. High density panels shall support 48 fibers when using
SC adaptors, 96 when using LC adaptors.
E. Patch panel shall also include its couplers, and all other required component.
Above each of the OF adaptors, is a prescribed space suitable for
identification labels to be attached. In the panels, the fibers have to be wired
256
in such a way that the dual OF channel polarity is maintained. Wiring of the
fibers has to be done according to the guidelines provided by the
manufacturer.
2.11 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
A. Duplex SC to SC Fiber optic patch cords should be used to access

connection between fiber optic patch panels and switches. The Fiber
adapters will be connected to the active equipment by means of “Cross-over”
duplex patch cords. in order to maintain the duplex OF channel polarity.
Intelligent OF patch cords must be equipped with sensor probes on both OF
connectors to perform the ‘out band’ detection of the cord via the additional
copper wire embedded in the OF patch cable. SC, LC and MT-RJ connectors
equipped with probe sensors should be available from the manufacturer.
B. The fiber patch cord should consist of buffered, graded-index fiber with 62.5
micron core and 125 micron cladding. A flame retardant PVC jacket should
cover the fiber cladding.
2.12 LABELING SYSTEM
A. Labeling should be done for all cables on both end, all racks, all patch
panels, every port in every patch panel, all devices, all ports in every device
and all outlets.
B. The labeling system should be easy and clean to read, water proof,
permanent ink and size should suit each equipment to be labeled.
C. Labeling Software Functions: Compatible and interactive with the customer

data base:
1. Compatible and interactive with network monitor software used on its

work station (Optional)
2. Flexible build option to produce more complex alphanumeric identifiers
3. Create identifiers consisting of up to 12 independent segments
4. Insert symbols (all standard Windows symbols can be used)
5. Save and edit builds
6. Fine tune adjustment
7. Split your label format as required
8. Job notepad facility for builds saved to file
9. Context-sensitive help
D. Labels: The vendor is requested to provide different samples of different

colors of labels for outlets, patch panels, cables, etc.
257
E. Label Printer: Two printers are required, portable and disk top printers.
Printers shall have the following features:
1. At least 203 dpi

2. Custom true type font
3. Ability to print on all label sizes.
4. Adjustable for different widths of label (vendor is requested to advice
about the amount of available different widths)
5. Built in industrial label cutter
6. Prints over 500 labels between battery charges
7. Import graphics such as company logo, etc.
8. Under windows software and integrated with windows applications.
9. Upgradeable
10. Ability to integrate with non-windows based equipment
2.13 WORK STATIONS
A. Work station shall be used with labeling and network monitors. Workstation
shall have all interfaces and communication cards required according to
system manufacture requirements, and will be availed by the bank on hand
over time.
Software and Operating System:
1. Work station run the bank standard operating system version based on
windows XP and later on windows Vista. The software provider has to
insure compatibility with both systems. The application shall not
require admin or power user access to run on the workstation.
2.14 ACTIVE EQUIPMENT & PRESENTATION PANELS

A. In order to trace patching between the active equipment ports and the
cabling termination patch panels, the ports of the active equipment also
have to be equipped with sensor pads.
B. PCB strips must be available for active equipment including those with
high-density format. Strips are model specific. However, PCB strips use to
be only implemented to upgrade legacy solutions.
C. New design must be built around presentation panels. Every port of the
active equipment will be permanently connected to RJ45 intelligent patch
panels using single-ended RJ45 patch cords. The patching between those
(active equipment ports) presentation panels and the cabling termination
panels will then be monitored by the IIM system.
258
2.15 IIM SCANNING HARDWARE
A. Scanning hardware (analysers) should cover all cabling racks according to

the manufacture specifications; Proper design of master/slave must be
available to ensure a correct design of any patch zone.
B. A mapping tool (pen) is supplied with the scanning hardware to map ports
and provide trace information via the LCD display on the scanning
hardware.
C. Scanning hardware shall be capable of providing connectivity

documentation with patch panels up to 100 meters away.
2.16 INTELLIGENT INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. The application must run on a RDMS SQL engine. This engine shall be
included / bundled in the infrastructure management software free of
charge. Additional concurrent licenses should also be available.
B. The infrastructure management tool is capable of detecting any unknown

devices that appear on the network. The MAC address, IP address, host
name, WMI and SNMP information (if SNMP client is installed) will be
available along with its physical location displayed on CAD floor plans.
C. This tool also contains an inventory management and Moves Adds and
Changes planning application.
D. This tool is ODBC compliant and can exchange information with other
ODBC compliant applications.
E. It is capable of monitoring multiple simultaneous moves, adds and changes
(MAC) in the same patch zone.
F. It is capable of graphically representing the connectivity within the patching
area.
G. Data exchange, between scanning hardware ’analyser’ and infrastructure
management software database used for detection of physical changes in
the patch zone, is minimum IP packets to avoid excessive traffic over the
network.
H. The tool is able to detect physical connects, disconnects and cross-
connects at random in the patching area and will resynchronise in the
event of a power loss.
I. Patch assistance to technicians can be provided using Windows
CE/Windows mobile handheld devices or tablet pc using Terminal
Services.
259
J. Supplier must offer software maintenance support 24/7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine: Pathways, cable trays for data system. Notify Contractor in

writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to Installer.
B. Co-ordination with other Works: the contractor is to undertake the proper

co-ordination between the installations of the data system and those of all
other systems. The layout shop-drawings shall also reveal the measures
taken therein, and every fixation principle, and detail, shall be subject to
the approval of the engineer.
C. Layout and Fixations of Equipment: data racks shall be laid out properly
so as to ensure the optimum utilization of room areas and to reserve
relevant spaces for maintenance activities as well as future extensions of
the system. The availability of adequate lighting levels must also be
ensured for all cubicles and cabinets; should it deem difficult to fulfil this
condition at some location, a mains outlet is to be provided nearby (less
than 0.5m apart) so as special lighting can be provided during
maintenance. Fixations are to be as appropriate; above metallic chassis at
the level of false floor for bottom-sided cabling, above floor for top-sided
cabling, on wall for wall mounted units. After the layout of equipment is
accomplished, all sorts of cubicles, cabinets, and system components are
to be labelled, and marked properly according to an approved labelling
designations and materials.
D. Raceways: Each data cable shall run in dedicated raceways segregated

from those where power cables are laid. The installation, and fixation are
to be as per the relevant section of the specification, field and installation
work, unless otherwise is indicated herein.
E. Cable Laying: before the start of cable works, the site shall be properly
checked in order to ensure that the raceways, whatsoever, are clean and
dry. Cables shall be carefully unreeled from drums, and pulled-in/laid-on
raceways according to the approved shop drawings and work procedure.
Specialized rolls and tools shall be used for cable works so as the cables
shall not be dragged on ground or surfaces. Cables are to run concealed
above cable trays, and through embedded pipes. Under false floors; if
any, they may be arranged above ground, subject to the approval of the
engineer. All pipe ends, whether occupied or empty, shall be perfectly
sealed against dirt, parasites, rates, and insects. Sealing material, or
260
elements shall be according to every specific site condition, subject to the

approval of the Engineer. After the network is satisfactorily completed and
tested, cables shall be tied to cable trays and labelled as necessary. For
any cable, the maximum distance between two successive ties shall not
exceed five meters except for vertical riser cables where the maximum
distance shall be two meters. Cables shall be labelled at every terminal
location, every bent, before every distribution unit, and at every fan-out.
Moreover, vertical main cables, along the riser, shall be labelled at lease
twice in each floor.
F. Earthing: every cable, distribution unit, and equipment shall be properly

earthed as necessary and as recommended by manufacturer. Earthing
system shall ensure safety conditions and shall eliminate noise effects.
Earthing cables shall be characterized by their green/yellow colour.
3.02 ON-SITE TESTS, AND INSPECTION
A. Test Plans: all tests shall be carried out according to a detailed test
procedures which is submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. The tests shall cover every aspect related to the specification
of the material and their operation; including, but not limited to, visual
inspections, insulation tests, measurements, and operation. All
instruments to be used during the tests must have been calibrated and
certified, by an authorized official laboratory, as complying with the
specification of their manufacturers.
B. On-Site Cable Tests: cables are to be tested to ensure that no damage

have occurred to them during transportation to site and/or during the
course of pulling-in and laying. A complete wire-to-wire continuity test is
to be performed for every cable length. The Contractor shall have to
replace any length where the electrical continuity is not verified for all
wires. Then, a 10% sample of all cable lengths shall be subject to an
insulation test, according to the manufacturer specifications. Sampling
shall be random and as decided by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
have to replace a cable should its insulation resistance is below the
minimum specified.
C. On-Site System Tests: Telephone equipment shall be tested to ensure

that they are not damaged by transportation, correctly assembled and
connected, properly powered, and operating as specified. The complete
system tests are to include the following minimum checks:
1. Visual inspection of every component (including painting assembly,
labelling, etc.)
2. Dielectric strength and insulation resistances.
3. System performance (including all operation features).
261
4. Any other checks as necessary to ensure full compliance with the

technical specifications.
5. It shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the engineer, that the
installed equipment meet the requirements of the specification and is
ready for taking-over.
D. Experimental Period: after the on-site tests are satisfactorily completed in

accordance with the technical specifications and approved procedures,
and before final acceptance which is leading to provisional taking over;
the contractor shall assume a one-month experimental period during
which the system performance shall by fully demonstrated under actual
operation conditions. This demonstration is to confirm, to the satisfaction
of the engineer, that the system is free of remarks and is ready for
provisional taking over.
3.03 TRAINING, GUARANTEE AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Training: during the experimental period, the Contractor shall undertake

to train the Client's operation and maintenance staff. This training course
shall be carried out according to a detailed program to be submitted by
the Contractor, at least two months before the commencement of the
experimental period, and approved by the Engineer. The training course
shall fairly cover every aspect and detail concerned with the operation of
the complete telephone system, and shall provide the client's
maintenance team with a first-level maintenance skills.
B. Guarantee: during the experimental period, the system is to be operating

under the Contractor's supervision and responsibility. After the
satisfactory completion of this period, the system is to be taken over by
the client, as per contract conditions, whereby a two-year guarantee
period shall commence. All spare parts, which might be needed to
replace existing components during the guarantee period shall be born
by the Contractor unless it is proved that the component to be replaced is
defected by abuse.
C. Equipment Keys: three copies of each equipment key, whatsoever, shall

be handed over to the client on the date of provisional taking over.
D. Directory: the directory shall be made according to the approved

numbering plan. The Contractor is to hand over, on the date of
provisional taking over, three copies of the directory, which will be printed
in a sheet form, covered in both sides by transparent plastic protection, or
in pocket-book form, properly binded, or mixture of both, subject to the
agreement with the Engineer.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

262
A. Clean data racks and components of dirt and construction debris upon
completion of installation.
B. Touch-up scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original

finishes.
C. Protect installed equipment and components from damage during

remainder of construction period.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Upon completion of installation of data system, and after data cables are
installed, demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units,
and proceed with testing. Demonstrate to Owner that requirements for
basic output signal levels, and values for attenuation and signal-to-noise
ratios, have been achieved.
263
SECTION 16760
TELEVISION CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Television signal distribution cabling system as described herein shall

support distribution of broadband modulated television signals.
B. The distribution system shall include outlets, cable, signal splitters,

directional couplers taps, and termination devices for connection to CATV
and connection to Head-End Equipment.
C. The cabling system shall be tested and documented for reference by the
Owner.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The rules and regulations, and technical standards as set forth in the
Federal Communications Commission Rules, Part 76.
B. The standards and practices of the Cable Access Television and Closed
Circuit Television Industries.
C. National Electric Code, state and local electrical codes.
D. Local Codes as they apply.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Furnish complete shop drawings of the proposed system. The submittal shall
be bound in a comb or three ring type binder, with protective covers. The
cover must identify the project, system, date and vendor name. This submittal
shall consist of, but not be limited to:
1. Title sheet showing the Contractor's name, address, phone number

and date submitted. Clear area shall be provided on the title sheet for
shop drawing review stamps.

264
3. Functional schematic diagrams showing all equipment, connections

and calculated signal strengths.
4. Physical and schematic drawings of special and custom components

or hardware. Any special installation requirements shall be listed.
Include panel layouts.
5. Product data sheets with complete technical data for each item being
furnished.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of television

cabling where whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturers
and agents/suppliers.
B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years

experience in the installation and service of television signal distribution
systems.
C. Provide 3 references of projects of comparable size and scope that have

A. The television distribution system shall be installed to meet the requirements

of the following:
1. The operating bandwidth of all passive devices shall be from 5 MHz to

1 GHz.
2. All outlets in the system shall provide a noise free signal with sufficient
power for a quality picture presentation for any channel from 52 MHz
to 1000 MHz.
3. The signal strength difference between any 2 adjacent channels shall

be no greater than 5 dB.
B. The television signal distribution system shall be a single cable distribution

system with an operating bandwidth of 5 MHz to 1000 MHz.
265
C. Distribution of the modulated television signal between the Central Headend

Room and communication closets as shown on the system schematics, shall
be Via low loss 13 mm hard line Coaxial cable.
D. Distribution of the modulated television signal from the directional taps to the
TV outlets shall be by quad shielded RG 6/U cable.
G. Include the cabling for all outlets in the buildings.
H. Provide right angle coaxial connectors for all connections that will not permit
the required bending radius of the coaxial cable.
1.06 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE
1. Belden.
2. Comm Scope.
3. West Penn.
B. Hard line trunk and distribution cable shall be low loss 13 mm hardline type
cable. Cable shall have a center conductor of copper with expanded
polyethylene dielectric and solid aluminum sheath.
C. Drop cable shall be RG 6/U type cable. Cable shall have a center conductor
of copper with foam dielectric, four layer shield consisting of alternating
layers of aluminum foil and aluminum braid. The first foil shield shall be
bonded to the core dielectric.
2.02 PASSIVE DEVICES
A. Drop taps, directional couplers, and splitters shall be cable type passive
devices with type connectors operating with a bandwidth of 1 GHz. Drop taps
shall be 8 port configurations with connector through ports and F connector
drop ports. All trunk line passive devices shall be designed for the particular
type trunk cable.
266
2.03 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT
A. Television signal outlets shall be industry standard F type bulkhead fittings.
B. Outlet plates shall be high impact thermoplastic plates. Plates shall be

Labeled with proper identification. The label shall be covered with clear
plastic to Protect the label.
C. Termination devices shall be shielded F type fittings with 75 Ohm termination
impedance.
D. Surge Arrestor
Provide surge arrestors (25-75 Ohms) for all co-axial down leads from the
various types of antennas.
E. The headend station shall be provided with test and monitoring outlets
similarly all distribution amplifiers and field devices (taps, splitters) shall be
provided with test/monitoring points.
2.04 AMPLIFIERS
A. Broadband Amplifiers - Return frequency response shall be 5 MHz to 40

MHz. Forward frequency response shall be 50 MHz to 1000 MHz. Provide
equalization and attenuation components required for system balancing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be installed in a neat professional manner.
B. Cable terminations: Connector terminations on the cable shall be checked to

ensure a binding crimp and that connectors are secure.
C. Proper crimping tool shall be employed for each type of termination.

Terminations that fail shall be replaced.
D. Cable connectors shall be the matching connector to the terminal on the

equipment. Adapters will not be accepted to interface a cable connector the
equipment jack.
E. Passive devices and electronics with the exception of in-line pads and
couplers shall be securely fastened to an adjacent support system.
Distribution passives shall be mounted to wall brackets or to ceiling joist-truss
system.
267
F. Installer shall observe factory installation guidelines for pulling tension and
bending radius for all cables.
G. Cables shall be one continuous piece between each system device.

H. Cables routed to equipment shall be dressed with sufficient slack to allow for
service of equipment and avoid strain on connections or cable.
I. The ends of each distribution branch and all unused ports shall be
terminated.
J. All cable fastening devices and ties shall be approved for plenum use.
K. Documentation shall include signal levels at amplifier input and output. Signal
levels at first, middle and last tap of each backbone cable leg. Documents
shall be type written and included in As-Built documents.
3.02 TESTING
A. Perform the following tests:
1. Each cable shall be checked for proper termination. All audio and
video cables shall be checked for continuity and shorts.
2. With a signal generator installed at the headend location operate the

system at nominal signal level and check each outlet for proper signal
level and visual and audio artifacts. Correct outlet taps that are out of
tolerance.
3. Test results shall be printed out from tester and included in as built
documents.
Test equipment shall be Wavetek Stealth.
3.03 TRAINING
B. Provide four hours of on-site in-service instruction on cable identification, test

results and operation of components.
268
SECTION 16770
IP CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM

Part 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contact apply to this section.
D. Requirements of the following Division 16 section applies to this section:

1. “ Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”
2. “Earthling”.
3. “Raceways”.
4. “Cable Trays”.
5. “Wiring Devices”.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Scope of work consists of the installation of CCTV systems including the

following:
1. Fixed cameras with lenses, housing, mounting brackets, and terminal

boxes.
2. Fixed dome cameras.
3. Pan, Tilt, Zoom (PTZ) dome cameras.
4. Servers.
5. Work stations.
6. Monitors & DVR.
7. Cables with connectors, conduits and related accessories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit data for approval including catalogues and literature, sufficiently

detailed for engineering purposed, and with full description of component
and operating parameters. Submittals are to include also:
1. Switching technique of video and control signals.

2. System expandability.
3. Operating parameters and limitations, ambient conditions, heat
dissipation, power requirements, etc.
269
B. Tests: equipment is to be tested for quality and operation at the factory, and
test certificates and reports are to be submitted to the Engineer before
dispatch to site.
C. As-Built Drawings: During the construction of the system, the contractor
shall put in writing all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning
any suggested alternation from the shop drawings in wiring routes, location
of equipment or devices which arise from coordination between the system
and other activities. Submit a complete sect of as-built drawings in hard and
soft copies.
D. Records: submit maintenance manuals.
E. Shop and Construction Drawings: submit shop and construction drawings
for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed system schematic diagram.

2. Exact camera locations, layouts and mounting details.
3. Configuration and construction details for operating console, elevation
equipment and layouts with equipment located in as-installed
positions.
4. Complete and detailed cable routing and layouts with calculation
losses and signal levels.
F. Wiring diagrams are to bear manufacturer’s signature indicating that they

have reviewed the drawings and that they are correct in respect to sizes,
wiring and configuration and will operate in accordance with function, scope
and intent of the specifications.
A. System is to be in accordance to CCIR and /or EIA standards or other equal

and approved standards.
B. Manufacturer of the CCTV system shall be regularly engaged in
manufacturing of CCTV system of type, size and characteristics similar to
those required for the project and whose products have been in satisfactory
service in similar projects for not less than fire years.
C. Engage an experienced installer who is a factory authorized sales and
service representative to perform the CCTV work. The installer shall have
at least five years of successful installation experience of CCTV system
similar to that required for this project.
D. Equipment’s manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall
provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to
selected employer’s personnel.
270
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements.
2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements: CCTV system is to provide complete color

camera surveillance from the main low current systems room
giving the facility to record selected camera outputs.
B. The CCTV system server computers shall perform real time capture of
video pictures and give IP address to each of them, compress and digitally
record the camera compressed pictures at real time rates of 30 image/sec.
Adopted compression shall be non-proprietary encoding algorithms
schemes that secure no visible degradation from PAL quality video.
C. All the CCTV system equipment shall be matching, interfaced and

operating all together as an integrated system and allow for future
extension in number of server computers, cameras and workstations.
D. The system will allow for adding the capability for communication on private
networks, Intranets, and the Internet (Optional).

E. The CCTV system shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. The main server computer and related equipment

2. The main workstation
3. The sub-workstations
4. Monitors
5. Digital video recording hard disks DVR
6. Printers
7. Ancillaries (UPS, LAN connection, etc)
8. Software for the main and sub-systems
F. It shall provide programmable security and operational digital video

management, monitoring, digital recording and report issuing functions for
the project.
G. The system shall utilize the project Ethernet LAN using TCP/IP protocols
connectivity to provide communication between the system equipment.
H. Color CCIR PAL based video and programmable Closed Circuit Television
system (CCTV) shall perform video Security and Operational visual
surveillance and alarm notification at key indoor and outdoor areas and
locations. It shall provide security and operational digital and
271
programmable management, monitoring and recording functions for the

project. Automatic digital recording of live video scenes shall provide user
activated, event activated, scheduled recording and video motion detection
activation including related data.
I. The CCTV system shall utilize indoors and outdoors fixed and PTZ
movable color CCIR PAL TCP/IP network based digital cameras. PTZ type
cameras shall be controlled remotely for pan, tilt, zoom movements, focus
adjustment and camera on/off. This will be done using the appropriate
software modules that run under the management main software platform
and drive the PTZ cameras as configured by the main system server from
the main equipment or from the Crisis, Operational and security centers.
J. The CCTV system shall display automatically, the alarm related live video
scenes and data of the detected events on selected workstations, as
programmed and configured. It shall also activate recording and actions
according to preset camera settings for automated actions. It will also allow
viewing real time live video pictures and manually position PTZ cameras.
K. Digital video recording hard drives DVR of ample capacity shall record live
video of all cameras for archiving purposes. Alarm events shall be
recorded together with related data. It will include large amount of disk
space for online video storage and high capacity archiving for the off-line
video using standard computers and storage disk.
2.03 THE CCTV SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. The CCTV system shall be operated and managed by the central program
resident in the main system server computer.
B. The main server computer shall be using software based around the
Microsoft Windows XP. The system shall include the necessary hardware
and software interface for two ways TCP/IP communication with third party
Unix based systems or databases that might be needed for integration
purposes
C. However systems based on Unix latest versions could be accepted

provided that certified compatibility lists with other Windows based
systems and subsystems connected to it.
D. The software packages include a graphical User Interface (GUI) to

integrate the CCTV system incorporating Microsoft OLE (Object Linking
and Embedding) technology of 32-bit Windows. The GUI can be
customized to provide drawings and integrates information data of the
facilities and the system operation together with the command menus. It
shall allow for direct import of files created using standard software
(AutoCAD, etc).
272
E. It shall also include Digital Video Recording hard drives (DVR) interface,
which can be used to program, manage and operate multiple DVR directly
from a graphical interface.
F. The operating software shall manage functions and secure video and data
control and management, digital storage and any necessary real time
alarm management applications.
G. It shall allow for distribution of monitoring, control and graphical user

interface system functions across the LAN network
H. The system software shall also include video motion detection module that
can monitor all the camera inputs in real time including selectable regions
of different sensitivities and ambient conditions for motion trigger in any
view.
I. Configurable modules for operation, monitoring, reporting, alarm inputs

and outputs and alarm event recording shall perform true real time alarm of
any point on the system including all video and related information and
activate programmed actions.
J. The system software shall perform but not limited to the following:
1. Program, run programs, configure and change the configuration of

the system server computers and functions including logging of all
system status and operator actions. This includes control of software
programs of the sub-systems of the centers.
2. Manage and access live video scenes received from CCTV cameras
so as to be viewed by the operators workstations and sub-
workstations including the management of camera control
commands and preset camera settings for automated actions and
manual command of PTZ position of cameras.
3. Transmit and automatically display of live video scenes related to
event alarms, as configured, activate recording, and initiate any
programmed actions commands in response to alarms received from
the IP cameras including creation and view camera groups and
conduct camera tours.
4. Manage the storage of live video scenes to hard disks and transmit
previously stored video scenes to workstations, archive and retrieve
previously stored video to off-line storage media, exporting of
pictures and data and manual recording of incidents and search
through the stored video clips of cameras.
5. Supervisory functions and reporting of all the system component
malfunctions and failures and issue maintenance reports.
6. Generate and view full audit logs of all system status (camera, server
273
computers etc) and operator’s actions and report any failures

(cameras etc).
7. Export the recordings into MPEG format.
8. Compression using non-proprietary encoding algorithms schemes
and secures no visible degradation from PAL quality video.
9. Interfaces with all system components
10. Integration of all software modules with a single program
11. Alarm event logging and reporting
12. Controls multiple DVRs
13. Supports live on-screen in-window P/T/Z video displays
14. Supports multiple GT workstations through the LAN network
15. Web-based adds on module for access of information using standard

web browser software should be possible, configurable and
manageable from the main server computer. This function should be
fully protected by the system levels of security and authentication.
2.04 SECURITY OF THE RECORDED INFORMATION
A. Video recording security shall use 128 bit encryption standards, approved by
the security authority to ensure the video has not been altered. The
encryption shall contain time and date information. All recorded and exported
images should be authenticated to protect the chain of evidence with
recordings.
B. The digital video recording should secure for periods up to twenty-four (24)
hours per day for three (3) months duration of recording.
2.05 CCTV SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. The CCTV shall include, but is not limited to the following:

1. CCTV main server computer
2. Sub-servers computers equipment and related equipment
3. Digital video recording hard drives DVR, printers, power supply, etc
4. Workstations and their related computers and equipment
5. Sub-workstations and their related computers and equipment
6. Graphic display terminals GDT
7. Video monitors
8. Indoor and outdoor fixed and PTZ movable color PAL TCP/IP network
274
based CCTV digital cameras. Some will be of the PTZ type, which can
be controlled remotely (pan, tilt, zoom, focus and camera on/off)
9. Connecting equipment and accessories with the LAN of the project
10. Operating software for the main and sub-servers server
computers and workstations including interfaces and sub-modules.
2.05.1 SERVER COMPUTERS
A. Redundant and monitored hot stand by server will consist of two similarly hot
backup configured computers, the primary and backup having on-line
duplicate database to keep them updated at the same level.
B. It will run the operating software that manages the CCTV system and stores
the configurations of all the system equipment and functions including field
equipment and the sub- server computers, workstations, cameras and
devices.
C. It will maintain a database of all network-connected equipment and their
configurations.
D. The main server computer shall include digital video recording hard drives
DVR, printers, power supply and any ancillary equipment.
E. The system shall support all the connected number of IP cameras taking into
consideration the disk space requirements for the required durations of real
time and alarm event recording. It will allow for increase of the connected
number of cameras.
F. The main server computer will also perform functions such as monitoring,
management, recording etc functions for the integral project on digital
programmable bases in response to the received security event, pictures and
data triggered by any camera.
G. Recorded video scenes can be searched by date, time and events. Clips of
interest from different cameras can be exported as required.
H. The main server computer will execute full real time management, monitor
and recording of the captured pictures and on the recorded and compressed
IP tagged pictures together with their related data. It will communicate with
the other sub-server computers through the project LAN using Ethernet
TCP/IP protocols.
I. The CCTV system main server computer shall communicate together with the
system sub-server computers, the ISM server computer through the project
LAN to secure sharing of specific data between them for interlocking reasons
on a common platform that makes all relevant alarms and data available to
the CCTV and the ISM system operators at real time during situations to help
for better actions.
J. Server computer shall be the latest technology at time of installation &
according to supplier recommendations.
275
2.05.2 GRAPHIC DISPLAY TERMINAL & WORKSTATIONS
A. The CCTV workstation and sub-workstations shall be able to monitor and

manage all the system equipment using the appropriate software for Man-
machine interfacing.
B. Workstations shall be dedicated to monitor and manage specific cameras and
cannot oversee the security cameras.
C. Display of captured pictures shall be done using 20-inch color monitors,
which can display 1-4 or 8 pictures.
D. VIP offices shall be equipped with CCTV sub-workstations, which allow the
local operators to select any required camera of the configured cameras and
have the appropriate level of management on the CCTV cameras within the
overall system criteria.
E. The workstations and sub-workstations shall be PC type computers and
monitors connected to the system server computers through the project LAN
to perform functions as configured.
F. The monitors & work stations shall be the latest technology at time of
installation & according to supplier recommendations.
G. Work station shall be used with labeling and network monitors. Workstation
shall have all interfaces and communication cards required according to
system manufacture requirements.
2.05.3 VIDEO MONITORS
A. The video monitors shall be dedicated to monitor and mange selected

cameras.
B. Display of captured pictures shall be done using 20-inch color monitors,

which can display 1-4 or 9 pictures. Live cameras can be displayed in full,
sequence, quad, or 8 screen on monitor including On-screen programming
menus.
C. The monitors shall be PC type computers connected to the main and sub
server computers through the project LAN to perform functions as configured.
D. The monitors & work stations shall be the latest technology at time of
installation & according to supplier recommendations.
2.05.4 IP CCTV CAMERAS
A. Indoors and outdoors fixed and PTZ movable color CCIR PAL TCP/IP network
based digital cameras. PTZ type cameras shall be controlled remotely for pan,
tilt, zoom movements, focus adjustment and camera on/off).
276
B. Color video cameras shall be located at positions, which makes them cover
the intended fields of vision. Some of the video cameras shall be equipped
with pan, tilt, zoom (PTZ), focus and camera ON/OFF having remote control
capabilities.
C. Sensitivity of cameras shall fit for clear reproduction of pictures in maximum

and minimum light intensity conditions.
D. Outdoor cameras shall be equipped with full environmental protection

enclosures. All cameras shall be equipped with remote control modules,
which communicate and get command digitally with the system.
E. Each of the cameras having PTZ controls shall be equipped with remote
control digital module for remote operation from the central control.
F. Transmission of video and command signals strength shall be matching the

server computer requirements.
G. Transmission of power to cameras shall be through the signal cables.
H. All outdoor cameras shall be equipped with automatic bright light limiter and
light intensity control (CCD auto-iris or CCD with auto iris-lens).
I. Lens shall be selected to provide the required field of vision according to

location as indicated on the drawings.
J. CCTV PTZ IP outdoors cameras shall be located at remote stands and shall
follow the maximum possible specifications.
K. The required IP cameras shall be colored camera, single CCD 1/3" IP camera
as follows:
1. Colored and monochrome imaging 768 H x 494 V effective pixels as

minimum
2. Facility to select the required resolution of different resolutions.
3. Minimum light requirement of 1.0 Lux at (F1.2).
4. Control the brightness.
5. Backlight compensation.
6. Digital signal processing
7. White balance (Auto/ Indoor/ Outdoor/ Manual),
8. Electronic Shutter up to 1/10,000 sec
9. Gain control (Auto/ Off).
10. Gamma correction
11. Auto iris (both of DC and video)
12. Built-in motion detection
13. Frame rate of 30 fps (number of frames is selectable either automatic or
through software).
277
14. Power supply : 24 volt AC through power supply 220 VAC /50 Hz to low
voltage
15. LAN interface:
16. Built-in 10 Base T (RJ45) Ethernet interface and supports the TCP/IP
17. Flash memory: 8 MB
18. RAM :16 MB
19. IP camera shall be magnetic and electro statically shielded.
20. IP camera shall feature solid-state components to resist shock and
vibration. IP camera shall be certified according to related codes.
21. Pan/Tilt Head
a. Some of the IP cameras shall be equipped PTZ capability
including receivers to be used to interface between server
computers and the PTZ head.
b. Heavy-duty pan/tilt head suitable to carry the weight of the
camera with all its accessories shall be used.
c. PTZ head shall provide quite and smooth adjustable motion
(pan, tilt, zoom, focus and camera on/off) limits with rigid
construction for upright or inverted operation
d. Rotation angle: Pan: 0 - 3550 Tilt: + 900 to - 900
e. Rotation speed: Minimum Pan speed: 60 /s Minimum Tilt
speed: 30 / s
f. Supply from the field server computers through the signal
cables.
g. Weatherproof for outdoor use head shall be suitable to carry
the weight of the camera with its weatherproof housing and
its required accessories.
22. Lenses
a. High quality optics video auto iris variable (F1.4 – 360) and
fixed (F1.2 – close) focal lengths shall be used with fixed
and PTZ cameras. The lenses shall be suitable to the
cameras (1/3”, C mount, CS mount). Zoom lenses shall be
motor driven. The lens may be varying focal length manually
adjusted.
b. Viewing angles shall be appropriate to location (refer to the
drawings).
c. The contractor shall revise the locations of the CCTV

cameras and focal length of lens in order to cover the
required field of vision in different areas.
23. Weatherproof Housing
278
a. The cameras housing shall provide full protection for

environmental conditions (dust, sun, rain, temperature, etc.)
and shall include sun hood and shall house all attached
accessories of the cameras including the lens.
b. Housing shall not cause any loss in quality or sensitivity of
pictures. Cameras shall be equipped with digital remote
control modules to operate pan, tilt, and zoom functions
from the control rooms.
c. Metal construction (aluminum) weatherproof housing shall
be used with outdoor cameras having suitable length to
house the camera with the lens and its accessories.
d. Weatherproof housing shall be with thermal isolation kit,
window defroster front glass window, sunshield and
automatic fan.
e. Weatherproof housing shall be equipped with suitable
accessories to be fixed either on fixed bracket or on pan/tilt
head.
f. Power supply of weatherproof housing shall be similar to the
camera and PTZ head rating. Housing shall comply with IP
65
g. Mounting brackets shall be used for fixed and PTZ cameras,
sturdy and corrosion resistant and suitable for installation
from the ceiling or against the wall.
2.06 GROUNDING
A. Connection with clean earthling is a part of the contract and as recommended

by the manufacturers.
B. System bonding and grounding including active and passive components,
test apparatus and equipment shall be in accordance with International
and/or Local Regulations. Provide a Bonding Backbone utilizing bonding
conductor of appropriate size that provides direct bonding between field
components and equipment rooms. This is part of the grounding and bonding
infrastructure, and is independent of equipment or cable.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring an approved ground at all
newly installed distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any
existing facilities.
D. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by
properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes,
and framework. All grounds shall consist of appropriately sized copper wire
and shall be supplied from an approved building clean earth ground.
Grounding must be in accordance with all local codes and practices.
279
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, in the presence of the Installer, for compliance with the
requirements and other conditions affecting the performance of the CCTV
system work.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 Installation
A. Output signals from cameras, loss in cables and gain of the amplifiers, if
necessary, are all of the responsibility of the Contractor so as to be in
accordance with the Manufacturer standards, and shall match the signal
strength requirements for the monitoring equipment
B. Install systems in accordance with CCIR, NFPA, and local codes and other
applicable reference codes and standards. Install equipment and wiring in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Appropriate measuring equipment shall be used (signal strength voltage,
current, etc.), for CCTV adjustment and troubleshooting.
D. The installation of the CCTV equipment shall be installed and shall match
with each other in performance, hardware specifications, and dimensions.
E. The performance of any of the separate equipment shall not be accepted
separately, but the shall deal with the system integrally.
F. All cables, connector, power cable, and control cables shall be matching with
the supplied equipment and with each other.
G. Install wiring in raceway/conduit except within consoles, desks and
counters, and except in accessible ceiling plenums where cable
wiring method may be used. Cables used in environmental air
space shall be listed for this use. Conceal cables in accessible
ceilings, walls and floors wherever possible.
H. Where AC power-operated devices are not protected against
voltage transients by integral surge suppressors, install surge
suppressors at the devices' power line terminals.
I. Conceal cable in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors wherever
possible.
J. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Provide and use lacings bars and distribution spools.
K. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do
280
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do

not splice cable between indicated termination, tap, or junction
points. Remove and discard cable where damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
L. Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and
support as recommended by Manufacturer.
M. Where system performance may be degraded in certain operating
modes because of varying connections of multiple devices from
mode to mode, revise component connections
N. Grounding to be as recommended by Manufacturers.
O. Make final connection to equipment in the presence of the equipment
manufacturer's representative.
P. CCTV cameras shall be installed in their positions as specified on the
Drawings after making sure that the field of vision of each of them is covered
without any obstructions. Necessary modifications to these positions due to
unforeseen constraints, or hardware limitations shall be approved in advance
by the Engineer.
Q. All necessary installation materials for the TV cameras are considered as a
part of the equipment and shall be covered by the price of these cameras.
R. Special care must be taken by the Contractor to keep the clear height of the
parking area and routes as specified on the architectural Drawings and
select the appropriate components such as the camera type, housing and
mounting parts which satisfies this requirement.
S. Physical and operational adjustment, testing and putting into work shall be
included.
1. Install cameras at the locations indicated on Drawings, adjusted to

final locations defined by camera location tests. Provide adequate
headroom below cameras and their mountings. Where necessary,
change the type of mounting to provide adequate headroom below.
2. Pan and tilt units to be set to suit final position and mounting and
field required to be viewed by camera.
3. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at the
security desk. Do not install such items in the vicinity of the devices
they serve.


A. Manufacturers' field services: provide services of factory authorized
service representatives to supervise the field assembly and connection of
281
components and system pretesting, testing, and adjustment.


B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

C. Pretesting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all components,
wiring, and functions to verify they conform to specified requirements.
Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new items. Retest until
achieving satisfactory performance schedule.

D. Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify
it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of system operation.
Methodically test for proper system operation in all functional modes.

E. CCTV Camera Location Test: Support each camera temporarily at the
location indicated and connect to workstation. Adjust camera location and
mounting and substitute fixed lens as approved to provide required
performance at workstation. Adjust within 15 feet (5 m) of those indicated
with no change in contract cost.

F. Record results of tests.

G. Reliability Test: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations
and retest until specified requirements are met. All equipment should be
installed and fully function for at least 30 continuous days without
failure.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean all system components including camera housing windows, lens, and
workstation screens. Use methods and materials recommended by
Manufacturer.
3.05 ADJUSTMENT
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one (1) year of date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the
system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up till two (2)
requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose without additional
cost.
282
SECTION 16780
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Related documents
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to work of this section.
1.02 scope of work
A. The Access control system (ACS) is intended for security management,

control, alarm notification and logging for key areas and locations.
B. It will provide programmable security digital management, monitoring and

recording functions for Access of personnel to the project using security
controlled doors (doors, revolving doors, turnstile, etc) as described in part 2
of this specification.
C. The scope of work of the ACS shall includes supply, installation, programming,
testing and putting into operation, but is not limited to following:
1. The system field equipment related wiring and Accessories

2. Software for the main system and equipment.
3. Installation of the system related wiring and Accessories
4. Connection and testing of the ACS equipment with the LAN.
5. Installation, testing and putting into operation of all the integrated
software of the main and subsystems including the interfaces and
sub-modules.
6. Programming of the system in Accordance with client’s
requirements.
7. Commissioning activities in cooperation with the engineer and
client including provision of the necessary test equipment and tools
and test reports.
D. Work herein specified, shown on drawings, and other contract documents
required to provide a complete installation of the ACS systems for this project.
Work required under this Division, is not limited to ACS system services but
includes any complementary work that may be necessary for integration with
other systems. Work to be accomplished includes, but is not limited to:
1. Furnish labor, material and services

2. Skilled supervision necessary for the construction,
283
3. Erection, installation, connection, testing, and adjustment of all

circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or
noted on Drawings, complete in all respects, ready for use.
4. Programming
5. Testing and commissioning services
E. Contract Drawings are intended to convey the scope of Work, indicating

general arrangement of the system. The Contractor is responsible for
verifying locations of equipment and devices and spaces for networks and
equipment, based on Actual dimensions of equipment furnished.
F. Equipment and devices shall be connected to provide integrated system in
Accordance with applicable codes
G. Work furnished by other related subcontractors for parts of the system is
considered part of the Contractor’s responsibility within the scope of the
contract.
H. The ACS Contractor work includes installation or connection of certain
materials and equipment furnished by others should be verified for design
and installation details (foundations for equipment etc).
1.03 APPLICABLE codes and standards
A. All work, equipment, materials, construction and installation provided by the

Contractor(s) shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and
ordinances of the local and state authorities.
B. All work, equipment, materials, construction and installation provided by the

Contractor(s) will be in Accordance with the latest issue of the applicable
requirements of the following codes and standards:
1- National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)

2- BOCA National Building Code
3- Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)

4- NEC National Electrical Codes;
5- ANSI American National Standards Institute;
6- IEC International Electrical Committee;
7- ACI Recommendations on Airport Security.
8- ISO 9001 (2000)
9- ISO/IEC 15504 Level 3 or higher (SPICE 2.0 Software Process
Improvement and Capability Determination)
10- SEICMM Level 3 or higher (American Software Engineering
Institute - Capability Maturity Model)
284
11- The relevant Egyptian Building Codes
12- Egyptian safety Standard
13- Standards of local authorities having jurisdiction
C. All System components should be passed the tests as mentioned in the

standards. Certificate of these testes should be submitted.
D. The engineer may accept other equivalent international standards

According to a written instruction. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall
take precedence over these plans and specifications. Unless otherwise
specified, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30
days prior to receipt of bids.
E. The Contractor performing the contract services shall be qualified and listed
to maintain ongoing certification of the completed system to the UL for
specific installed system listing.
F. Equal codes and standard could be accepted, which should be listed in

detail as an alternative. Such alternative standards shall be indicated in
detail together with their equivalent IEC, CCIR, NFPA and UL. A copy of the
approved alternative standard shall be available for submittal upon request,
free of charge.
G. The ACS system shall be using appropriate hardware Listed by Under-

writers Laboratories Inc (ULI) for use in:
1- Energy management (category PAZX)

2- Critical process (category QVAX)
3- Security (category APOU),
4- Fire alarm systems (category UOJZ)
5- UL 50 and UL 468 etc.
1.04 Submittals
A. General: Submit the following According to the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: For products specified in this section. Include data on

features, components, rating and performance.
C. Maintenance Data: For system and products for inclusion in operating and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Including the following:
1- Listsof spare parts and replacement components

recommended being stored at the site for ready Access;
2- Detailed operating instruction covering operations under
285
both normal and abnormal conditions.

3- Shop drawings: detailing fabrication, internal and
interconnecting wiring and installation of the system.
4- Differentiate between field-installation and factory-installed
wiring and components.
1.05 Quality assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing

equipment of the types and capacities indicated with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. NRTL Listing: Provide listed and labeled systems components for which
there is a listing and labeling service.
C. Terms 'Listed' and 'Labeled': As defined in the 'National Electrical Code',

article 100.
D. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A 'National Recognized

Testing Laboratory' (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
E. Single-source Responsibility: Obtain system components from a single

Manufacturer with responsibility for the entire system.
1.06 As-built Drawings
A. During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in writing all his
remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations
from the Shop Drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices
which arise from coordination between the system and other Activities.
B. No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving written

approval from the Engineer.
C. All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractors and extra
copies shall be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project
Manager, Site, etc..)
D. A complete as-built draft set of Drawings and equipment schedules shall be

prepared fifteen (15) days after completion of work for approval of the
Engineer. The draft as built shall include all previously approved alterations.
1.07 Guarantee
A. The Contractor shall Guarantee the system for 5 years of operation.

Extended Product Warranty and Applications Assurance for this system
286
shall be provided.
B. Extended Product Guarantee: The Extended Product guarantee shall

cover product defects for all ACS integrated system components, wiring,
software, equipment, etc..
C. The Manufacturer shall warrant, from the date of installation and after a
Registration Certificate is issued.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Technical description
A. The Access control system (ACS) is intended for security management,

control, alarm notification and logging for Access to security controlled
areas and locations.
B. The system shall provide programmable security digital management,

monitoring and recording functions for Access of personnel to the project
areas using security controlled doors (doors, revolving doors, turnstile)
having card readers. Facial, hand scanner or other security devices may be
added at certain high-level security locations, and in that case the
Contractors(s) should provide the necessary hardware and software
interfaces with the system software.
C. The system shall be based on distributed intelligence architecture and

TCP/IP protocols connectivity using the project LAN network to link the
main server with the field equipment.
D. Management of all the system functions shall be done using central and
field processing server computers that run the security operating software.
E. The ACS system shall include workstations able to monitor and/or configure
all the system devices and functions.
F. Digital recording hard drives DRHDs of ample capacity shall record all
events for archiving purposes. Alarm events shall be recorded together with
related data.
G. The ACS system shall include but is not limited to:
1- The ACS main server computer equipment and related

equipment (recording hard drives, printers, power supply, etc)
2- Field server computers and related equipment.
3- Workstations and their related computers and equipment.
287
4- Field ACS control and signal transmission network (dose not

include LAN connections)
5- Connecting equipment with the LAN of the project
6- Operating software for the main, field and operations server
computers and workstations
7- Security lock assemblies
8- Electric latches
9- Identification cards
10- Door control equipment (DCU, IOM's)

11- Proximity card readers
12- Door release push button
13- Wide gap magnetic contacts
14- Door locks

15- Security Cards
H. Operation of the ACS System: The system shall manage entry to

personnel only when a valid coded Access card is presented to a card-
reader at any system controlled door. This shall release the locking
mechanism and allow entry. Following to that, the system shall lock the
door after closing and indicate normal status to the system.
I. Any abnormality shall be reported and alarm could be generated according

the management software evaluation.
J. The status of all secured doors (open/close) and the status of all locks
(locked/unlocked) shall be constantly monitored.
K. The Access process shall check the compliance of the card media
physically, followed by identifying and verifying the authorizations of the
holder (zone, time, restriction etc), which relates to the system database.
L. The system shall provide multi door controls and anti-pass back logic
feature (soft, blocking or non blocking) to monitor in/out status with respect
to the card reader position.
M. The system shall control one or more door (doors, revolving doors, turnstile,
etc) in a single or bi-directional way and generate door status (closed etc).
Authorized request for transit will be communicated with the main server
computer and command will be generated Accordingly.
N. All information (identification code, date and time, operator level devices
288
identifier etc) related to the Action will be handled and stored by the field
server computer to be sent to the main server computer.
O. The ACS shall include intrusion detection and control logic to manage many
I/Os of the doors and can enabled/disabled/armed/disarmed any of them.
P. The ACS shall check the status of the field points continuously and detect
variations in their status (normal, alarm, open, short etc)
Q. The system shall be supplied complete with Access controllers, control
units, card readers, output devices, conduit, cabling, Accessories and
identification card printing equipment for the complete and necessary
installation and operation of a complete system for the project.
R. The system software resident in the main server computer, which can get
access to any of the connected devices on the network remotely, shall
perform the control of the ACS.
S. The man-machine interfacing of the overall system management will take place
from the main system workstation, which will perform all data user tasks.
T. The system management software shall perform the configuration and
control of the system.
U. The assignment and configuration shall be performed from the main server
computer.
V. The system shall include ample amount of disk space for online and off-line
storage using standard storage hard disks.
2.02 The ACS software
A. The ACS shall be operated and managed by the central program resident in
the main system server computer, which controls the software that run the
field equipments of the crisis, operational and security centers.
B. The main server computer shall be using software based around the
Microsoft Windows XP 32 bit multi-tasking environment. The system shall
include the necessary hardware and software interface for two ways TCP/IP
communication with third party Unix based systems or databases that might
be needed for integration purposes
C. However systems based on Unix latest versions could be accepted

provided that certified compatibility lists with other Windows based systems
and subsystems connected to it.
D. It shall allow for distribution of monitoring, control and graphical user

interface system functions Across the LAN network
E. The operating software shall manage functions and secure data control and
289
management, digital storage and any necessary real time alarm and
management applications.
F. Configurable modules for operation, monitoring, reporting, alarm inputs and

outputs and alarm event recording shall perform true real time alarm of any
point on the system and Activate programmed Actions.
G. The software shall include Microsoft Windows-based Graphical User

Interface (GUI) that can be customized to provide drawings and integrates
information data of the facilities and the system operation together with the
command menus. It shall allow for direct import of files created using
standard software (AutoCAD, etc).
H. It shall also include Digital Recording hard drives (DRHDs) interface, which
can be used to program, manage and operate multiple DR directly.
I. The system software shall perform but not limited to the following:
1- Program, run programs, configure and change the configuration

of the system server computers and functions including logging
of all system status and operator Actions. This includes
interface of software programs.
2- Manage the storage of events to hard disks and transmit
previously stored information to workstation
3- Supervisory functions and reporting of all the system
component malfunctions and failures and issue maintenance
reports.
4- Generate and view full audit logs of all system status and
operators actions and report any failures
5- Web-based adds on module for Access of information

using standard web browser software should be
possible, configurable and manageable from the main
server computer. This function should be fully protected
by the system levels of security and authentication.
J. Security of the Recorded Information: Recording security information

shall use encryption standards, approved by the security authority to ensure
that the data has not been altered. The encryption shall contain time and
date information. All recorded data should be authenticated to protect the
chain of evidence with recordings.
K. The hard disk recording should provide twenty-four (24) hours per day
for three (3) months duration of recording.
290
2.03 System requirements
A. As a minimum the ACS control system shall support the system

capacities listed below and the software shall support the maximum
(designated by '[]') capacities listed.
1- Simultaneous Operators: 1 [2]

2- Operator Access Levels: 3 [5]
3- Maps: 10 [50]
4- Card Holders: 400 [1000]
5- On-line Historical Data: 90 days [365 days]
6- Authorization Classes: 1.000 [5.000]
7- Card Readers: 512 [2.048]
B- The Contract Drawings and this section indicate a general arrangement of

the major Access Control components and are not to be considered as a
complete design. Depending upon the system proposed, there may be
additional components required for proper operation. The Contractor shall
be responsible for providing all equipment required to meet the intent of
the Contract Documents.
C- Operating features of hardware specified in this section are not intended to

limit the bidding on this system to a particular vendor, or to restrict the
system to only those features mentioned. These specifications represent
minimum requirements.
2.04 Server computer
A. Redundant and monitored hot stand by server will consist of two similarly
hot backup configured computers, the primary and backup having on-line
duplicate database to keep them updated at the same level. Dual identical
database CPU/server computer in hot standby configuration shall be
supplied meeting the following minimum recommended Main server host
computer specifications, which are for guidance only, and the system
Contractor(s) should provide the latest state of the art, appropriate
equipment as per the requirements needed for the system.
B. Server computer shall be the latest technology at time of installation & to be

in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
2.05 Operator workstation
A. Operator workstations shall be supplied and installed at the locations

identified on the Contract Drawings. Each workstation shall meet the
following minimum hardware requirements.
291
B. Work station shall be PC based with the latest technology at the time of
installation & to be in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
2.06 Printers
A. The Contractor shall provide laser printers for each operator workstation.
2.07 Door control equipment
A. Door control equipment shall be used to interface the various field located
sensors and Actuators to the supervisory computer system. As such, the
equipment shall monitor input circuits, communicate with card readers and
keypads, and provide control outputs to the various security components.
The Contractor shall provide the possibility to have individual LAN
addressable connections to each device specified in this Clause.
B. This equipment shall be modular as follows:
1. Door control units (DCU) shall be supplied to incorporate all of the

circuits required to interface at a single door location. Input circuits
shall be provided to monitor door position, status of door lock, a
request to exit switch, and reader conditions. Outputs shall be
provided to control the door lock and control visual indicators
associated with card readers.
2. Input/output modules (IOM's) shall be supplied and shall be used
to interface to sensors and Actuators not part of the Access control
portal locations or are supplemental to the operation of the Access
controlled portals.
3. DCU's and IOM's shall operate so that Activity at one (1) module
can cause reactions at one (1) or more other modules. The logical
association of module Activity to module reaction shall be user
configurable to meet the needs of the specific application.
4. All modules shall contain an internal program execution watchdog
circuit that shall automatically attempt to restart the processor upon
failure to execute the code. All modules shall also provide
removable connectors for all field wiring termination's to facilitate
quick replacement.
5. All modules shall maintain configuration data in non-volatile
memory so that loss of power, for any length of time, does not
require reconfiguration of the module.
2.08 Proximity card readers
A. The Contractor shall provide card readers at locations identified on the
292
Contract Drawings.
B. Card readers shall be proximity type readers and fully compatible with the
photo-identification/card Access badges to be provided by the Contractor.
C. The range of the card readers shall be between 15 cm and 30 cm.
D. Units shall be equipped with integral LED's (red, yellow and green) to
provide visual confirmation of Access granted/denied and prompting of
card entry.
E. Unit enclosures shall be designed to be tamper resistant. The units shall

be the most visible element of the system. It is preferred that the units be
provided with a neutral finish to suit the terminal's decoration.
2.09 Door release push button
A. The devices shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract

Drawings and shall be used to temporarily shunt alarms and unlock
doors/gates.
B. Each device shall be a heavy-duty, momentary push button rated for a

minimum of 100,000 Activation’s. The switch shall provide SPDT contacts
rated at 10 Amps at 125 VAC.
C. Devices shall be mounted to single gang, stainless steel faceplate. Push

buttons shall be red and Cleary labeled.
D. The push button device at the VVIP entrance shall be key-operated:
1. Release of the door by key.

2. Closing of the door by push button.
2.10 DOOR contACts
A. Wide gap magnetic contacts to be installed in Accordance with the

Contract Drawings.
B. Wide gap magnetic contacts shall be the 'biased' type consisting of two (2)
components: magnet and switch. The magnet shall be surface mounted to
the door/door and the switch shall be installed on the associated wall,
ground, roadway, etc. The switch component shall be equipped with a red
switch and its own 'biasing' magnet that affects the state of the switch.
When brought in close proximity to the switch (i.e., door closed), the
magnet component shall offset the 'biasing' magnet, thereby creating a
balanced condition.
293
C. As a minimum, switches shall be rated at 30 VDC, 300 mA, 10,000,000

cycles. The switch shall be configured with SPDT leads or terminations.
D. Switches shall be rhodium plated or shall be comparably protected to

prevent sticking of freezing.
E. Magnets shall be permanent Alnico type.
F. Magnetic contacts shall support a gap distance of up to 25 mm.
2.11 DOOR LOCKS
A. General: All locks shall be of the closed circuit current type. All the locks
shall have contacts for indicating the status of the lock (locked/unlocked).
The installation of the locks shall be executed in close coordination with
the Supplier of the doors and doorframes.
B. Door Locks in Doors: Locks shall be of the built-in type. All cabling shall
be recessed mounted, flexible connections having to be provided to protect
the wiring from being damaged while operating the door. The locks shall
also be key-operated. All equipment shall be tamper resistant.
C. Door Locks in Doorframes: Locks shall be of the built-in type. All cabling
shall be recessed mounted. All equipment shall be tamper resistant. The
locks have to withstand forces of 1200 kg or better.
2.12 Security Cards
A. All cards shall be of the proximity type.
B. Cards shall be fully compatible with the Video Badging System to include
the ability to create a combined photo-identification/card Access badge.
C. Cards shall be fully compatible with the card readers in the system.
D. Cards shall be standard credit card sized and constructed of top quality,
highly durable and resilient material designed for use with the card readers
specified above. Cards shall be designed to resist wear and environmental
deterioration to include breaking, delaminating, coding damage from any of
the following conditions:
1. Minor impact
2. Temperature changes
3. Radial-type bend of at least 90 degrees along the longest
dimension.
294
4. Presence of an external magnetic field of one (1) gauss in any

direction for a period of one (1) hour
E. The security sub-system Contractor shall provide a quantity of 400 cards

and all materials required for the preparation and lamination of the data
information and video images onto the cards, including a camera, badge
printer and software, as indicated on the Drawings.
F. The Contractor shall guarantee the supply of security cards used in the
system for at least ten (10) years.
2.13 Cabling
A. All cables required for the installation of the system shall be in Accordance
with Manufacturers recommendations as well as the provisions of Electrical
Specifications. All cabling shall be tamper and fire resistant.
2.15 Grounding
A. Connection with clean earthing is a part of the contract and as

recommended by the Manufacturers.
B. System bonding and grounding including active and passive components, test
apparatus and equipment shall be in Accordance with International and/or
Local Regulations. Provide a system Bonding Backbone utilizing a bonding
copper conductor of appropriate size that provides direct bonding between
field components and equipment rooms. This is part of the grounding and
bonding infrastructure, and is independent of equipment or cable.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring an approved ground at all

newly installed distribution frames, and/or insuring proper bonding to any
existing facilities.
D. The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by

properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes,
and framework. All grounds shall consist of appropriately sized copper wire
and shall be supplied from an approved building clean earth ground.
Grounding must be in Accordance with all local codes and practices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
A. Maintenance: Maintain minimum working space at equipment According

to Manufacturer’s shop Drawings and recommendations.
295
B. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to

emergency power supply.
C. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Arrange and pay for the service of a

factory-authorized service representative to supervise the installation,
connection, pretest and adjustment of the system.
3.02 Identification
A. Identify components According to Division 16 Section "Electrical

Identification".
3.03 Field Quality control
A. Supervised Adjustment and Retesting: Under supervision of factory-

authorized service representative, pretest system functions, operations and
protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies with
specifications.
B. Test: Perform the tests listed below According to Manufacturer’s

recommendations upon completion of installation of system.
1. Functional test of the emergency procedures.

2. Functional test of the emergency procedures in relation with the
fire alarm system.
3. Functional test of remote indication to the Building Automation
System
C. Inspection: The system is fully assembled and tested in the factory.
D. Reliability Test: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements

are met. All equipment should be installed and fully functional for at least thirty
(30) continuous days without failure. In case of any failure during this period
the test shall be repeated once.
E. Cleaning:
1. Inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other

spots, dirt and debris. Repair scratches and mars of finish to match
original finish.
2. Clean components internal using methods and materials

recommended by Manufacturer.
F. Demonstration
296
1. Conduct a training for 5 persons.

2. Schedule training with at least a seven (7) days advance
notification.
G. Documentation:
1. The Contractor shall supply three (3) complete sets of manuals

for workshop maintenance and operation and three (3) copies of
the as-built Drawings. The documents shall include a
maintenance manual record, a detailed schematic diagram for
trouble shooting and information about installation,
programming and testing.
2. All documents and data on Drawings shall be in the English

language.
H. Test Equipment: The Contractor shall supply test equipment According

to a listing, recommended by the Manufacturer and approved by client
I. Guarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee the proper performance of all

system components for two (2) years. The spare parts used during this
period will be replaced free of charge before final Acceptance of the
system.
297
SECTION 16790
COMMUNICATION GROUNDING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Equipment Grounding: Whole conduit system, cabinets, terminal frames, and

other permanently installed electrical equipment shall be solidly
interconnected to form a continuous permanent and effective equipment
grounding medium.
B. Communication System Grounding.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code.
B. EIA/TIA 607.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Grounding System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical

grounding systems with assembly of materials including, but not limited to,
cables/wires, connectors, terminals, grounding rods/electrodes, bonding
jumpers, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where
materials or components are not indicated, provide products meeting the
requirements of NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for
applications indicated.
1. Conductors: Copper cable, stranded of size noted on Drawings.
2. Bonding Jumper Braid: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30 gauge

bare copper wires and properly sized for indicated applications.
3. Connectors, Terminals, and Clamps: Burdy, Kearney, T & B, Penn-

Union, or approved equal.
4. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel, 19 mm diameter, a minimum 3 m in

length.
298
B. Earth electrodes shall have an interconnected resistance to earth of not more

than 1 Ohms. Where this value is exceeded, additional electrodes shall be
connected in parallel, spaced at approximately four meters to achieve the
specified maximum resistance to each value.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Grounding and bonding shall meet the requirements

of the National Electric Code and the electrical inspector. This, however,
shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from meeting any
requirements of the Drawings and specifications that may be in excess of the
rules and not contrary to same.
3.02 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Receptacles: Receptacles shall have a ground wire from green ground

terminal to outlet box ground screw.
3.03 COMMUNICATION GROUNDING
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide grounding bus bar at each Communication Room (closet) in

accordance with Communication Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications, ANSI/TIA/EIA 607.
2. Provide and install a predrilled, electro-tin plated, copper bus bar,

50 mm by 6 mm x 600 mm, mounted on the panelboard on 50 mm
insulators in the Telephone Entrance Communication Room.
3. Provide and install a predrilled, electro-tin plated, copper bus bar,

50 mm by 6 mm x 300 mm, mounted on the panelboard on 50 mm
insulators in all other Communication Rooms.
4. Each communication bus bar shall be electrically connected to the

grounding electrode and all other communication bus bars in the
building with a minimum No. 6 AWG insulated copper conductor. Bus
bars may be series connected.
5. Each communication bus bar shall be electrically connected to the

vertical structural steel frame of the building with a No. 6 AWG
insulated copper conductor bonded to the frame by a listed connection
method. Where the vertical frame member is not steel and a
299
horizontal structural member is bonded to vertical member(s), bonding

may be by the horizontal member.
6. Each bonding conductor shall be labeled. Labels shall be located as

close as possible to their point of termination. Labels shall be non-
metallic and include, as a minimum, the information in Figure 5.1-1 of
ANSI/TIA/EIA 607.
7. The following communication systems, provided by the Contractor,

shall be individually electrically connected to the nearest
communication closet bus bar (or the grounding electrode if closer)
with a No. 8 AWG insulated copper conductor:
a. Television Distribution System

b. Sound System(s)
c. Data Communication System(s)
d. Telephone System
e. Building Management System.
f. Security Systems
300
SECTION 16910
ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Testing and Commissioing of electrical systems and quipment.
B. Access shall be afforded at all times to the Engineer to enable him to inspect
the Electrical Equipments.
1. Upon completion of the Electrical Equipment installation or part of the

installation, the carry out and be responsible for testing and
commissioning, in stages if required, to ensure that it is in proper
working order and capable of performing all of its functions in
accordance with the Specification and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Any Electrical Equipment damaged in commissioning shall
be replaced and retested by the Contractor at his own expense to the
2. All testing shall be carried out according to the requirements of the

relevant standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in the
Specification or otherwise agreed by the Engineer in writing.
3. Submit for Engineer's approval, no later than 6 weeks prior to the

commencement of testing and commissioning, a schedule of all
Electrical Equipment tests and commissioning procedures to be
carried out to prove that the Electrical Equipment complies with the
requirements of the Specification together with proposed programme
for such testing and commissioning.
4. Tests shall not commence before the schedule of tests has been
approved and such other tests as may be required by the Engineer
shall be included within the schedule of tests.
5. Give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days' notice of the date by
which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of
installation. Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within
seven days after the said date on such day or days as the Engineer
shall in writing notify the Contractor.
6. The tests shall as far as possible be carried out under normal working
conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall extend over
such periods as he may direct.
301
7. Provide all skilled labour, supervision, consumables, apparatus and

instruments required for commissioning and testing and within a
reasonable time thereafter furnish to the Engineer a total of six
certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the
Contractor, or an authorised person acting on his behalf, as prescribed
in the appropriate regulations and specifications.
8. When any part of the Electrical Equipment fails to pass the specified
tests, further tests shall be repeated, if required by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand such modifications as are
necessary to meet the requirements as described in the Contract and
any expense which the Owner may have incurred by reason of such
further tests may be deducted from the Contract price.
9. Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his

responsibility for the performance of the Electrical Equipment after
erection as a complete working system in all respects.
10. Each completed system within the installation shall be tested as a

whole under normal site operating conditions to ensure that each
component functions correctly in conjunction with the rest of the
system.
A. All sections of Division 16 .
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with the requirements given in Contract Conditions and other related
sections of the Specifications.
PART 2 TESTING
2.01 GENERAL
A. Programme, oversee, co-ordinate and record all the testing and

commissioning of the electrical systems in co-ordination with those elements
undertaken by the mechanical services Contractor. The electrical Contactor
shall allow for liaising and attendance and providing all necessary test and
general data information at the correct times.

Section 15180.
302
C. The systems shall undergo phases of testing and commissioning, in

accordance with the following:-
1. Phase 1. Works testing and quality assurance of elements;
2. Phase 2. Site installation, wiring, checks, performance and

operational tests for all elements;
3. Phase 3. Sub system group operational tests/performance tests;
4. Phase 4. Complete system operational and performance tests on

dummy loads;
5. Phase 5. Complete system operational and performance tests on

actual loads.
D. All the electrical systems, whether mentioned in this section or not, shall be
subject to testing and commissioning.
E. All tests listed under the heading of “Field Quality Control” in various sections
of Division-16 of these Specifications shall be conducted in the presence of
and performed upto the full satisfaction of the Engineer. All the results/test
reports shall be submitted in bound form for Engineer’s approval.
2.02 ELECTRICAL TESTING
A. Tests of the installation shall be carried out in the following sequence:
1. Ring-main continuity.
2. Protective conductor continuity, including main and supplementary

equipotential bonding.
3. Earth electrode resistance.
4. Measurement of insulation resistance including site built assemblies

and distribution cables.
5. Check of protection by electrical separation, barriers and enclosures.
6. Measurement of the insulation on non-conducting floors and walls.
7. Check of phase rotation.
8. Verification of polarity.
9. Measurement of earth fault loop impedance.
303
10. Test of operation of residual current devices.
11. All external distribution cables, both high and low voltage in
accordance with the relevant standard(s).
12. Fault simulation on protective devices or control system of generator,

transformers, , power distribution boards, motor control centers, etc.
13. Load test on generator, sub-station, power distribution boards,

panelboards, etc..
2.03 LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS TESTING
A. All low current systems such as telephone, public address, fire detection and
alarm, Data, CCTV, CATV, security, etc. shall be tested as specified herein or
recommended by the manufacturers.
B. Submit to the Engineer in writing the procedure to test these systems as a

whole for the site.
C. At the completion of these special systems installation for each facility, these
shall be tested individually for each facility then it should be tested with their
main control panel, such as fire detection and alarm, telephone, CATV etc. so
that to see the good performance of these systems as a whole.
PART 3 COMMISSIONING
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the requirements given in Contract Conditions and other related
sections of the specifications.
B. All Electrical Equipment and integral systems shall be commissioned in

accordance with the relevant standards and regulations given in the
Specification and to the recommendations of specialist suppliers (e.g.
Switchboards, Generators, Fire Detection and Alarm System, Public Address
System, Cables, etc.).
C. Full operational tests shall be carried out on all systems to demonstrate that
they operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
3.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD / PANELBOARDS
A. Design tests of: Rated continuous current.

Short circuit current.
Enclosure dielectric.
304
B. Production tests of: Dielectric.

Mechanical operation.
Grounding.
Control wiring.
Electrical operation.
3.03 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION SYSTEM
A. Field erected fuel piping shall be tested with air pressure and proven right at
150 % of the working pressure for a period of two hours.
B. Shops tests shall be performed in accordance with the following

requirements:
1. Unless otherwise directed, all tests shall be performed in the presence

of the Supervising Engineer.
2. Each assembled engine and generator shall be tested in accordance

with the manufacturer's customary practice.
3. All components shall be checked, lube-oil leaks shall be remedied.

C. Following the complete installation of the generating unit and its associated
equipment, field tests shall be conducted. Provide all instruments and
supplies required for the tests. Fuel instruments and instrumentation
procedures to be followed shall be appropriate for the tests to be performed.
Prior to the startup of any generating units, the Contractor shall demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all piping systems have been cleaned.
D. Sequence of Field Tests:
1. Check all engine and driven unit mounting bolts.
2. Check alignment of engine and generator by dial indication.
3. Check generator motor air gap.
4. Check generator and exciter insulation resistance with an insulation

resistance tester.
5. Perform engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks. This

shall include a test of the prestart lube-oil pump to determine if
adequate oil pressure is provided.
6. Start engine and make engine manufacturer's after starting checks

during a reasonable run-in or warm-up period.
305
7. Operate generator with step loads of 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% for 7
hours and 110% for 1 hour rated load. Record data hourly, including
current, voltage, frequency kW and temperature information. A load
bank has to be provided by the Contractor.
8. Increase engine speed by means of the governor. Check speed at

which overspeed device trips.
9. Check functioning of high coolant temperature trip by restricting air into

the radiator.
10. Shut down engine and record pressure at which low oil pressure
device trips.
E. Checks to be made during field testing:
1. During the tests, all operations of which the controls on the panel and
at the switchboard are capable shall be performed to assure that all
controls are functioning in a satisfactory manner.
2. At several points during the tests, each instrument on the switchboard

and engine panel shall be observed to assure that all instruments and
gauges are functioning properly.
3. During the tests, all auxillary and accessory equipment, all valves
including pilot valves, and the injection pumps shall be checked to
assure proper operation.
4. During the 100 % load test, pyrometer reading of each cylinder of each
engine shall be taken and recorded at 1/2 hour intervals.
F. After completion of the tests, a general inspection shall be made for:
1. Leaks in the engine, piping systems, tanks, etc.
2. Blow-by.
3. Crankcase contamination.
4. Crankshaft misalignment.
5. Generator misalignment and damage to generator bearings.
3.04 UPS SYSTEM
A. All routine tests specified in IEC 146-4 shall be carried out, together with
tests listed below, both at the factory testing and on site. The UPS Supplier
shall allow for providing a 110% load bank to fully commission the system
306
following completion. Full load and battery discharge tests are required on
site. The load bank shall be capable of 110% kW loading at 0.7 power
factor.
1. Synchronisation (dual variable voltage and variable frequency supplies

will be required for this purpose at the factory ).
2. Rated stored energy time.
3. Rated restored energy time.
4. Battery ripple current.
5. Overload capacity.
6. Restart.
7. Audible noise.
8. Earth fault test.
9. Full load test.
10. Tests to prove alarm and control indication and auxiliary devices.
B. Factory tests and on-site tests shall include but not be limited to:-
1. Checking and verifying output voltage, output frequency, input power

factor with 100% step load against 0.7 load power factor and against a
high harmonic load. (Note: A rectifier input of another UPS may be
used to simulate this at works).
2. Checking and verifying output current.
3. Checking and verifying synchronisation range.
4. Checking and verifying output, harmonic content both total and each
harmonic up to 19th, both in balanced and imbalanced load conditions
with 12% improved harmonic support at 0.7 pf.
5. Checking and verifying overload limits of 10%, 25% and 50% of full
load.
6. Checking and verifying short circuit and fuse clearing capability.
7. Checking and verifying efficiency on loads of 50%, 75% and 100% of

full load.
307
8. Checking and verifying heat losses at loads of 50%, 75% and 100% of
full load.
9. Checking and verifying noise levels at loads of 25%, 50%, 75% and
100% of full load.
10. Checking and verifying remote alarms, contacts and inputs.
11. Battery Chargers and DC Isolation Switchgear.
12. Check and verify output float voltage.
13. Check and verify output boost voltage.
14. Check and verify output current.
15. Check and verify ripple factor.
16. Check and verify operation of controls, alarms.
C. The paralleling switchboard shall be tested to the requirements of BS 5486,

and if not tested at factory with the UPS modules, to be fully functional tested
with full simulation of all digital and analogue inputs. This is to include all
autobypass and synchronising control simulation.
D. The supplier shall allow for up to 2 persons to witness the testing at the
manufacturer’s works including travel, accommodation and subsidence during
a minimum 2 day period. The supplier shall also allow for his commissioning
engineer, who is to carry out the on-site testing to observe and witness the
full factory testing of the units.
3.05 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
A. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before
system is energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made
as Work progresses.
B. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or

charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging
form for readings, dates and witnesses. The Engineer shall be notified before
the start of the required tests. All items found at variance with the drawings or
this specification during testing or inspection by the Engineer, shall be
corrected.
C. Test reports shall be delivered to the Engineer as completed.
308
D. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the
system tests shall be made available by the installing Contractor. The
following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:
1. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment.
2. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance.
3. Intelligent device programmer/tester.
4. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies.
5. Laptop computer with programming software for any required

programme revision.
6. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow through

air duct smoke detector sampling assemblies.
7. Decibel meter.
E. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing

Contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the Engineer.
F. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system
components and installation will be prepared by the Contractor and submitted
for review and approval to the Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, and
this specification. The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of
the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct
operation of all system components, circuits, and programming.
G. A programme matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor

referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of
an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using
more complex logic functions involving "any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and
"timer" statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the
matrix.
H. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays

and logging printers shall be prepared by the installing Contractor prior to the
ATP.
I. In conducting the ATP, the Engineer shall request demonstration of any or all
input and output functions. The items tested shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
1. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response

and correct subsequent system operation in the event of:
309
a. Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog or network

signalling circuits.
b. Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits.
c. Open, shorted and grounded speaker telephone circuits.
d. Primary power or battery disconnected.
e. Intelligent device removal.
f. Incorrect device at address.
g. Printer trouble, off line or out of paper.
2. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated

as follows:
a. All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed.

b. Audibility and visibility at required levels.
3. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:
a. Correct message display for each alarm input at the control

panel, each remote alpha-numeric display and each CRT
terminal.
b. Correct annunciator light for each alarm input at each
annunciator and colour graphic terminal as shown on the
drawings.
c. Correct printer logging for all system activity.
4. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows:
a. Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input.

b. Trouble signals received for disconnect.
5. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:
a. System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time

as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm
condition shall be created and the system shall perform as
specified for a period as specified.
b. System primary power shall be restored for forty eight hours and
system charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully
charged battery bank.
c. System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked
at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and
displayed on the LCD display.
6. Fireman's HVAC override system functions shall be demonstrated as

follows:
310
a. Operation of key lockout switch preventing unauthorised

operation of controls.
b. On/Off controls of each controlled element and test of
interaction of other automatic and manual control functions
while in the over-ride mode.
c. Correct status display of monitored elements.
d. Correct logging of activity to printer and historical memory as
programmed.
J. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during

the ATP procedure, at the discretion of the Engineer, the test shall be
terminated. The installing Contractor shall retest the system, correcting all
deficiencies and providing test documentation to the Engineer. The Engineer
may elect to require the complete ATP to be preformed again if, in his
opinion, modifications to the system warrant complete retesting.
K. Changes made to a systems configuration program required by the

acceptance inspector or to comply with the systems operating parameters
shall be validated to insure that in making the software programming change
no other part of the systems operation was effected. The validation shall
utilize systems software which meets the requirements of NFPA 72 section 7-
1.6 "System Reacceptance Testing" as specified in the NFPA 72 National
Fire Alarm Code 1993 edition. Change validation methods other than that
described will not be considered acceptable and shall allow the acceptance
inspector to require the complete ATP to be performed again.
3.06 SAFETY TAGGING PROCEDURES
A. Develop and submit for Engineer’s approval prior to implementation, a safety

tagging procedure for use when working on energized systems or to identify
systems that have been turned over to operations.
B. Provide plastic tags of minimum dimensions 300 x 200 x 3 mm with

appropriate internationally recognized pictorial symbols and statements in
Arabic and English languages for use as safety tag. The tags shall be
coloured red with white letters or coloured yellow with black letters as
approved by the Engineer. The letters shall be at least 20 mm high or more
as required. The safety tag shall be provided with fire resistant rope for
suspension at suitable locations.
C. Type of safety tags shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Refer to the equipment instructions/manual for important information

before proceeding.
311
2. This unit must be accessed only by qualified personnel.
3. Do not switch ON. Work is in progress on other end.
4. Danger – Hazardous AC (or DC) voltage.
5. Danger – AC mains voltage.
6. Danger – Hot surface. Do not touch without taking care.
7. Risk of injury due to high current.
8. Avoid contacting conductors with un-insulated metal objects. Follow

safety precautions. Make sure the power is disconnected.
9. Danger – Arcing/Sparking may happen. Risk of eye injury. Always

wear safey glasses.
10. Make sure the equipment is grounded before switching ON power.
D. The installation and removal of safety tagging shall be carried out with the
permission of an authorized Client’s or Engineer’s representative.
E. Approved type of pad locks shall be provided to lock out any circuit breaker,
isolator, switch fuse or a piece of equipment to prevent accidental turn ON or
turn OFF. The keys shall be in the custody of an authorized Client’s or
Engineer’s representative.
312

Electical Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electical Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHOUIFAT HOTELS AND MALL - EL TAGAMOA EL KHAMES, EGYPT

CHOUIFAT HOTEL AND MALL

16000 ------------ ELECTRICAL GENERAL AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

ELECTRICAL — GENERAL AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

1.02 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:

1.03 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIRMENTS:

Section M-E 16000,

B. Drawings and Specifications: Electrical drawings indicated general design and

C. Specification by brand name: where materials, equipment, apparatus or other

A. Materials Substitution: Is the intent of these specifications to establish a standard

1.06 MINOR DEVIAITONS AND CHANGES:

A. Installation: shall be as designed and in accordance with contract drawings and

1.07 EXAMINATION OF SITE:

1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS:

1.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. Furnish one set of marked-up prints showing as built installation in accordance

A. Workmanship and operation of electrical installation shall be guaranteed for one

1.11 CODES AND REGULATIONS:

A. Comply with latest requirements of local utility company, national electrical

A. Materials and installation will confirm to standards and practices of international

1.13 PROGRESS OF WORK:

Section M-E 16000

1.14 PERMITS, FEES, TAXES:

A. Provide bracing, scaffolding, guard rails and protective devices necessary to

2.02 TEMPORARY SERVICES:

A. Construction power and lighting: Provide temporary electrical service up to point

B. Temporary wiring: Provide temporary wiring necessary for operation and

2.03 LOW VOLTAGE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION:

A. Workmanship: Layout work in advance and install in a neat workmanship

D. Operating instructions and manuals: Furnish in accordance with general

A. Operating and acceptance tests: Conduct operating test on entire electrical

Section M-E 16000,

A. Final acceptance tests: upon completion of work, present certificate of approval

END OF SECTION 16000

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Future Provision for Incoming power supply from Electricity Supply

1.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

1.05 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS

1. The British standards BS 7430 .

6. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).

1.06 LOW CURRENT & SPECIAL SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS

have a fully functional system as specified and as recommended by the

1.11 PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION

2. National Electrical Code (NEC) – NFPA 70.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

6. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).

7. Illumination Engineering Society (IES).

8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

9. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

10. International Organization of Standardization (ISO).

11. European Committee for Electrical Standardization (CENELEC).

12. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultive committee (CCITT).

13. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

14. Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE Wiring Regulation (BS

15. British Standards (BS).

16. Requirements or Standards stated elsewhere within the Specifications.

1.15 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

1.16 LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION

1.21 SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTION STUDY

1. Fault current available at each major equipment bus.